Rheology Modifiers Handbook: Practical Use and Applilcation (Materials and Processing Technology)

RHEOLOGY MODIFIERS HANDBOOK Practical Use and Application

by David B. Braun

Meyer R. Rosen

Interactive Consulting Inc. East Norwich, New York

William Andrew Publishing Norwich, New York, USA

Copyright by William Andrew Publishing Llbrary of Congress Catalog Card Number: 99-32076 ISBN: 0-8155-1441-7 Prlnted In the United States Published In the United States of America by Willlam Andrew Publishing 13 Eaton Avenue, Norwich, New York 13815 10987654321

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Rheology modifiers handbook: practical use & application / by David B. Braun and Meyer R. Rosen. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 0-8155-1441-7 1. Rheology. I. Rosen, Meyer R. II. Title. TP156.R45 B73 2000 99-32076 660’ .29--dc21 CIP CIP

About The Authors David B. Braun As a research and development scientist, David B. Braun has worked in a broad spectrum of industries and technologies for many years These industries include rubber, plastics, pulp and papermaking, mining, ceramics, cosmetics and pharmaceuticals. Mr. Braun’s R&D activities have spanned a wide variety of consumer and industrial products employing rheology modifiers. David has written numerous technical papers for presentation to various professional organizations associated with these industries. He is also the author of two books relating to the pharmaceutical industry; Over-the-Counter Pharmaceutical Formulations and Pharmaceutical Manufacturers–A Global Directory, both published by Noyes Publications. He is also the author of chapters in the Third Edition of the Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology published by John Wiley & Sons and Handbook of Water-soluble Gums and Resins published by McGraw-Hill, Inc. In addition, Mr. Braun has been awarded 11 United States and numerous worldwide patents. He was a member of several professional societies and is currently an Associate in the consulting firm, Interactive Consulting, Inc.1 He can be contacted at (508) 430-0815 or E-mail [email protected].

ii

Meyer R. Rosen Meyer R. Rosen, DABFE, CChem, CPC, CChE, DABFET is President of Interactive Consulting, Inc., East Norwich, N.Y.1 He is a Fellow of the Royal Society of Chemistry (London); Vice President of the Association of Consulting Chemists and Chemical Engineers, a Director of The American Institute of Chemists and a Fellow of the American College of Forensic Examiners. Mr. Rosen consults for much Fortune 500 corporations involved in the development, optimization and quality control of new and existing products in the consumer, household, cosmetic, industrial, pharmaceutical and medical areas. He holds 21 US Patents and also writes regularly for the Focus Reports Section of Chemical Market Reporter and for Global Cosmetic Industry. Meyer’s interests include customized market research, analysis and development, technical writing and consultation to attorneys in technical product litigation. His broad fields of expertise include water-soluble polymers and their applications, organosilicones, and the creative application of fundamental surface, interfacial and rheological science for the solution of technical and business problems in the use and application of specialty chemicals. 1

P.O. Box 66, East Norwich, NY 11732, USA. Tel: (516) 922-2167, FAX: (516) 922-3830 E-mail: [email protected].

iii

Acknowledgements Meyer R. Rosen acknowledges Selma M. Rosen, his beloved wife and soul mate for her commitment to him in all things. The authors thank Mr. Milton Mendez for his careful attention to detail regarding the number of Greek letters, superscripts, subscripts and equations found in part 1 of the text.

iv

Contents

Page Part 1 Practical Rheology 1. Introduction 2. Special Characteristics of Dispersions and Emulsions 3. Three Schools of Rheological Thinking 4. Thinking Rheo-logically 5. Definitions 6. Types of Flow Behavior 7. Characterization of Non-Newtonian Flow: Mathematical Models and Experimental Methods 8. Viscometry; Instrumentation and Use 9. Summary 10. Symbols and Abbreviations 11. References

49 64 65 67

Part 2 Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers Introduction 1. Acrylic Polymers 2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 3. Alginates 4. Associative Thickeners 5. Carrageenan 6. Microcrystalline Cellulose 7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 8. Hydroxyethylcellulose 9. Hydroxypropylcellulose 10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 11. Methylcellulose 12. Guar & Guar Derivatives 13. Locust Bean Gum 14. Organoclay

71 74 81 89 94 99 106 109 114 119 121 128 132 138 141

v

2 6 9 12 14 19 27

Part 2 Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 15. Polyethylene 16. Polyethylene Oxide 17. Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone 18. Silica 19. Water-swellable Clay 20. Xanthan Gum

Page 151 157 161 167 174 184

Part 3 Selecting the Best Candidates Introduction 1. For Food Applications 2. For Pharmaceutical Applications 3. For Personal Care Applications 4. For Household/Institutional Applications

194 199 213 222 243

Part 4 Formulary Introduction 1. Food Formulations 2. Pharmaceutical Formulations 3. Personal Care Formulations 4. Household/Institutional Formulations

259 261 297 340 425

Appendix A Suppliers of Viscometers and Other Rheological Instruments

489

Appendix B Trade Name Directory

498

Appendix C Suppliers of Rheology Modifiers

502

vi

Preface Rhe•ol•o•gy \rē-!ä-lə-jē\ n : a science dealing with the deformation and flow of matter (fluids in this text) Merriam Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, 10th Edition

Rheology Modifier : A material that alters the rheology of fluid compositions to which it is added Authors

Rheology modifiers seem to be almost as ubiquitous as plastics. Most of us regularly consume them in the food and pharmaceuticals we use. Cosmetic creams, lotions, nail polish and liquid make-up also usually contain rheology modifiers to achieve proper application characteristics. We clean our kitchens, baths, floors and automobiles with products that frequently contain these important ingredients. Even the paint we apply to walls and woodwork contains these useful additives. These are only a few of the applications of rheology modifiers. They may be multi-functional agents in these applications, providing such desirable effects as viscosity, the ability to suspend insoluble ingredients, emulsion stability, anti-sag and vertical surface cling, for example. During our lengthy careers in the Research and Development Departments of major chemical companies, we were frequently confronted with the need to select a rheology modifier for use in the application we were working on. This was invariably a long, arduous task requiring review of the technical literature of numerous suppliers of rheology modifiers to determine which types of products would be suitable for the application. This was followed by contact with those companies that supplied the desired products to obtain their latest technical literature and product recommendations. Finally, we would pare the list of potential candidates from hundreds to perhaps a few dozen. vii

But we often wondered why there existed no rheology modifier sourcebook, i.e., a single volume that would enable me to easily identify the best candidates for the application with a minimum investment of time. This handbook is our attempt to correct that deficiency. Our goal is to bring together, in one volume, the information that a researcher needs to select the best rheology modifier candidates for his/her project, whether it is a food, pharmaceutical, cosmetic or household/industrial application. It includes information on twenty different chemical types of rheology modifiers, from acrylic polymers to xanthan gum, manufactured by twenty-six chemical companies around the world. This handbook is divided into four major parts: Part I reviews of the basic concepts of rheology and its measurement from a practical standpoint. This is information the researcher needs to compare the performance of various rheology modifiers in the intended application. Part II presents details about the many commercial products of each chemical type that are available from the twenty-six companies represented in this book. The products are arranged alphabetically, first by chemical type, then by supplier’s name and finally by trade name. An attempt has also been made to differentiate products in a given product line. Over 1000 commercial products are included in this Part. Part III focuses on the important step of selecting the most suitable rheology modifier candidates. It summarizes the applications for which each type of rheology modifier is recommended so that the user of this handbook can immediately identify which types are recommended for the intended application. It also covers regulatory issues that the user should be familiar with when choosing a product for use in a food or pharmaceutical application. At this point, it is prudent for the user to contact the suppliers of the best candidates to get their recommendation for the products in their line which are the most suitable for the intended application. viii

Part IV is a formulary containing the contributions of the product suppliers. These 227 starting formulations are arranged by industry; food, pharmaceutical, cosmetic and household/industrial. They are designed to show which rheology modifiers are recommended for various applications and how they are normally incorporated into a formulation. Following these four major parts, are three appendixes that provide the names, addresses, telephone and FAX numbers, Internet Web Page locations and E-mail addresses for the suppliers of rheological instruments and suppliers of rheology modifiers represented in this book. Also appended is a trade name directory indicating the owners of trade names that appear in this handbook. The authors hope this book will enable researchers to reduce the time required to select the best rheology modifiers for an intended application from a matter of days to a matter of hours. David B. Braun Meyer R. Rosen

ix

Part 1 Practical Rheology Contents Page 1. Introduction

2

2. Special Characteristics of Dispersions And Emulsions

6

3. Three Schools of Rheological Thinking

9

4. Thinking Rheo-logically

12

5. Definitions

14

6. Types of Flow Behavior

19

7. Characterization of Non-Newtonian Flow: Mathematical Models and Experimental Methods

27

8. Viscometry; Instrumentation and Use

49

9.

64

Summary

10. Symbols and Abbreviations

65

11. References

67

1

2

Rheology Modifier Handbook

1. Introduction In the first section of Part 1 we introduce the basics of Practical Rheology. This includes examples of products and processes that employ rheological measurement as well as a concise summary of ASTM viscosity test procedures describing the characterization of a broad range of materials. The second section of Part 1 describes the more common types of flow behavior. This includes methods for measuring rheological properties and describing complex flow behavior with a minimum of useful parameters. The use of such tools and techniques allows rheological measurement to be used as an effective tool for the characterization of a broad range of industrial fluids. The discussion concludes with a description of several of the more common viscometers. Appendix A contains a partial listing of viscometer manufacturers and contact information as well as some of the viscometric instruments they manufacture. A wide variety of useful industrial products and processes require tailormade flow properties as an integral part of product performance requirements. Effective control of such properties relies heavily on a knowledge of the effect of formulation and process variables as well as an ability to measure and characterize meaningful flow property information. Rheology modifiers play a significant role in achieving desirable flow characteristics and this handbook describes the properties of all the major types as well as their practical use and application. Examples of some of the wide variety of products and processes which rely on rheological characterization include food products, pharmaceuticals, biological fluids and a host of miscellaneous materials. In the food category, rheological phenomena are important for tomato juice, dehydrated potato granules, soft serve ice milk and microcrystalline cellulose thickeners. Also included in this category are single cell protein concentrates, milk coagulation, chocolate, dressings and sauces. In the biological area, work has been done on blood, serum, exocrine secretions, sweat, duodenal fluid and synovial fluid.

Practical Rheology

3

Among the many miscellaneous applications for rheology we find asphalts, hevea latex, aerated poultry waste and livestock slurry characterization. The list continues with color cosmetics, lubricants, clay gellants, black liquor (paper processing) and ceramics. Also included are one-fire glazes, enamel slips, thick film ceramic pastes and dental impression materials. Other examples include solder paste, molten glass, high titanium oxide slags and blast furnace slags. Coconut oil liquid soaps are also characterized rheologically as well as vinyl plastisols, urethane foam prepolymers, inks, paper coatings, high solids coatings and solvent based coatings. The American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) has provided standards of control and testing for many years. The use of Practical Rheology is clearly evident in the breadth and scope of the kinds of products and processes which benefit from rheological characterization. One of the authors is a member of several standards-making committees and is well apprised of the wide variety of industry specialists involved in setting up useful, working standards. While the individual reader of this work may be specifically focused upon a certain industry, or type of product, the authors feel that a succinct overview of the kinds of materials which have benefited will be of value in setting the stage for generating a powerful view of what Practical Rheology is and can be. In the Petroleum field the ASTM provides tests for testing of rubberized tar (D 2994-77), and coal tar (D 1665, D 1669-51 and D 5018-89). In the heavy petroleum end there are tests for unfilled asphalts (D 4402-87), asphalt emulsion resins (D 4957-95) and asphalt roof coatings (D 4479). Other rheological tests in the asphalt area include D 2170, D 3205, D 3791-90, D 244, D 2161 and D 4957. Bitumen rheology tests for nonNewtonian systems are described in D 4957. Testing of lubricating greases (D 3232-88), aircraft turbine lubricants (D 2532-93) and engine oils (D4684) are also covered as well as roofing bitumens in D 4989-90. ASTM has tests for hydrocarbon oils such as fuel oil pumpability (D 3245), lubricating oils (D 2270) and engine oils (D 5133 and D 5293). Testing of hydraulic fluids is described in D 6080 and automotive fluid lubricants are tested in D 2983-87. Oil standards are described in D 2162.

4

Rheology Modifier Handbook

Rubber testing in the carbon black industry is conducted using D 4483, rubber latexes in D 5605 and D 1417. SBR latexes are covered in D 3346 and prevulcanized rubber testing in D 1646. Ammonia-preserved (concentrated) creamed and centrifuged natural rubber latex testing is described in D 1076-88 while rheological testing of synthetic rubber latexes is described in D 1417-90. The field of polymers has numerous ASTM tests for characterization and control. Some of these include tests for Hydroxyethylcellulose (D 236485), Ethylcellulose (D 914-72), Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose (D 1439-83), and Hydroxypropylcellulose (D 5400-93). Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose testing is shown in both D 3346-90 and D 2363. Polymer-containing fluid testing is described in D 3945 while tests for polyols are shown in D 4989-91. Polyethylene terephthalate rheology testing is described in D 4603-96 and epoxy resin evaluation is described in D 2393-86. Polyamide rheology testing is covered in D 789. Common products such as chemical grouts are evaluated rheologically in D 4016-81 as are printing inks and their vehicles (D 4040-96), grout for pre-placed aggregate concrete (C 939-87) and glass, above its softening point (C 965-81). Paint testing is covered in D 1084-88 and D 562-81. Varnishes for electrical testing are described in D 115-85 and emulsion polymers for floor polishes are covered in D-3716-83. Liquid-applied neoprene and chlorosulfonated polyethylene in roofing water proofing is described in D 3468-93. Adhesives testing is available in D 1084-88 and D 4300-83. Testing of hot melt adhesives is described in D 3236-88 and hot melts made from petroleum waxes with additives are covered in D 2669-87. Mold powder testing above the melting point is shown in C 1276. Miscellaneous rheological testing is available from the ASTM for tall oil (D 803), clear liquids (D 1545), crude or modified isocyanates for polyurethanes (D 4889-93), volatile and reactive liquids (D 4486-91) and plastisols and organosols (D 1823 and D 1824). Still other ASTM rheology tests exist for solid propellants, starch and solder paste.

Practical Rheology

5

Having reviewed the host of rheological testing described by the ASTM. One can see the great value of rheology evaluation across a broad spectrum of industries. We turn our attention now to the use of rheology in the cosmetic and toiletry industry. Most of the products on the market today in this market are emulsions (either of the oil-in-water or water-inoil types), aqueous suspensions or a combination of the two. Many skin care creams and lotions are oil-in-water emulsions, while liquid makeup formulations are suspensions of pigments in an oil-in-water emulsion. Antidandruff shampoos are usually suspensions. Certain organosilicones are highly effective dispersants for pigments used in color cosmetics.

6

Rheology Modifier Handbook

2. Special Characteristics of Dispersions and Emulsions The following quote is reprinted by permission of Brookfield Engineering Laboratories from Section 4.7.4 of it’s technical manual(53), More Solutions to Sticky Problems- A Guide to Getting More from Your Brookfield Viscometer. This manual has had worldwide distribution for over 20 years and has become a standard in the industry. Meyer R. Rosen, the co-author of this handbook, was a contributing author to this Brookfield Manual. “Dispersions and emulsions, which are multiphase materials consisting of one or more solid phases dispersed in a liquid phase, can be affected rheologically by a number of factors. In addition to many of these discussed previously, characteristics peculiar to multiphase materials are also significant to the rheology of such materials. One of the major parameters to study is the state of aggregation of the sample material. Are the particles that make up the solid phase separate and distinct or are they clumped together; how large are the clumps and how tightly are they stuck together? If the clumps (i.e. flocs) occupy a large volume in the dispersion, the viscosity of the dispersion will tend to be higher than if the floc volume was smaller. This is due to the greater force required to dissipate the solid component of the dispersion. When flocs are aggregated in a dispersion, the reaction of the aggregates to shear can result in shear-thinning (pseudoplastic) flow. At low shear rates, the aggregates may be deformed but remain essentially intact. As the shear rate is increased, the aggregates may be broken down into individual flocs, decreasing friction and therefore, viscosity. If the bonds within the aggregates are extremely strong, the system may display a yield value. The magnitude of the yield value depends on the force required to break these bonds and is often critical in suspending materials within the formulation. If a material’s flocculated structure is destroyed with time as it is sheared, a time-dependent type of flow behavior will be observed. If the

Practical Rheology

7

shear rate is decreased after some or all of the flocculated structure is disrupted, the material’s viscosity may be lower than it previously was at the same shear rate. Since flocs begin to link together after destruction, the rate at which this occurs affects the time required for viscosity to attain previous levels. If the re-linking rate is high, viscosity will be about the same as before. If the re-linking rate is low, viscosity will be lower. This results in the rheological behavior called ‘Thixotropy’. The attraction between particles in a dispersed phase is largely dependent on the type of material present at the interface between the dispersed phase and the liquid phase. This in turn affects the rheological behavior of the system. Thus, the introduction of flocculating or deflocculating agents into a system is one method of controlling its rheology. The shape of the particles making up the dispersed phase is also of significance in determining a system’s rheology. Particles suspended in a flowing medium are constantly being rotated. If the particles are essentially spherical, rotation can occur freely. If, however, the particles are needle- or plate-shaped, the ease with which rotation can occur is less predictable, as is the effect of varying shear rates. The stability of a dispersed phase is particularly critical when measuring the viscosity of a multiphase system. If the dispersed phase has a tendency to settle, producing a non-homogeneous fluid, the rheological characteristics of the system will change. In most cases, this means that the measured viscosity will decrease. Data acquired during such conditions will usually be erroneous, necessitating special precautions to ensure that the dispersed phase remains in suspension.” (53) The cosmetic chemist is faced with the formidable task of combining a number of different cosmetic ingredients (frequently ten or more) to form a stable composition with the desired flow characteristics, application properties and aesthetics. Having accomplished the task in the laboratory, it must then be scaled up to production sized batches without losing any of the desired performance characteristics. Thereafter, the product quality must be controlled to ensure that each production batch is the same.(57)

8

Rheology Modifier Handbook

It is common practice to measure the viscosity of a cosmetic composition and use this property as a quality control parameter. A single viscosity measurement at a single shear rate (or spindle speed if using a Brookfield Viscometer) does not provide adequate definition of the rheology of the composition. This is because the cosmetic product is exposed to a broad spectrum of shear fields during preparation, packaging and eventual use by the consumer. For example, the use of a centrifugal pump to transport the product from the mixing tank to the packaging station involves exposure to high shear inside the pump. The act of pouring the composition from the container is a low shear process, but spreading the product on the skin involves high shear. Since many cosmetic suspensions and emulsions display pseudoplastic rheology, it is important to measure and control the viscosity over a range of shear rates. In order to address the issues described above, the flow properties of such materials may be described both qualitatively and quantitatively. Although the mathematics of rheology can be extremely complex, a qualitative appreciation for these phenomena may be gained by observing some common materials. For example, toothpaste acts like a liquid when the tube is squeezed, but acts like a solid when squeezing ceases. Some paints flow onto a wall easily but do not drip from a brush or flow down the wall. Initial stirring of a latex paint can be difficult, but will become easier as stirring continues. On cessation of stirring, the paint thickens with passing time. Qualitative observations such as those above can be quite useful for describing the great variety of flow properties typically encountered. However, to those concerned with producing and controlling such properties, a more quantitative approach is necessary. According to Section 1.3 of reference (53), “there are three schools of thought on viscosity measurement”. We present them here and invite you to decide which you belong to, remembering that there is no “right” one and that each school has its merits at certain times.

Practical Rheology

9

3. Three Schools of Rheological Thinking A. Pragmatic School “The first school of thought is the most pragmatic. The person who adheres to this school cares only that the Brookfield Viscometer generates numbers that tell something useful about a product or process. This person has little or no concern about rheological theory and measurement parameters expressed in absolute terms. Quality control and plant production applications are typical of this category. B. Theoretical School The second school of thought involves a more theoretical approach. Those adhering to this school know that some types of Brookfield Viscometers will not directly yield defined shear rates and absolute viscosities for non-Newtonian fluids. However, these people often find that they can develop correlations of ‘dial viscosity’ with important product or process parameters. Many people follow this school of thought. The applications rheology literature is replete with statements along the line of ‘I know the data isn’t academically defined, but I keep this fact in mind and treat the multi-point rheology information as if it were.’ In many cases, this produces eminently satisfying results and eliminates the necessity of buying a highly sophisticated and very expensive piece of rheological equipment. C. Academic School The third school of thought is quite academic in nature. People adhering to this school require that all measurement parameters, particularly shear rate and shear stress, be defined and known. They need equipment with defined geometries. Examples from the Brookfield line would be the Wells-Brookfield Cone/Plate Viscometer and the UL Adapter, Small Sample Adapter and the Thermosel accessories. With this equipment, the shear rate is defined and accurate absolute viscosity is obtained directly.

10 Rheology Modifier Handbook This then, is our view of the three schools of thought on viscosity measurement. You may need to think in terms of any or all of these depending on your background, approach, goals and type of equipment available. Brookfield users fall into all three categories.” (53) Before plunging into an understanding of a variety of mathematical models by which the rheological behavior of many practical systems may be characterized, we ask the reader to consider the question, “Why make rheological measurements?” We quote from Section 1.1 of Brookfield’s, More Solutions To Sticky Problems “Anyone beginning the process of learning to think rheologically must first ask the question, ‘Why should I make a viscosity measurement?’ The answer lies in the experiences of thousands of people who have made such measurements, showing that much useful behavioral and predictive information for various products can be obtained. This information is in addition to knowledge of the effects of processing, formulation changes, aging phenomena, etc. It is the knowledgeable analysis of appropriate rheological data that is the heart of what we have termed ‘Practical Rheology.’ A frequent reason for the measurement of rheological properties can be found in the area of quality control where raw materials must be consistent from batch to batch. For this purpose, flow behavior is an indirect measure of product consistency and quality. Another reason for making flow behavior studies is that a direct assessment of processibility can be obtained. For example, a high viscosity liquid requires more power to pump than a low viscosity one. Knowing its rheological behavior, therefore, is useful when designing pumping and piping systems. It has been suggested that rheology testing is the most sensitive method for material characterization because flow behavior is responsive to properties such as molecular weight and molecular weight distribution. This relationship is useful in polymer synthesis, for example, because it allows relative differences to be seen without making molecular weight measurements.

Practical Rheology 11 Rheological measurements are also useful in following the course of a chemical reaction. Such measurements can be employed as a quality check during production or to monitor and/or control a process. Rheological measurements allow the study of chemical, mechanical and thermal treatments, the effects of additives, or the course of a curing reaction. They are also a way to predict and control a host of product properties, end-use performance and material behavior.”(53) It should be clear at this juncture that “Practical Rheology” is a powerful part of the tools and methods used by the industrial scientist in a wide variety of fields.

12 Rheology Modifier Handbook

4. Thinking Rheo-Logically “To begin a more in-depth study of Practical Rheology consider the question, ‘Can some rheological parameter be employed to correlate with an aspect of the product or process?’ To determine this, an instinct must be developed for the kinds of chemical and physical phenomena that affect the rheological response. For the moment, assume this information is known and several possibilities have been identified. The next step is to gather preliminary rheological data to determine what type of flow behavior is characteristic of the system under consideration. At the most basic level, this involves making measurements with whichever Brookfield Viscometer is available and drawing some conclusions based on the descriptions of flow behavior types to follow later. Once the type of flow behavior has been identified, more can be understood about the way components of the system interact. The data thus obtained may then be fitted with one of the many mathematical models that have been successfully used. These mathematical models range from the very simple to the very complex. Some of them merely involve the plotting of data and just looking at it; others require calculating the ratio of two numbers. Some are quite sophisticated and require the use of computer-generated regression analysis. This kind of analysis is the best way for getting the most from your data. It often results in one or two “constants” which summarize the data and can be related to product or process performance. Once your system can be characterized by a few “constants” you can then change the formulation, arrange it, for example and determine how the “constants” change as a result of what you did. In this way, your rheological data indeed becomes a practical tool for assessing changes you make while developing or optimizing your system. With this approach comes the birth of “Practical Rheology.” Once a correlation has been developed between your rheological data and your product data, the procedure can be reversed and rheological data may be used to predict performance and behavior.”(53) With this ground to stand on, we offer an understanding of the more quantitative and extremely powerful methodology available for the practical

Practical Rheology 13 application of rheology to industrially useful and commercially significant products and systems.

14 Rheology Modifier Handbook

5. Definitions Consider the system shown in Figure 1.1. Fluid is contained between two parallel plates of area A cm2, separated by a distance X cm. A force F (dynes) is applied to the upper, movable plate and it attains a constant velocity V cm/sec. Since the bottom plate is stationary, the liquid may be considered to consist of several layers, each of which move at a different velocity between zero (at the stationary plate) and V cm/sec at the movable plate. If the liquid is under simple laminar shear, the following definitions can be made: Shear Stress τ = Force/Area = F/A dynes/cm2

(1)

Shear Rate γ = Velocity/Distance between the plates = V/X = cm/sec x 1/cm =

(2)

γ = 1/sec (or sec-1) Coefficient of Viscosity η = shear stress/shear rate η = τ/γγ η=

Force/Area Velocity/distance

(3) = dyne • sec cm2

Since one dyne is equivalent to one (gm • cm)/sec2, the coefficient of viscosity has the dimensions of mass/ (length x time).

Practical Rheology 15

Figure 1.1: Defining the Coefficient of Viscosity Redrawn from (56) by permission of John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

This coefficient is usually expressed in Poise and represents the resistance of the fluid to flow. The inverse of the coefficient of viscosity is sometimes used and is known as the fluidity (1). One Poise equals 100 centipoise (cP) and 1 centipoise equals 1 milliPascal•second (mPas). In the US, centipoise is the commonly used unit while milliPascal•seconds is commonly used in most other nations. When the shear stress is applied by the pressure of the liquid upon itself, the resistance to flow is expressed as the kinematic viscosity ν and has dimensions of stokes. Kinematic viscosity = ν = Coefficient of Viscosity (Poise) (4) Density of the Fluid (gm/cc) The coefficient of viscosity may be defined in two ways: as a “differential viscosity” or as an “apparent viscosity”. The difference between these can be seen in Figure 1.2.

16 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Figure 1.2 Definition of “Apparent” and “Differential” Viscosity A. “Differential” and “Apparent” Viscosity The “differential” viscosity is equal to the slope of the shear stress versus shear rate curve at some point A (or the tangent of the angle θ). The “apparent” viscosity is equal to the slope of a line that connects the origin with a given point A on the shear stress versus shear rate curve (or the tangent of the angle φ). Of the two methods for expressing the coefficient of viscosity, the “apparent viscosity” is usually chosen. This is because an “apparent” viscosity is easily measured at one fixed shear rate while a “differential” viscosity requires measurements at several shear rates followed by measurement of the slope at the shear rate of interest. B. Newtonian Fluids A Newtonian fluid has a constant coefficient of viscosity. A plot of shear stress versus shear rate results in a straight line which passes through the origin. In this case, the “differential viscosity” and the “apparent viscosity” are identical. In a Newtonian fluid, therefore, the coefficient of viscosity is known simply as the viscosity. Since the viscosity is a constant and independent of shear rate, one measurement serves to completely characterize the system.

Practical Rheology 17 C. Non-Newtonian Fluids Many of the fluids normally dealt with are non-Newtonian in behavior. A plot of shear stress versus shear rate results in a curve rather than a straight line. The coefficient of viscosity in such systems is different at each point on the shear stress versus shear rate curve. By treating this flow resistance data as if it were apparently Newtonian, at each point on the curve (i.e., using the tangent of the angle φ- see Figure 1.2), the “apparent viscosity” can be determined and will be seen to vary with the shear rate chosen. This variation of apparent viscosity can be particularly important when comparing the “thickening” behavior of two high molecular weight water-soluble polymers. One polymer may have a higher apparent viscosity than the other at a low shear rate, but a lower apparent viscosity at a high shear rate. It is obvious, therefore, that the measurement of a single apparent viscosity has little significance if the fluid is non-Newtonian. In such systems, it is not only necessary to measure viscosity at more than one shear rate, but the values must be in the range which is important for the particular application. (2) (Figure 1.3) A good example of this is the flow behavior of a paint since sagging occurs at a shear rate of about 0.01 sec –1 but brushing or rolling occurs at a shear rate of about 10,000 sec –1.

Figure 1.3 The Importance of Shear Rate for the Flow Behavior of a Paint Other examples(39) include the very low shear rate which occurs with the sedimentation of fine powders in a suspending liquid, for example, in color cosmetics, medicines and paints (10-6 to 10-4 sec –1), leveling due to surface tension effects, as in paints and printing inks (10-2 to 10-1 sec–1) and draining under gravity, as in paints and coatings as well as toilet bleaches (10-1-101 sec-1).

18 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Continuing up the spectrum of increasing shear rate, other examples of flow behavior include the extrusion of polymers (100-102 sec-1); chewing and swallowing of foods (101-102 sec–1), dip coating with paints and confectionery (101-102 sec–1) and mixing or stirring while manufacturing liquids (101-103 sec –1). At still higher shear rates, examples of flow behavior include pipe flow and blood flow (100-103 sec-1). Other examples of flow behavior at these higher shear rates include spray drying, painting, fuel atomization (103104 sec–1). In the personal care area, the shear rate associated with rubbing, as occurs in the application of creams and lotions to the skin is 104-105 sec-1. At the highest range of shear rate, an example of flow behavior is milling of pigments in fluid bases. This include paints and printing inks (103-105 sec –1 ), high speed paper coating (105-106 sec–1) and gasoline engine lubrication (103-107 sec –1).

Practical Rheology 19

6.Types of Flow Behavior Fluids exhibit several types of rheological behavior. These are presented in increasing order of the complexity of experimental technique required to measure them. The discussion below is restricted to simple shear flow and does not include normal stress phenomena or viscoelasticity. Excellent descriptions of these phenomena may be found elsewhere.(3) Flow behavior can be represented both graphically and numerically. Graphical depiction, or rheograms, are generally presented for any two of three parameters: apparent viscosity, shear rate and shear stress. The most common of these are plots employing shear rate and shear stress or those employing apparent viscosity and shear rate. Each type of plot is useful in certain situations. The former type of plot can be thought of more as a “raw data” plot, while the latter type directly presents the effect of shear rate on flow resistance. The various types of behavior can be broadly divided into two classifications: Time Independent and Time Dependent flow (see Figure 1.4 and Figure 1.11).

Figure 1.4 Types of Time Independent Flow Behavior

20 Rheology Modifier Handbook A. Time Independent Flow 1. Newtonian Flow The simplest type of time independent flow is Newtonian behavior. A Newtonian fluid is independent of both time and rate of shear. Some examples include water, solvents, dilute suspensions and silicone oil. Two graphical ways of describing this type of behavior are presented in Figure 1.5. It should be noted that the Newtonian model describes an idealized type of flow. In many systems, a material may exhibit Newtonian behavior over a wide range of shear rate, but may, surprisingly, demonstrate nonNewtonian behavior outside of that range. A good example of this is silicone oil, which is used as a standard viscosity fluid! According to Johnson, (41) silicone oil of a given molecular weight is Newtonian until high shear rate is attained. At this point, viscosity decreases with further increase of shear rate.

Figure 1.5 Newtonian Flow 2. Shear Thinning (Pseudoplastic) Flow A second type of time independent flow is the decrease of apparent viscosity with shear rate. This is known as Shear Thinning behavior, or Pseudoplasticity. Shear Thinning is a common behavior and is exhibited by concentrated polymer solutions, paints, and dispersed systems such as latex, inks and emulsions. Such behavior occurs when a system possesses structure that can be reversibly broken down as a stress is applied and then removed. Typical rheograms are shown in Figure 1.6.

Practical Rheology 21

Figure 1.6 Shear Thining Flow It will be noticed in Figure 1.6 that the slope of the shear stress-shear rate curve (or the apparent viscosity) increases rapidly as the shear rate approaches zero. In many cases, extrapolation of the curve to zero shear rate results in a positive intersection on the shear stress axis. This intercept is known as the yield stress. A fluid which has a positive intercept and a linear shear stress - shear rate function is said to exhibit ideal plastic flow and is known as a Bingham body. The rheogram for this type of flow is shown in Figure 1.7. The apparent viscosity is seen to

Fig 1.7 Bingham Body Flow approach infinity (i.e., a solid) as the shear rate approaches zero. The fluid acts like an elastic solid if the applied shear stress is below the critical shear stress, or yield stress.(8) If the stress exceeds the yield value, the material acts like a fluid. An apparent plastic viscosity can be defined using Equation (5).

22 Rheology Modifier Handbook Apparent Plastic Viscosity = (τ - τyield)/γγ

(5)

Experimentally, it is difficult to establish the yield values and even if they exist at all. This is because the shear stress - shear rate relationship must be determined down to very low values of shear rate and the increasing rate of curvature makes extrapolation to zero shear rate highly inaccurate. In some cases, materials are assigned yield values by extrapolation, when in fact they are actually shear thinning. To overcome these problems, several definitions have been proposed. Houwink (9,10) has defined a lower yield value, A and an upper yield value, C (Figure 1.8). The lower yield value is the extrapolated intersection with the shear stress axis and the upper yield value refers to the stress at which linear flow is established. Extrapolation of the linear portion of the line to zero shear rate determines B, the Bingham yield value. Some examples of systems which exhibit a yield stress include latex paint, cake frosting, certain types of ketchup and weakly crosslinked gels.

Figure 1.8 Shear Dependent Fluids with a Yield Stress Another definition of yield stress requires a linear dependence of shear stress on shear rate and the slope of the shear stress - shear rate function is one parameter of the Bingham model (Figure 1.9).

Practical Rheology 23

Figure 1.9 Definitions of Yield Value Non-linear, time independent variations of this are Shear Thinning and Shear Thickening fluids that have a yield stress. Examples of these can also be seen in Figure 1.9. 3. Shear Thickening (Dilatant) Flow A third type of time independent flow behavior is that exhibited by the Shear Thickening (or Dilatant) fluid. In this case, the apparent viscosity increases reversibly as the shear rate increases. Such behavior is not as common as Shear Thinning and it is incorrectly believed by some, that the fluid must dilate when it flows (hence, Dilatant).(5) Examples of Dilatant fluids are concentrated clay suspensions(6) and suspensions of glass rods.(7) The accepted mechanism of Dilatancy depends upon four factors that increase particle interaction. These are: concentration, In systems of high anisotropy of shape, size, and density.(7) concentration, application of shear produces a rearrangement of solids causing a mechanical “jam”. Non-spherical particles precess when subjected to shear. This effectively increases the occupied volume and the effective concentration. Large or denser particles possess greater inertia and when shear is applied, they are momentarily retarded, then accelerated. The energy expenditure required to accomplish this results in an additional resistance to flow, or a higher apparent viscosity. Typical curves are seen in Figure 1.10.

24 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Figure 1.10 Shear Thickening Flow B. Time Dependent Flow 1. Thixotropic Flow While the apparent viscosity of Newtonian, Shear Thinning (Pseudoplastic) and Shear Thickening (Dilatant) fluids is independent of time, other fluids exhibit these same properties and are time dependent as well (see Figure 1.11).

Figure 1.11 Time Dependent Flow If the apparent viscosity is measured under steady shear conditions and it decreases with time to an equilibrium value, the material is said to be

Practical Rheology 25 Thixotropic. On cessation of shearing, the apparent viscosity of a Thixotropic fluid increases with time. It has been postulated that Thixotropy is caused by the rupture of intermolecular bonds that are probably electrical in nature. A finite time is required for the rupture of these bonds because they vary in magnitude or distribution throughout the fluid. After shearing at a constant rate for a given time, an equilibrium is reached. In this state a balance exists between the applied shear stress and the strength of an appreciable number of bonds.(5) A decrease or increase of the applied stress results in a new equilibrium and the effect is reversible. In some cases, even after a long time, the apparent viscosity may only return to a fraction of its original value. This phenomenon is known as shear degradation. In making measurements on Thixotropic fluids, the shearing history of the sample and span of time required for the measurement is very important. If two samples are compared and they do not have identical shear history, the results will not be comparable. If the time effect is much shorter or much longer than that required for measurement, such effects can easily be overlooked. Thixotropy is usually associated with the presence of a yield stress. In some cases, the yield stress may be unaltered by shear and in others, it may be lowered.(9) Examples of these may be seen in Figure 1.12.

Figure 1.12 Thixotropic Fluid with Yield Value

26 Rheology Modifier Handbook Such Thixotropic curves are usually obtained by determining the shear stress first at one rate of shear and then at several others by rapidly changing from one shear rate to another. The procedure is carried out by first increasing shear rate and then decreasing it. The area within the loop is taken as a measure of the sample’s Thixotropy. Examples of materials that exhibit Thixotropy are latex paints, organosols and gelled alkyd oil paints.(2) Some vinyl plastisols have been observed to exhibit Thixotropic-Dilatant behavior. These unusual systems show viscosity increases with increasing shear rate but decreasing viscosity with time, at constant shear rate. 2. Rheopectic Flow The second type of time dependent-shear dependent flow is Rheopexy. While being subjected to steady state shear, a Rheopectic fluid exhibits more resistance to flow with passing time. This behavior is generally associated with aggregation or association as a consequence of shear. Rheopectic behavior is not commonly observed. Such flow behavior has been seen with dilute polymer solutions.(13) In these polymer solutions, Rheopexy is assumed to be caused by reversible cross-link formation (12). Examples of materials which have exhibited unusual PseudoplasticRheopectic behavior are polymeric microcrystalline gels.(14) These systems show viscosity decreases with increasing shear, but viscosity increases with time, at constant shear rate.

Practical Rheology 27

7. Characterization of Non Newtonian Flow Mathematical Models and Experimental Methods In dealing with the complexities of non-Newtonian flow, methods are required which allow the description, interpretation, and correlation of flow properties. To this end, a number of mathematical models and techniques have been developed which describe such behavior. In this section, attention is paid to several of these. Despite the trend to develop constitutive theories through the application of continuum mechanics (15), simple models for describing non-Newtonian behavior find many useful applications in industry.(16) Ideally, a simple model for non-Newtonian flow should have four characteristics.(17) It should: 1. Give an accurate fit of the experimental data 2. Have a minimum of independent constants 3. Have constants that are readily evaluated 4. Have constants with some physical basis The constants of such models have been successfully used in many industrial systems to characterize and correlate important responses. The present discussion separates these models and methods into two categories: time-independent and time-dependent flow.

A. Characterization of Time-Independent Flow In a shear thinning fluid, a simple plot of shear stress versus shear rate (see Figure 1.6, shown again below) results in a curve that bends as it approaches the origin. In this region, experimental data is difficult to obtain. In many cases, such curvature is eliminated by using the method of Casson.(18, 19)

28 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Figure 1.6 Shear Thinning Flow. This is accomplished with:

τ1/2 = K0 + K1 γ1/2

(6)

Where τ is the shear stress (dyn/cm2), γ is the shear rate (sec-1), and K0 and K1 are constants. In this method the square root of the shear stress is plotted versus the square root of the shear rate. A straight line results with an intercept K0 and a slope K1 (Figure 1.13). The intercept, K0, is usually obtained by extrapolation to zero shear rate and is similar to Houwink's lower yield value.(20) Casson's method has found use in correlating the flow properties of ink (18) and blood.(21) Casson's equation was originally derived for particles suspended in a Newtonian medium. An extension of his treatment(19) for particles suspended in a non-Newtonian fluid that follows the power law, results in equation (7) (Figure 1.14).

Practical Rheology 29

Figure 1.13 Casson Plot

Figure 1.14 Extended Casson Plot

τ1/2 = K'0 + K'1 γB/2

(7)

Where K'0, K'1, and B are constants. The constant B is equal to the exponent of the shear rate in the empirical flow equation known as the power law. This will be covered in greater detail later in the discussion. Equation (7) is plotted as the square root of shear stress versus shear rate to the B/2 power. The straight line which results has a slope K'1 and an intercept K'0 (Figure 1.14). The extended Casson equation has found use in correlating data for enamels, lacquers, and solvent solutions of filmforming polymers.(19)

30 Rheology Modifier Handbook A good empirical equation for correlating pseudoplastic fluids over a wide range of shear rates was developed by Williamson.(22) (η η0 - η∞) η = η∞ +  τ 1+ 

(8)

τm

In this model the fluid is assumed to have a viscosity both at zero shear rate (η0) and at infinite shear rate (η∞). The concept of a viscosity at infinite shear rate is really a mathematical artifact obtained by extrapolation. It has, however, found considerable use and may be interpreted as the condition where all rheological structure has been broken down.(23) Systems possessing different degrees of structural character can be compared on the same basis at infinite shear rate.(24) In Equation (8), τ is the absolute value of the shear stress and τm is the shear stress at which the apparent viscosity is the mean of the viscosity limits, η0 and η∞. At τ = τm:

(η η0 + η∞) η =  2

(9)

The Williamson equation was empirically extended by Cramer(25) in 1968 and took the form: (10)

Where | γ | is the absolute value of the shear rate and α1, and α2 are constants. Cross(17) has derived a model based on simple kinetic theory that assumed flow was associated with the formation and rupture of links. This equation applies to any non-Newtonian fluid without a yield stress. It is also capable of fitting data in the low shear rate range where the Casson plot may become nonlinear for some systems (Figure 1.13). Cross assumed, as did Williamson (22), that a shear thinning fluid has two

Practical Rheology 31 regions of constant apparent viscosity: a zero shear viscosity η0 and an infinite shear viscosity η∞. The apparent viscosity varies between these two limits at intermediate ranges of shear rate, and this variation is characterized by a constant α. The equation is: (11) Where α and N are constants. In the wide variety of systems tested, N was most usually 2/3. α is characterized in terms of a characteristic shear rate at which the apparent viscosity of the system is the mean of the two limiting values η0 and η∞:

γ mean = α-1/N

(12)

The system's apparent viscosity is:

(η η0 + η∞) η mean =  2

(13)

The apparent viscosity-shear rate relation (17) can be seen in Figure 1.15. The definition of a shear rate at which the viscosity is a mean is analogous to the definition of the mean shear stress τm in the Williamson model, Equation (8). While the Williamson expression is similar to that of Cross, the empirically extended Williamson Equation (10) is identical in form to the Cross Equation.(11)

32 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Figure 1.15 Cross Model for Shear Thinning Flow. Cross:

(η η0 − η∞) η = η∞ +  (1 + αγN)

(11)

Extended Williamson:

(10)

α

Where α = 1 /α1 2 and N = α2. Cross (26) found that if N was equal to 2/3, the model worked well in many systems, but he agreed with previous workers that N could be treated as a fourth adjustable parameter. The value of N has been shown to vary between 0.6 and 1.0 based on an analysis using the extended Williamson equation (16) (remembering that N = α2). The extended Williamson model was tested along with eight other models on 46 sets of non-Newtonian data and fit significantly better than the others, with a mean error of about 5%.(16) This method has been successfully used for solutions of Ammonium Polymethacrylate (18), Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose(25), Hydroxyethylcellulose, and Polyacrylic Acid.(18) It has also found use in correlating low shear rate data on kaolin clay suspensions.(27)

Practical Rheology 33

To obtain the constants in the extended Williamson equation (16), the data were fitted using a computer and a least squares procedure where the error term was defined as: fi

−

yi

εi =  fi

(14)

The experimental value of the dependent variable was fi and yi was the fitted value. In this equation εi was the error term. Since the Cross form of the extended Williamson equation (where N is 2/3) has been found effective for many systems, the graphical procedures recommended by Cross (17, 26) are summarized here. Three constants must be evaluated (α, η0, and η∞), and this requires two graphs. Two cases are considered: large α and small α. Case I: If α is large (see Figure 1.16) Graph 1: Plot η vs. 1/γ2/3. The straight line which results has an intercept η∞ and a slope of (η0 − η∞)/α. Graph 2: Plot 1/(η−η∞) vs. γ2/3. The straight line obtained has an intercept 1/(η0 − η∞) and a slope of α/(η0 − η∞). After obtaining η∞. from Graph 1, η0 is determined from the intercept of Graph 2. Knowing η0 and η∞, the value of α may be obtained from the slope of either Graph 1 or 2. Case II: If α is small (see Figure 1.17) Graph 1: plot 1/η vs. γ2/3. The straight line obtained has an intercept 1/η0 and a slope of α/η0. Graph 2: plot η vs. (η0 − η)/γ2/3. The straight line obtained has an intercept η∞ and a slope 1/α.

34 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Figure 1.16 Solution of Cross Model for Large α.

Figure 1.17 Solution of Cross Model for Small α.

Figure 1.18 Casson-Asbeck Method.

Practical Rheology 35 The usefulness of Casson's equation was extended to the high shear rate region by Asbeck (20) who modified Equation (6) and obtained Equation (15). η1/2 = η∞1/2 + τ01/2 γ-1/2

(15)

The equation is plotted as the square root of viscosity vs. 1/square root of shear rate (Figure 1.18). A straight line is obtained which has a slope τ01/2 and an extrapolated intercept of η∞1/2. Equation (15) is useful for studying the characteristics of fluids at high shear. The slope τ01/2 can be used as a measure of the non-Newtonian "structure" of the system. The higher the slope, the greater the "structure." A Newtonian fluid produces a straight line parallel to the x-axis, and the "structure" term is zero because the slope is zero. A shear thinning fluid produces a line with a positive slope. Asbeck showed (20) that Equation (15) held over a shear rate range from 2 to 20,000 sec-1. It can be seen in Figure 1.8 that the shear stress-shear rate curve of a pseudo plastic fluid with a yield value bends sharply near the origin. This bend is invariably squeezed into a tiny corner of the graph, and carefully drawn curves tend to aim at the origin and approach the shear rate axis asymptotically. If there is a yield stress, the value is difficult to determine using shear stress-shear rate curves alone, because extrapolation to zero can be highly inaccurate.

Figure 1.8 Shear Dependent Fluid with Yield Stress. To overcome some of these problems, several definitions have been proposed. Houwink (29, 31) has defined a lower yield value, A, and an upper yield value, C (see Figure 1.8). The lower yield value is the

36 Rheology Modifier Handbook extrapolated intersection with the shear stress axis and the upper yield value refers to the stress at which linear flow is established. Extrapolation of the linear portion to zero shear rate gives B, the Bingham yield value. To obtain accurate yield stress values experimentally, it is necessary to measure apparent viscosity at extremely low shear rates and employ a better graphical representation of the data. One method that meets the requirements described above is the spring relaxation technique of Patton.(28) The procedure is based upon the unwinding of the calibrated spring of a cone and plate viscometer. After winding to its maximum scale reading, the spring is released and readings are taken at convenient time intervals. The scale reading is plotted as a function of time on semi-log paper (Figure 1.19(A)). The apparent viscosity at any scale reading Si and time ti is expressed as a function of the slope of the curve at that point. S0 is the scale reading at time = 0, St is the scale reading at the chosen time t, and K is an instrument constant:

(16)

Practical Rheology 37

(A)

(B) Figure 1.19 Spring Relaxation Method Reprinted By Permission (28)

3M100Cα α K =  (100)(22)( π2)(r3)(2.3)

(17)

In Equation (17), M100 is the maximum torque value of the spring, C is the scale reading that would be obtained if the viscometer scale were extended around the scale periphery to meet itself at its zero starting

38 Rheology Modifier Handbook point, α is the cone angle in radians, and r is the cone radius in centimeters. Using Equation (16), a clear template overlay can be made with a series of lines of varying slope which radiate from a central point (Figure 1.19(B)). The slope of each line is related to a different viscosity by Equation (16). The template is placed over the semi-log plot and adjusted back and forth, keeping the coordinate axes parallel until a straight line (corresponding to a viscosity) on the template becomes tangent to the scale reading of interest. Knowing the apparent viscosity at the chosen time and the shear stress (which is the dial reading times the spring constant) divided by 100, the shear rate can be calculated from Equation (3) η γ = τ/η

(3)

Figure 1.20 Obtaining a Yield Stress If the procedure is repeated for a series of different time values, a plot of log τ vs. log γ can be made. The yield stress (equivalent to Houwink's lower yield value(29)) is easily determined as the value of shear stress when the curve becomes parallel to the shear rate axis. Patton also suggested using a "working yield stress" at some arbitrarily but thoughtfully selected low shear rate (i.e. 0.01 sec-1). Another method (30) that is simpler than Patton's and frequently used is also based on a spring relaxation technique but is not limited to a cone and plate viscometer. This method relies upon the unwinding of a calibrated spring that is attached to a spindle inserted in the fluid. Upon releasing the spring, torque measurements are recorded as a function of

Practical Rheology 39 time (see Figure 1.20). The spring continues to unwind provided the yield stress is less than the torque on the spindle. When the spring torque equals the equilibrium yield stress, the curve will level out parallel to the x-axis. The equilibrium torque is a function of the yield stress. Yield stress may also be determined by the graphical procedures shown in Figure 1.8 or by the Casson plot of Figure 1.13. The most widely used model(29) for non-Newtonian fluids is the empirical power law (31) of deWale.(32,33) This relation holds for many polymer solutions and can describe Newtonian, shear thinning, and shear thickening flow behavior. The relation is quite useful over select portions (16) of many viscosity curves but does not hold over as wide a range (15) as the extended Williamson equation, for example. The power law can be expressed as: (25)

τ = -K|| γ |(n-1) γ

(18)

Where the constant K is called the viscosity index and is defined as the projected value of τ at a shear rate of one reciprocal second:

Figure 1.21 Power Law K = τγ = 1

(19)

The constant n is known as the flow behavior index and:

40 Rheology Modifier Handbook

d ln τ n =  d ln γ

(20)

If the fluid is Newtonian, n is equal to 1.0 and K is known as the viscosity. If n is less than 1.0, the fluid is shear thinning (pseudoplastic), and if n is greater than 1.0, the fluid is shear thickening (dilatant). A ln-ln plot of shear stress vs. shear rate results in a straight line with slope 1/n (Figure 1.21). The parameter 1/n has been called the Shear Thinning (or Thickening) Index, STI, by Rosen(45) and the ASTM has adopted it a standard method for characterizing properties of non-Newtonian fluids.(54) The flow behavior index, n, can be used as a measure of the degree of shear thinning or shear thickening character.(34, 35) In cases where the ln-ln plot of shear stress vs. shear rate is not linear, the power law does not apply. However, it may be possible to separate the data into several regions, each of which approximates a straight line. In this situation the model can be fitted to each linear segment using different values of the slope (19), l/n. To obtain a plot of apparent viscosity vs. shear rate, apparent viscosity must be expressed in terms of the flow behavior index, n. By definition, apparent viscosity is: η= τ/γγ

(3)

Substituting Equation (3) into Equation. (18): ηγ = -Kγ(n-1)γ

(21)

η = -Kγ(n-1)

(22)

Taking the ln of Equation (22): ln η = ln (-K) + (n - 1) ln | γ |

(23)

Taking the derivative of Equation (23) with respect to ln | γ |: d ln η  = n-1 d ln γ

(24)

Practical Rheology 41

Figure 1.22 Power Law Rheogram A ln-ln plot of apparent viscosity vs. shear rate results in a straight line of slope (n - 1) (see Figure 1.22). If the flow behavior index n, one value of apparent viscosity and the corresponding shear rate are known, the flow properties of a power law fluid are completely determined. Another mathematical model that has found wide use is the empirical Ellis model:(33) γ = (A + Bττα-1) τ

(25)

Where A, B, and α are constants. When B = 0, Equation (25) reduces to the Newtonian flow model: γ = Aτ

(26)

where A is the coefficient of viscosity. When A = 0, the Ellis model reduces to the power law: γ = B τα-1τ

(27)

γ = B τα

(28)

42 Rheology Modifier Handbook B. Characterization of Time-Dependent Flow The second part of the discussion of mathematical models and methods is concerned with the characterization of time-dependent flow behavior. Experimental techniques for such fluids are far more difficult than for time-independent fluids. For example, the simple act of filling the viscometer will disturb a time-dependent structure and a long resting time may be necessary before valid measurements can be made. 1. Hysteresis Loop Method One method frequently used to characterize Thixotropic or Rheopectic behavior is the hysteresis loop. The technique consists of starting at the lowest shear rate available and obtaining an initial stress measurement. After a given time the shear rate is increased to the next higher shear rate setting and the stress measured again. The procedure is repeated until the highest shear rate is reached and the system is then sheared to its equilibrium stress. After reaching equilibrium the shear rate is reduced stepwise and the shear stress is remeasured at each point until the lowest shear rate is reached. The shear stress is then plotted versus the shear rate (36) . Examples of Thixotropic and Rheopectic curves can be seen in Figure 1.23. In the Thixotropic curve, the "down" curve falls above the "up" curve.(51) The area of the loop is a measure of the Thixotropic breakdown (28) or the Rheopectic buildup due to mechanical working. The Hysteresis Loop method may be quantified using a "three-point system." In this technique, fluids are classified according to three parameters; apparent viscosity, shear sensitivity, and extent of Thixotropic behavior. Three parameters: "A", "B" and "C" are determined from a plot of apparent viscosity vs. shear rate (see Figure 1.24). The "A" value is the Thixotropy-free viscosity at the lowest shear rate and is the last viscosity reading on the "down" curve. It provides an apparent viscosity value after a standard shearing procedure. The "B" value represents an index of Pseudoplasticity.

Practical Rheology 43

Figure 1.23 Thixotropy And Rheopexy

Figure 1.24 Three-Point System for Thixotropic Fluids "A" value viscosity "B" =  Viscosity at the highest shear rate

(29)

The value of "B" is 1.0 for a Newtonian fluid and increases with increasing Pseudoplasticity.

44 Rheology Modifier Handbook The "C" value represents an index of thixotropy under a set of standardized conditions. It represents the fraction of recoverable viscosity after an arbitrarily chosen recovery time: “C” =

(Viscosity after t min. recovery time) - ("A" viscosity)  "A" viscosity

(30)

The "C" value does not represent the ultimate state of thixotropy but only the extent present under the standardized conditions. The standard time may be chosen according to the patience of the investigator! 2. Recovery Time Method Another method useful in studying thixotropy is to shear the sample for a long time at a high shear rate. The shear rate is then immediately dropped to a very low value and the recovery of shear stress with time is observed (see Figure 1.25). The characteristic recovery time is a useful parameter (37) and depends upon the kinetics of structural buildup. A similar procedure may be followed for a Rheopectic fluid when the structural increase with time is observed.

Figure 1.25 Stress Recovery for a Thixotropic Fluid

Practical Rheology 45

Figure 1.26 Weltmann Method for Thixotropic Flow A Thixotropic Index, I, suggested by Patton (28) is defined as:

τ0.01 (before shearing) I =  τ0.01 (after shearing)

(31)

Where τ0.01 is the shear stress at a shear rate of 0.01 sec-1 . These values are obtained using the spring relaxation technique described previously. Weltmann (38) proposed a method which involves shearing the sample at a constant rate for a short time, t, then reducing the shear rate to zero, in steps, and plotting shear stress vs. shear rate (see Figure 1.26). A straight line is obtained and the slope is the plastic viscosity u. By repeating this procedure for various shearing times, a series of plastic viscosity values are obtained. A plot of u vs. ln t results in a straight line of slope B where: u1 – u2 B =  (32) ln τ2

τ1

46 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Figure 1.27 Correlating Time and Shear Dependence - I

3. Rosen Method(58) Another method which has been found useful in correlating Thixotropic data is an empirical equation of the form: η = A(γγ)B(t)C

(33)

Where A, B, and C are constants. The value of B is an index of Pseudoplasticity, while the value of C is an Index of Thixotropy. As B increases, the fluid becomes more shear sensitive, and as C increases, the fluid becomes more time dependent. To evaluate A, B, and C, the sample is sheared at a constant rate, γ1, and viscosity readings are plotted as a function of time. The process is repeated a number of times with a fresh sample and different values of shear rate (see Figure 1.27). A series of vertical lines is erected at various intervals on the time axis and the viscosity values at each shear rate are recorded. By letting: K = A(t)C

(34)

Equation (33) becomes: η = KγγB

(35)

Taking logarithms of Equation (35): ln η = ln K + B ln γ

(36)

Practical Rheology 47 A ln-ln plot of viscosity versus shear rate, at constant time t, results in a straight line of slope B and intercept K1. The data is plotted for each of the time values chosen (see Figure 1.28). A series of intercept points and the corresponding time values determined are from Figure 1.28.

Figure 1.28 Correlating Time and Shear Dependence - II. Taking logarithms of Equation (34): ln K = ln A + C ln t

(37)

A ln-ln plot of the intercepts K vs. time, t, results in a straight line of slope C and intercept ln A (Figure 1.29).

48 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Figure 1.29 Correlating Shear and Time Dependence

Practical Rheology 49

8. Viscometry: Instrumentation and Use Essentially, a viscometer is an instrument that is capable of measuring the flow rate behavior of a fluid. A great range of such instruments have been designed over the years. These range from equipment with well defined geometries capable of providing shear stress data at well defined shear rates, to equipment without such capability. While the former type is highly useful for measurement of Newtonian fluids as well as nonNewtonian types, the latter types are equally useful to the Practical Rheologist. As we have pointed out previously, there are many situations where it is possible to obtain a reproducible set of numerical data which correlates with some critical aspect of product formulation, behavior or control. The ASTM has compiled numerous standards for the characterization of flow behavior. Many of these tests, while not the ideal rheological measurement from an academic view, are useful, reproducible and practical methods for the industrial scientist. In the following paragraphs, we succinctly describe many of these ASTM tests categorized from a “viscometer” point of view. The net result is intended to provide the reader with a sense of the great range of instrumentation available and their use and application in Practical Rheology. A. Well Defined Geometries 1. Capillary (Pipette) Viscometers A variety of these exist including the Saybolt Viscometer described in ASTM D 2161 and D 88. The Saybolt-Furol has been used for bituminous liquids (E 102-93) and also in D 244 and D 2161. Capillary viscometers are used for the characterization of the moisture content of polyamides (D 789), poly(ethylene terephthalate) D 4603-90 and the intrinsic viscosity of cellulose (D 1795-90). The use of glass capillary viscometers is described in D 446-93. Such viscometers are also described in D 5481-96 and for high shear rate, high temperature measurements in D 4624-93. Vacuum capillary versions have been used for characterization of asphalt (D 2171-94) and asphalt emulsion residues (D 4957).

50 Rheology Modifier Handbook High shear rate extrusion viscometers fall into this category as for example those used to characterize plastisols and organosols (D 1823). 2. Cone and Plate Viscometers The ICI cone and plate viscometer is described for high shear rate characterization in D 4287 and in ASTM D 3205 for the characterization of asphalt. 3. Coaxial Cylinder/Rotational Viscometers This type of viscometer is extremely common and widely used. For example, hot melt adhesives are characterized by means of ASTM D 3236-88, liquid applied neoprene roofing (D 3468-90), emulsion polymers for floor polishes (D 3716-83) and chemical grouts (D-401681). Other applications for this viscometer geometry include measurement of isocyanates (D 4889-93), coal tar (D 5018-89), unfilled adhesives (D 4402-87 and D 4300-83), mold contaminated adhesives, as well as mold powders (C 1276). The use of rotational viscometers is by far the most extensive category of viscometer described by ASTM. The list of applications continues with characterization of automotive fluid lubricants (D 2983-87), Hydroxyethylcellulose (D 2364-85), epoxy resins (D 2393-86) and adhesives (D 2556-80). Other examples include hot melt petroleum waxes (D 2669-87), rubberized tar (D 2994-87), lubricating greases (D 3232-88) and plastisols/organosols (D 1824-90). Still other applications include characterization of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose (D 143983a), glass, above its softening point (C 965-81), mold powders above their softening point (C 1276-94) and varnishes for electrical insulation (D 115-815). The extensive list completes with characterization of natural latex (D 1076), adhesives (D 1084), synthetic latexes (D 141790) and non-Newtonian materials (D 2196-86). Elevated temperature rotational viscometry is another version of this testing as described in D 4402 for unfilled asphalts. 4. Falling Balls, Needles and Rods While not like the more well defined geometries described above, the category of falling balls, needles and rods is quite useful in rheological characterization. Examples include D 4040 (falling rod) and D 5478-93 (falling needle).

Practical Rheology 51 5. Cup Viscometers Examples of the use of these include dip type viscosity cups (D 421293), Ford (stubby capillary), Shell (long capillary) and Zhan type (orifice) viscosity cups (D 1200-94 and D 1084-86) and ISO flow cups (D 5125-97). 6. Miscellaneous Viscometer Types There are a variety of types including parallel plate plastometers (D 4989-90), bubble time viscometer for adhesives (D 1084-88) and D 1545 for transparent liquids. Ball drop methods are described for cellulose derivatives (D 1343-93) and flow cones for grout/concrete (C 939-97). Differential viscometers for characterization of polymers (D 5225-92), Engler viscometers are used for tar (D 1665), and the well known Stormer viscometer for paints (D 562-81) and asphalt roof material (D 4479). Other examples include the Mooney viscometer for rubber and carbon black (D 4483), SBR latexes (D 5605) and D 3346-90. Less common, but useful other examples include the California Kneading Compaction test for tar (D 1665-91), the diesel injector nozzle for polymer-containing fluids (D 3945), the tapered bearing simulator (D 4683) and the tapered plug viscometer (D 4741-96). 7. High Shear-Rate Viscometers ASTM examples of high shear rate viscometers include D 4624 for capillary type, D 1823-95 extrusion viscometer for plastisols and organosols, and D 4683 the tapered bearing simulator. Other examples in this category include the tapered plug viscometer (D4741 and D255680) for adhesives and D 5481-96 capillary viscometer. 8. Low Shear-Rate Viscometers Plastisols and organosols are characterized at low shear in ASTM D 1824-90 and lubricating oils in D 5133-90. 9. High Temperature Viscometers Examples include ASTM D 4624-93, capillary Saybolt-Furol viscometer for emulsified asphalts bearing simulator (E 102-93), for bituminous Saybolt-Furol viscometer, lubricating greases D

viscometer, E 102 (D 4683), tapered systems using the 3232-88, apparent

52 Rheology Modifier Handbook viscosity in capillary viscometers (D 5481-96) and unfilled asphalts (D 4402-87). 10. Low Temperature Viscometers Examples from ASTM tests include engine oils (D 4684), automotive fluid lubricants (D 2983-87) and lubricating oils (D 5133-90). 11. Other Viscometer Types One final ASTM category must be covered and this is for the various types of viscosity measurements. These include kinematic viscosity (asphalt- D 2170), yield stress (engine oils-D 4684-97), relative viscosity (polyamides-D 789-91) differential viscosity, non-Newtonian viscosity (D 2196-86), apparent viscosity (D 5481-96) for petroleum waxes with additives (i.e., hot melts) and intrinsic viscosity (D 1745-90). B. Instrumentation and Mathematical Analysis When a fluid is Newtonian, the relationship between shear rate and shear stress is linear and the apparent viscosity can be measured in a wide variety of flow geometries. These include viscometer cup, bubble tubes, falling ball, capillary, cylindrical spindle in a cup of large radius, coaxial cylinder, and cone and plate viscometers. For the simple viscosity measurements usually required in production and quality control work, a suitable viscometer should be inexpensive, easy to use, and easy to clean. Examples of these are efflux viscometers, bubble tube viscometers and falling ball viscometers. 1. Efflux Viscometers Efflux viscometers, such as Ford and Zahn cups, are primarily used for Newtonian fluids (e.g., ASTM 1200-58). A given amount of fluid is allowed to drain from a container with a standardized opening (39) and the efflux time is converted to kinematic viscosity (36) by equation (38) C υ (Stokes) = K t -  t

(38)

Where K and C are constants for the particular viscosity cup.

Practical Rheology 53 2. Bubble Tube Viscometers Bubble tube viscometers, such as Gardner-Holt Alphabetical Bubble Tubes, are used to measure the kinematic viscosity of clear solutions. They consist of cylindrical glass tubes with graduations for filling and measuring (e.g., ASTM D 1725-62). The measurement is made by filling a standard tube and leaving an air space to form a bubble. The time required for the bubble to traverse the tube is compared to a set of standard tubes of known kinematic viscosity. The shear rate depends upon the rate of bubble rise and is in the 0.1 to 100 sec-1 range. Kinematic viscosity υ may be calculated empirically (36) from the time t and: 0.3 υ = 1.00 t -  (39) t2 Bubble viscometers are low in cost and widely used. Good correlation of viscosity results has been obtained for certain applications and manufacturing operations.(36) 3. Hoeppler Falling Ball Viscometer A third type of simple viscometer is the Hoeppler Falling Ball apparatus. The operation of this viscometer is based upon the rate at which a ball falls through the fluid and is related to viscosity by Stokes law: 2 η=  9

•

(ρ ρ1 – ρ2 ) gr2  V

(40)

Where η is the viscosity, ρ1, and ρ2 are the densities of the sphere and fluid, respectively, r is the sphere's radius, g is the gravitational constant, and V is its terminal velocity. The shear rate is a function of the velocity of the ball and decreases as the viscosity increases. Comparison of two non-Newtonian fluids using the same sphere may not be valid since the viscosities could be measured at two different shear rates. 4. Capillary Viscometers The most common and precise method for measuring the viscosity of a Newtonian fluid is the capillary viscometer. In this geometry, an applied pressure ∆P drives the fluid from a reservoir and through a fine bore

54 Rheology Modifier Handbook capillary of constant cross section. The fluid is assumed to be in steadystate, laminar, isothermal flow. Both the shear rate and shear stress are calculated at the capillary wall. To obtain τw, the shear stress at the wall, the viscous resisting force (τW2πrRL) is equated with the force pushing the fluid through the tube (∆PπrR2) (Figure 1.30):

τW = ∆PR/2L

(41)

The shear stress in a capillary viscometer varies linearly with the radius and is independent of the fluid properties. By substituting the definition of apparent viscosity from Newton's law, Equation 3, into Equation 41, the shear rate for a constant flow rate varies linearly with the capillary radius (Figure 1.30): γ = ∆Pr/2η ηL

(42)

If Equation (42) is integrated with respect to the radius, the well-known parabolic velocity profile is obtained.

Figure 1.30 Force Balance on a Column of Liquid Flowing Through a Capillary, Reprinted By Permission (40)

Practical Rheology 55

Figure 1.31 Shear Stress and Shear Rate for a Newtonian Fluid in a Capillary Viscometer, Reprinted By Permission (40) By integrating the velocity expression with respect to the radius over the cross-sectional area, the Hagen-Poiseuille expression for kinematic viscosity in terms of the flow rate Q is obtained: η = πR4 ∆P/8QL

(43)

From Equations (41) and (43) the shear rate at the wall is: γ = 4Q/π πR3

(44)

In a non-Newtonian fluid, the shear rate depends on the velocity distribution which is a function of the fluid properties. To determine the apparent viscosity of such a fluid, the actual shear rate is obtained by multiplying the shear rate based on Newtonian flow by a correction factor due to Rabinowitch (40):

(45)

Where b is the slope of a log-log plot of 4Q/πrR3 vs. ∆PR/2L. Equation (45) is general and not restricted to any particular flow model. If the fluid follows the power law, b is constant. If the log-log plot is curved, it may

56 Rheology Modifier Handbook be possible to treat the data as several linear segments with a different value of b for each. Some errors that can occur in capillary viscometers are incomplete drainage because liquid adheres to the walls and kinetic energy losses resulting in a drop of effective pressure as the fluid is accelerated into the capillary. Turbulence errors may occur if the fluid enters the turbulent flow region where the Reynolds number is greater than 2100 and end effect errors can produce an energy loss when the fluid is deformed as it leaves the reservoir. For a Newtonian fluid, the length necessary to achieve fully developed flow, or "entrance length" Le, can be expressed in terms of the tube diameter D and the Reynolds number [DVρ/η]: DVρ ρ Le  = 0.035  D η

(46)

Where V is the average velocity, ρ is the density, and η is the apparent viscosity of the fluid. The entrance length is added to the capillary length in calculating the shear stress. This method is not applicable, however, to non-Newtonian fluids where elastic phenomena are significant. One method of eliminating end effects is to determine the pressure drop, at constant shear rate, for several equal diameter capillaries of varying length. The pressure drop is plotted vs. the L/D ratio and extrapolated to L/D = 0. The value of the intercept is then subtracted from the pressure drop obtained in subsequent measurements (41) (Figure 1.32). Two examples of the highly accurate (42) capillary viscometers in wide use are the Cannon Fenske Viscometer and the Cannon Ubbelohde Viscometer. The former can measure a viscosity range from 0.3 to 20,000 cSt and requires a sample of about 7 ml. The latter can measure a viscosity range from 0.3 to 16,000 cSt, requires a sample of 11 ml., and is well suited for temperatures greater than 200o F and less than 0o F. In these instruments the hydrostatic head of the liquid produces the necessary pressure drop. The kinematic viscosity is determined by multiplying the efflux time by a suitable constant.

Practical Rheology 57

Figure 1.32 Method of Determining the End Effect in a Capillary Viscometer 5. Rotational Viscometers Besides viscometers based on capillary flow, there are a large number of commercial instruments which measure apparent viscosity using rotational principles. These include the Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer, the Haake Rotovisco Viscometer, the Ferranti Shirley Viscometer, and the Weisenberg Rheogoniometer. An excellent description of these and other viscometers may be found in Reference (40). A more recent listing of viscometers and viscometer companies is given in Appendix A. When choosing a viscometer, consideration must be given to factors such as versatility, simplicity, ease of cleaning, sample size, accuracy, and cost. For many industrial applications it is important to obtain accurate results with the least expensive, most versatile instrument. Of those mentioned, the Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer introduced in 1981 is probably the best available compromise between accuracy and price. As such, it has found extremely wide use in industrial applications. The variety of attachments available allows coverage of a broad range of shear rate and viscosity. In the older style Brookfield instruments, many of which are available in laboratories and plants today, a "dial viscosity" is determined at a given rpm by multiplying the dial deflection (0 to 100) by an appropriate "factor." These "factors" are obtained from a "Factor Finder" supplied with the instrument and should only be used for Newtonian fluids since the "dial viscosity" and the apparent viscosity are identical only in this case.

58 Rheology Modifier Handbook In 1981, the first digital Brookfield Viscometer was introduced. This was followed by the model DV-II digital in 1985, which automatically calculates viscosity. In 1988, Brookfield developed the DVGATHER Software for IBM PC compatible computers. In 1990, Brookfield commercialized the model DV-III Programmable Rheometer. Using the supplied Rheocalc Software, up to 200 data points can be taken and plotted. After the data has been captured, it can be numerically and graphically analyzed for flow behavior using some of the mathematical models that have been covered previously. These included the Bingham plastic model, the Casson model, the Power Law fluid model and the Shear Thinning (Thickening) Index (STI) model. A number of attachments available for the Brookfield Viscometer are amenable to mathematical analysis which allows the determination of apparent viscosities at well-defined shear rates. These include cylindrical spindle in a cup of large radius and coaxial cylinder (couette) attachments. Another Brookfield product features a cone and plate configuration. 5a. Cylindrical Spindle in an Infinite Sea of Fluid When a fluid is non-Newtonian, the shear rate depends upon the velocity distribution which varies with the fluid properties. To obtain the apparent viscosity, the functional relationship between shear rate and shear stress must be determined. To accomplish this, the velocity and stress distributions are obtained by mathematical analysis of the flow geometry. In this section, several geometries and commercial instruments are briefly considered. Emphasis is placed on the proper use of three widely used systems; the cylindrical cylinder in a cup of large radius, the coaxial cylinder (couette) geometry and the cone and plate geometry. The most widely used attachments for the Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer are the cylindrical and disk-type spindles. These have the advantage of ease of measurement and ease of cleaning. To make a measurement, the spindle is simply immersed in the fluid and a dial reading is read as the spindle rotates at a constant rpm. A spindle guard is used to protect the spindle, and the "dial viscosities" are calculated using the appropriate "factors."

Practical Rheology 59 The principal failing of this type of viscometer geometry is the difficulty in obtaining apparent viscosities at well-defined shear rates. As the fluid deviates from Newtonian behavior, the accuracy of the "dial viscosity" (sometimes known as an "apparent" apparent viscosity) decreases. In determining apparent viscosity, the shear stress and shear rate must be measured at the same point. The one most usually chosen is at the spindle surface. While the disk-type spindles are difficult to analyze mathematically, useful equations have been developed for cylindrical spindles. A number of such spindles are supplied with Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer and a set of cylindrical spindles (300 series s/s) is also available. Calculation of shear rate at the surface of a cylindrical spindle is based upon a mathematical model of an infinitely long cylinder in an infinite sea of fluid. In a practical instrument, a spindle of finite length and a cup of finite diameter are considered a necessity and, therefore, certain corrections are required. Determination of the shear rate γ is based upon an equation derived by Krieger and Maron (43): dΩ Ω γ = -2  d ln τB

(47)

Where Ω is the angular velocity in radians/sec and τB is the shear stress at the spindle wall in dyne/cm2. Calculation of shear rate by Equation (44) is difficult because it involves evaluation of the derivative of a nonlinear function (Ω vs. ln τB). A preferred modification (44) of Equation (47) is obtained by multiplying and dividing by Ω:

(48)

(49)

60 Rheology Modifier Handbook Equation (49) is not dependent on the flow properties of the fluid. To obtain the shear rate, a log-log plot of the angular velocity Ω vs. the shear stress τB is required. If this function is a straight line, then (d ln Ω)/(d ln τB) is a constant. The quantity (d ln Ω)/(d lnτB) has been called the Shear Thinning (or Shear Thickening) Index, or the STI.(45) The STI is equal to 1/n in the power law equation. For a power law fluid, the STI equals 1.0 if the fluid is Newtonian. The STI is greater than 1.0 if the fluid is shear thinning and if it is less than 1.0, the fluid is shear thickening. Rosen’s (54) STI method has become a standard ASTM test method for rheological properties of non-Newtonian fluids (D 2196). For the more complex case where the log Ω-log τB function is curved, Krieger (52) has shown that a point by point application of the power flow law will rigorously yield the true viscosity and shear rate. To determine the shear stress at the bob τB Torque

τB =  2

2π πRB L

(50)

Where RB is the radius of the bob in cm and L is the effective length of the spindle. The torque (dyne-cm) is obtained by multiplying the units of dial deflection by the spring constant (dyne-cm) divided by 100 as shown in Equation (51) The apparent viscosity η is obtained by substituting Equations (49) and (50) into Equation (3).

Torque = Units of Dial Deflection • Spring Constant 100

(51)

5b. Coaxial Cylinder (Couette) Viscometer A coaxial cylinder viscometer consists of a cylindrical spindle and a cup whose radius is only slightly larger than that of the spindle. In this geometry, the shear stress and shear rate are both calculated at the surface of the bob (Figure 1.33).

Practical Rheology 61

Figure 1.33 Coaxial Cylinder Viscometer To determine the shear rate at the bob surface, it is assumed that simple shear flow exists in the annulus between the bob and the cup, that the outer cylinder is stationary, and that no slippage occurs at the surface. It is further assumed that the inner cylinder is driven with an angular velocity Ω, radian/sec, by the application of a torque T. For a bob of radius RB cm, cup of radius RC, cm, and cylinder of effective length L an equation has been derived for the shear rate at the bob surface(44) (Equation (52). (52) In this series solution, Ω is the angular velocity of the bob in rad/sec, S is the ratio of the radius of the bob to the radius of the cup, m is (d ln Ω)/(d ln τB, or the Shear Thinning (or Shear Thickening) index (STI) and p varies from 0 to ∞. For instruments which employ an annular space which is small compared to the cylinder radii, an approximation to Equation (52) is: (53)

62 Rheology Modifier Handbook The approximation is valid as long as (-m ln S) is less than 0.5 (44). The calculation of the shear stress τB is obtained from Equation (50). Brookfield Engineering Laboratories manufactures a coaxial cylinder attachment (known as the UL Adapter) for their standard model LVT Viscometer. It consists of a bob and cup with a narrow annular space between them. For Newtonian fluids the apparent viscosity range of the UL adapter is 0 to 2000 cP at 0.3 rpm and 0 to 10 cP at 60 rpm. The approximate shear rate range is 0.37 to 73.5 sec-1. As indicated previously, the "factors" supplied with the UL adapter are valid only for Newtonian fluids. However, the geometry is well suited to the mathematical analysis presented above and the unit can be used for nonNewtonian fluids.(40, 48) 5c. Cone & Plate Viscometer Of all the various flow geometries available, the cone and plate type is probably the best. While it is easy to clean and uses a very small sample, its most important advantage is a constant shear rate across the gap (Figure 1.34).

Figure 1.34 Cone and Plate Viscometer The velocity of the cone is given by V = Ωr, where Ω is the angular velocity and r is the radius. The gap distance y is: y = r tan θ

(54)

Practical Rheology 63 The shear rate is: V Ωr Ω  =  =  y r tan θ tan θ

(55)

And for small angles: γ = Ω/θ θ

(56)

Since r drops out of Equation (55), the shear rate is independent of the radius and is a function of the cone angle only. The torque M is calculated from equation (57): (57)

M = τr

2π πr3  3

(58)

Solving for the shear stress at radius r,

τr = 3M/2ππr3

(59)

The apparent viscosity η is τr/γ or: 3M/2π πr3 η =  Ω/θ θ

(60)

η = 3Mθ θ/2π πr3Ω

(61)

A number of commercial cone and plate viscometers are available. These include the Haake Rotovisco Viscometer, the Ferranti Shirley Viscometer, the Weisenberg Rheogoniometer and the Wells-Brookfield Cone and Plate Viscometer. Large variations in price exist because of the degree of sophistication in solving such problems as temperature control and maintaining a constant gap setting between the cone and plate.

64 Rheology Modifier Handbook

9. Summary Part 1 has presented a broad range of empirical and theoretical mathematical models useful for characterizing non-Newtonian flow behavior of a wide variety of industrial and consumer products. These models have been organized in order of increasing complexity, and their use is facilitated by presentation in graphical form that provides the investigator with a means for easily obtaining the equation parameters. These parameters can be employed to characterize a product or system and assess changes introduced by formulation variations and processing conditions. Some of the more common viscometer types are also described. A thorough, but partial listing of viscometer companies and some of the instruments they manufacture is available in Appendix A. The practical application of rheology to a wide variety of products has been demonstrated by reference to the significant number of ASTM test methods that have been organized and referred to in the body of Part 1.

Practical Rheology 65

10. Symbols and Abbreviations A number of symbols have been used in this work to represent more than one parameter. However, each of these is clearly defined in the text within the appropriate context. The authors have retained these various symbols as they appear in the original references in order to facilitate the reader’s efforts to look further at the original works cited. cP D Dyn fi F I K0, K1 K0', K1 Le M M100 mPas N n Q r S So, St STI t u V X yi y

centipoise diameter Dynes experimental value of dependent variable force (dynes) Thixotropic Index Casson equation constants Extended Casson equation constants entrance length torque maximum torque value of a spring milliPascal•seconds constant flow behavior index flow rate radius in a cone and plate viscometer radius of bob/radius of cup scale readings at time zero and time t Shear thinning (or thickening) index time plastic viscosity velocity (cm/sec) distance (cm) fitted value (Equation 14) gap distance in cone and plate viscometer

66 Rheology Modifier Handbook Greek Letters shear rate (sec-1) (These two symbols are used interchangeably in the text) ε error term η viscosity (Poise) infinite shear viscosity η∞ zero shear viscosity η0 θ angle measurement υ kinematic viscosity (Stokes) ρ1, ρ2 density of sphere and fluid τ shear stress (dynes/cm2) (η0 + η∞)/2 (dynes/cm2) τm yield value (dyne/cm2) τyield τr,τw,τB shear stress at wall θ,Ω angular velocity (radians/sec) γ,

Author’s Note: Sections 7 thru 11 of this text have been adapted from Reference 55 by courtesy of Marcel Deckker, Inc., New York

Practical Rheology 67

11. References 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

L. M. Krieger, S.H. Maron, J. Appl. Phys., 25, No.1,72 (1954) P. E. Pierce, Journal of Paint Technology, 41, No.533, 383(1969) J. D. Ferry, Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers,Wiley, NY,1961 G. C. Johnson, J. Chem & Eng. Data, 6, No.2, 275 (1961) J. R. Van Wazer, et. al. Viscosity and Flow Measurement, A Laboratory Handbook of Rheology, Interscience, NY (1963), pp. 18, 20. H. Van Olphen, An Introduction to Clay Colloid Chemistry, Interscience, NY, 1963, pp. 145 B. Clark, Trans Instn. Chem. Engrs., 45, T251 (1967) S. Middleman, The Flow of High Polymers, Continuum and Molecular Rheology, Interscience, 1968, pp. 2. P. Sherman, Emulsion Science, Academic Press, 1968, Chapter 4 R. Houwink, Elasticity, Plastcity and Structure of Matter, Dover, NY, 1958. N. Z. Erdi, et. al. J. Coll. and Intf. Sci., 28, No.1 (1968) R. N. Weltmann, Rheology, Vol. 3 Academic Press, NY (1960) pp. 215 T. Masuo, et. al. J. Coll. and Intf. Sci., 24, 241 (1967). Personal Communication to Mr. David Howard, Applied Rheologist, Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Stoughton, Mass. R. B. Bird, AIChE-Inst. Chem. Eng. Symp. Ser., 4, (1965). S. D. Cramer and J. M. Marchello, AIChE J., 14 (6), 980 (1968). M. M. Cross, J. Colloid. Sci., 20, 417 (1965). N. Casson, Rheology of Disperse Systems, Pergamon, New York, 1959. R. D. Vaughn and J. C. Hatcher, Offic. Dig., Fed. Soc. Paint Technol., 37, 1168 (1965). W. F. Asbeck, Ibid., 33, 65 (1961). J. F. Stoltz and A. Larcan, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 30 (4), (1969). R. V. Williamson, Ind. Eng. Chem., 21(11), (1929). A. Doroszkowski and R. J. Lambourne, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 26, 128 (1968).

68 Rheology Modifier Handbook 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46.

W. F. Asbeck and M. Van Loo, Ind. Eng. Chem., 46, 1291 (1954). S. D. Cramer, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Maryland, 1968. M. M. Cross, Advances in Polymer Science and Technology (S.C.I. Monograph 26), Gordon and Breach, New York, 1967. R. J. Hunter and S. F. Nichol, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 28 (2), 250 (1968). T. C. Patton, J. Paint Technol., 38(502), 656 (1966). R. Houwink, Elasticity, Plasticity and Structure of Matter, Dover, New York, 1958. 42 R. Kreider, Offic. Dig., Fed. Soc. Paint Technol., 36, 1244 (1964). P. Sherman, Emulsion Science, Academic, New York, 1968, Chap. 4. A. DeWale, J. Oil Colour Chem. Assoc., 4, 33 (1923). R. B. Bird et al., Transport Phenomena, Wiley, New York, 1962. E. L. Warrick, Ind. Eng. Chem., 47, 1616 (1955). A. L. Back, Rubber Age, 85 (4), 639 (1959). P. E. Pierce, J. Paint Technol., 41 (533), 383 (1969). H. Green, Industrial Rheology and Rheological Structure, Wiley, New York, 1949, pp. 52. R. N. Weltmann, Ind. Eng. Chem., 35, 424 (1943). H. A. Gardner and G. G. Sward, Paint Testing Manual, 12 ed., Gardner, Bethesda, Maryland, 1962. J. R. Van Wazer et al., Viscosity and Flow Measurement, A Laboratory, Handbook of Rheology, Interscience, New York, 1963, pp. 18, 20. G. C. Johnson, J. Chem. Eng. Data, 6 (2), 275 (1961). Cannon Instrument Co., Viscometers (Bulletin 19). I. M. Krieger and S. H. Maron, J. Appl. Phys., 23 (l), 147 (1952). S. Middleman, The Flow offfigh Polymers, Continuum and Molecular Rheology, Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1968, pp. 2. M. R. Rosen, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 36, 350 (1971). Personal Communication to Mr. David Howard, Applied Rheologist, Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Stoughton, Massachusetts.

Practical Rheology 69 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58.

Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Brookfield SynchroLectric Viscometers, Shear Rate and Shear Stress Formulas (Data Sheet 66-0112). M. R. Rosen, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 39(2), 413 (1972). Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., The Brookfield UL Adapter (Laboratory Data Sheet 034-C). Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., “Solutions to Sticky Problems”. N. Z. Erdi et.al. J. Colloid Interface Sci, 28 (1), (1968) I. M. Krieger, Trans. Social Rheology, 12,5 (1968) Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, “More Solutions to Sticky Problems”, Rosen, M. R., contributing author. “Standard Test Method for Rheological Properties of NonNewtonian Materials by Rotational Viscometer”, ASTM D 2196. M.R. Rosen, “Characterization of Non-Newtonian Flow”, Polym.-Plast. Technol. Eng., 12(1), 1-42, Marcel Dekker, Inc., (1979) T.C. Patton, “Paint Flow and Pigment Dispersion-A Rheological Approach to Coating and Ink Technology”, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, (1979) D. B. Braun, “Formulating and Characterizing Cosmetic Suspensions/Emulsions”, R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc. Report No. 910, (1995) M.R. Rosen, “Practical Rheology – A “Thinking Protocol” for the Cosmetic Chemist”, Presented at the HBA Global Expo Scientific Conference – 1999, June, 1999, New York

Part 2 Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers Contents Page Introduction 1. Acrylic Polymers 2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 3. Alginates 4. Associative Thickeners 5. Carrageenan 6. Microcrystalline Cellulose 7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 8. Hydroxyethylcellulose 9. Hydroxypropylcellulose 10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 11. Methylcellulose 12. Guar & Guar Derivatives 13. Locust Bean Gum 14. Organoclays 15. Polyethylene 16. Polyethylene Oxide 17. Polyvinylpyrrolidone 18. Silica 19. Water-swellable Clay 20. Xanthan Gum

71

72 74 81 89 94 99 106 109 114 119 121 128 132 138 141 151 157 161 167 174 184

72 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Introduction This part of the handbook presents the commercially available product lines of the 26 rheology modifier suppliers who have provided technical information for this work. Over 1000 products are included herein. It is also probable that there are other suppliers that the authors are not aware of, especially in the “Pacific Rim” or South America. Handbook users in those areas should consult local manufacturer directories to determine if other suppliers exist in their area. The term “commercially available” is intended to indicate that the products listed are available to any customer in any quantity, from as little as 50 lbs. to 50 tons or more. Many suppliers also produce other grades of product that are classified as experimental or proprietary. These are grades that are specially manufactured for specific largevolume applications or customers. These grades are not included in this handbook. Twenty different chemical types of rheology modifiers are included in this part of the handbook. They differ in chemical structure and performance. Each Section begins with a brief description of the chemical type and some key features and recommended applications for the particular type of rheology modifier. This information is obtained from the supplier’s technical literature and is not intended to be an exhaustive treatise on the subject. In-depth technical information is usually available in the supplier’s technical literature. Reference to this technical literature is also included in the introduction to each Section. It does not contain information on the supplier’s recommended handling procedures for his products. This is because it may vary for different suppliers and may, in fact, vary for different products from the same supplier. The supplier’s technical literature is always the best source of information on the recommended handling procedure to use.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 73 In each section the product lines are presented alphabetically by supplier’s name. Each product line is arranged according to the suppliers recommended application area for the products, i.e., food, pharmaceutical, personal care or household/institutional. The product line data are believed to be complete and accurate as of mid-1999. But suppliers are continually adding new and improved products to their lines. The handbook user is urged to contact suppliers (see Appendix C for contact information) to learn about new products that might also be candidates for the intended application. Note: These tables also contain the following less common abbreviations: cSt = centistoke mPas = milliPascal•second = centipoise INCI = International Nomenclature Cosmetic Ingredient µm = micrometer or micron (10-6 meter) nm = nanometer (10-9 meter)

n/a = not available or not applicable ppm = parts per million soln = solution

74 Rheology Modifier Handbook

1. Acrylic Polymers A. Chemical Nature Acrylic acid, H2C=CHCOOH, is an important building block of the chemical industry. The molecule contains both an unsaturated moiety that can be used for free-radical polymerization and a carboxylic acid group that can be reacted with a host of different chemical species. Although the overall chemical structure of the group of polymers in this Section varies, they all possess two common features; an acrylic polymer or copolymer backbone and pendant carboxylic acid groups, in some cases reacted with other organic species. When dispersed in aqueous media, and while the system is acidic, they produce minimal rheological effects. But when the pendant carboxylic groups are neutralized with an alkaline ingredient, the polymer is said to “swell” producing dramatic viscosity increase and rheology modification. Thus, these products are sometimes referred to as alkaliswellable acrylic polymers. They are highly efficient thickeners and rheology modifiers.

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Personal Care 2. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Mixtures of water and minor amounts of water-miscible organic solvents

C. Ionic Charge Anionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Not recommended for systems containing monomeric, cationic species 2. Some products suitable for high pH (>10) systems 3. Some products suitable for systems containing peroxides

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 75 F. Useful References: 1. “Acrysol Thickeners and Rheology Modifiers”, Rohm and Haas Company Bulletin RMT2A. 2.

“Aculyn33 personal care polymer”, Rohm and Haas Company Bulletin FC-258.

2. “Hypan Hydrogels – The link to versatile elegance”, LIPO Chemicals Bulletin. 3.

“STRUCTURE Rheology modifiers for hard-to-thicken systems”, National Starch & Chemical Bulletin1715-97-292.

Table 2.la LIPO Chemicals, Inc. Patterson, NJ, USA 1. Personal Care Grades

Trade Name Hypan ® SA- 1 00H Hypan SR- 150H Hypan SS-201

INCI Name Acrylic Acid/Acrylonitrogens Copolymer Acrylic Acid/Acrylonitrogens Copolymer Ammonium Acrylates/Acrylonitrogens Copolymer

Viscosity’, mPas 15,000-40,000 3,000-25,000 35,000-65,000

Appearance Off-white to Straw Powder Off-white to Straw Powder Off-white to Straw Powder

Comments Requires Neutralization Requires Neutralization Preneutralized with NH4OH

Note for LIPO Acrylic Polymer data: 1 0.5% Aqueous solution measured at 25°C using Brookfield Model LVT with Helipath spindle T-E @ 12 rpm.

76 Rheology Modifier Handbook

1. Acrylic Polymers

1. Acrylic Polymers

Table 2.lb National Starch and Chemical Bridgewater, NJ, USA Viscosity mPas4

STRUCTURE® 20011

15,000-30,000 @ 1%

pH (As Supplied) 2.2-3.5

2 STRUCTURE 300l 3 STRUCTURE PLUS

20,000-52,000 @ 2% n/a

2.2-3.5 8-9

Form Emulsion Emulsion Emulsion

Notes for National Starch and Chemical Data: 1 INCI Name: Acrylates/Steareth-20 Itaconate Copolymer 2 INCI Name: AcrylatesKeteth-20 Itaconate Copolymer 3 INCI Name: Acrylates/Aminoacrylates Copolymer (Proposed) 4 pH adjusted to 9 with NH OH using Brookfield Model RV @ 10 rpm.. 4

Solids, % 28-30 28-30 19-21

Features For high pH systems, low odor High salt stability, low odor Compatible with cationics, acid-swellable

/I

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 77

1. Personal Care Grades Trade Name

Table 2.1c. RHEOX, Inc. Hightstown, NJ, USA

78 Rheology Modifier Handbook

1. Acrylic Polymers

1. Acrylic Polymers Table 2.ld. Rohm and Haas Company Philadelphia, PA, USA 1. Personal Care Grades I

ACULYN 33 2 . Industrial Grades Trade Name ACRYSOL® ASE-60 ACRYSOL ASE-75 ACRYSOL ASE-95 ACRYSOL ASE-95N-P ACRYSOL ASE-108 ACRYSOL ASE- 108NP ACRYSOL ASE-1000 ACRYSOL G-l 10 ACRYSOL G- 111 ACRYSOL GS ACRYSOL HV- 1

INCI Name 1 Viscosity, mPas 1 pH 1 Appearance I Solids Content, % Acry1ates/Steareth-20 3.0 Milky Liquid 30 202 Methacrylate Copolymer 3.5 Milky Liquid 28 Acrylates Copolymer n/a 1Polymer Type1 1Viscosity mPas 1 ASAE ASAE ASAE ASAE ASAE ASAE ASAE AP NPS SP SP

20 max.3 20 max.3 503 200 max. 2003 70 max. 100 max. 90-1704 700 10,000-20,0004 15,000-20,0004

pH 3.5 3.0 3.0 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.0 9.2 9.3 9.1 9.6

I

Appearance Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Colorless Solution Clear-Hazy Solution Clear, Amber Soln. Clear, Amber Soln.

1 Solids Content, % 28 40 18 18 20 18 29 22 11 12.5 10

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 79

Trade Name ACULYN® 22

Rohm and Haas Acrylic Polymers 2. Industrial Grades Trade Name ACRYSOL RM-5 ACRYSOL RM-6 ACRYSOL T-P-615 ACRYSOL T-T-935 ACRYSOL T-T-950 ACRYSOL WS-24 ACUSOL® 810 ACUSOL 820

Polymer Type1 HMAE HMAE HMAE HMAE HMAE ASAE ASEA HMAE

ACUSOL 823 ACUSOL 830 ACUSOL 842

HMAE ASAE ASAE

Viscosity mPas 30 max. 30 max. 20 max.2 25 max. 40 n/a 2003 1003 30 10 3 50

pH 2.7 2.7 3.0 3.2 3 7.0 2.8-3.8 3.0 3.2 2.5-3.5 3.0

Appearance Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid Milky Liquid

Solids Content, % 30 30 30 30 30 36 18 30 30 28 18

Notes for Rohm and Haas Acrylic/Acrylate data: 1ASAE = Alkali-swellable Acrylic Emulsion, NPS = Neutralized Polyacrylate Solution, HMAE = Hydrophobicallymodified, Alkali-swellable Acrylic Emulsion. 2 Brookfield Model LV @ 60 rpm with Spindle #1 3 Brookfield Model LV @ 12 rpm with Spindle #1 4 Brookfield Model LV @ 12 rpm with Spindle #3 #3

80 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.1d, continued

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 81

2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers Like the products included in the previous section, this group of rheology modifiers is also derived from acrylic acid. But, unlike those polymers, these products are high molecular weight homopolymers of acrylic acid cross-linked with an allyl ether of pentaerythritol, an allyl ether of sucrose or an allyl ether of propylene. Figure 2.1 below schematically depicts these cross-linked acrylic polymers.

Figure 2.1 (Reprinted from B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Technical Bulletin)

In the dry state, these polymers are in a tightly coiled configuration. When dispersed in water, slight uncoiling of the molecule occurs accompanied by minimal thickening of the system. Neutralization of the pendant carboxylic acid groups causes the molecule to uncoil and provide dramatic and instantaneous thickening as well as other desirable rheological effects such as yield stress (yield value). Since a concentration of 0.5% or less is normally used, they can be classified as very high efficiency rheology modifiers.

82 Rheology Modifier Handbook

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional

C. Ionic Charge Anionic

B. Recommended Solvent D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics Systems 1. Not recommended for systems 1. Water 2. Mixtures of water with water- containing monomeric, cationic species miscible organic solvents 2. Products are most effective in the pH range from 5-10 but a few are also useful outside that range 3. Most products are sensitive to the presence of dissolved electrolytes 4. Certain products are suitable for systems containing NaOCL Nomenclature note: These products are listed under the name “Carbomer” in The United States Pharmacopoeia/National Formulary. Personal care grades have the INCI name Carbomer for CARBOPOL and ACRITAMER products and “Acrylates/C10-30 Alkyl Acrylate Crosspolymer” for the PEMULENproducts. E. Useful References 1. “CARBOPOL The Proven Polymers in Pharmaceuticals”, B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Pharmaceutical Bulletins #1 thru #17. 2. “Thickening and Suspending with CARBOPOL Thickeners”, B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Bulletin IT.

2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers Table 2.2a B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Cleveland, OH, USA 1. Pharmaceutical Grades Appearance White Powder

Moisture, % 2.0 max.

2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5

White Powder White Powder White Powder

2.0 max. 2.0 max. 2.0 max.

4,000-11,000 4,000-11,000 29,400-39,400 40,000-60,000

2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5

White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

2.0 max. 2.0 max. 2.0 max. 2.0 max.

4,000-10,000 3 9,500-26,500

2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5

White Powder White Powder

2.0 max. 2.0 max.

3,000-7,000 30,500-39,400 29,400-39,400 40,000-60,000

Carbopol 941 NF Carbopol 971P NF Carbopol 974P NF Carbopol 980 NF Carbopol 981 NF Carbopol 1342 NF

3

Features Low Viscosity High Viscosity, Short Flow High Viscosity, Short Flow Very High Viscosity, Very Short Flow Low Viscosity, Long Flow Low Viscosity, Long Flow High Viscosity Very High Viscosity, Very Short Flow Low Viscosity, Long Flow Medium Viscosity, Long Flow

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 83

pH, (0.5% Soln.) 2.7-3.5

Viscosity, mPas2

Trade Name1 Carbopol 910 NF Carbopol 934 NF Carbopol 934P NF Carbopol 940 NF

B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers

1. Pharmaceutical Grades (continued) Trade Name1

Viscosity, mPas2

Carbopol 1382 NF

25,000-45,000



pH, (0.5% Soln.) 2.7-3.5

White Powder

Moisture, % 2.0 max.

6

2.7-3.5

Medium Viscosity

White Powder

2.0 max.

6

High Viscosity

Pass

2.7-3.5

White Powder

2.0 max.

Low Viscosity

45,000-80,000 25,000-45,000 45,000-65,000

2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5

White Powder White Powder White Powder

2.0 max. 2.0 max. 2.0 max.

3

2.7-3.5

White Powder

2.0 max.

High Viscosity High Viscosity Easy to Disperse, High Viscosity Easy to Disperse, High Viscosity Easy to Disperse, Low Viscosity Easy to Disperse, High Viscosity

3

Pass

Pemulen TR-1 NF Pemulen TR-2 NF

Appearance

Features

2. Personal Care Grades Carbopol 2984 Carbopol 5984 Carbopol ETD 2001 Carbopol ETD 2020

32,000-77,000

Carbopol ETD 2050

3,000-15,000

2.7-3.5

White Powder

2.0 max.

Carbopol Ultrez 10

45,000-65,000

2.7-3.5

White Powder

2.0 max.

84 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.2a, continued

Table 2.2a, continued B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 3. Industrial Grades Trade Name1 Viscosity mPas2 Carbopol 643 7,000±2,500

pH, (0.5% Soln.) 8.0±0.3

7,000±2,500

8.0±0.3

Carbopol 647

7,000±2,500

8.0±0.3

Carbopol 653

7,000±2,500

6.5±0.3

Carbopol 655

7,000±2,500

6.5±0.3

Carbopol 681-XI Trade Name1 Carbopol 672 Carbopol 674 Carbopol 675 Carbopol 676

12,000±2,500 Viscosity, mPas2 25,000-37,500 5,000-13,000 45,000-65,000 45,000-80,000

2.0-3.0 pH, (0.5% Soln.) 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5

Carbopol 678

2,000-9,000

3

2.7-3.5

Solids, % 50

Mineral Spirits

50

Mineral Spirits

50

Mineral Spirits

50

Mineral Spirits

50

Mineral Spirits Mineral Spirits Features

White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

50 Moisture, % < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0

White Powder

< 3.0

Tan, Opaque Dispersion Tan, Opaque Dispersion Tan, Opaque Dispersion Tan, Opaque Dispersion Tan, Opaque Dispersion White Dispersion Appearance

Solvent

High Viscosity, Short Flow Low Viscosity, Long Flow High Viscosity, Short Flow Very High Viscosity, Very Short Flow Ion Tolerance, Long Flow

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 85

Carbopol 645

Appearance

B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 3. Industrial Grades Trade Name1

Viscosity, mPas2

Carbopol 679 Carbopol 690 Carbopol 691 Carbopol 694 Carbopol 1610 Carbopol 1623 Carbopol ETD 2623 Carbopol ETD 2690 Carbopol ETD 2691

350-2500 45,000-65,000 2,000-11,000 40,000-80,000 3 8,000-27,000 3 25,000-45,000 3 30,000-60,000

pH (0.5% Soln.) 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5

White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

Moisture, % < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0

45,000-60,000

2.7-3.5

White Powder

< 3.0

8,000-17,000

2.7-3.5

White Powder

<3.0

4

Appearance

Features Ion Tolerance, Long Flow High Viscosity, Very Short Flow Low Viscosity, Long Flow High Viscosity, Short Flow Medium Viscosity High Viscosity High Viscosity, East to Disperse Very High Viscosity, East to Disperse Low Viscosity, East to Disperse

86 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.2a, continued

Table 2.2a, continued B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 3. Industrial Grades Trade Name

pH (0.5%) 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5 2.7-3.5

Appearance White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

Moisture, % < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0 < 3.0

Features High Viscosity, East to Disperse Very High Viscosity, East to Disperse Low High Viscosity Low High Viscosity

Notes for B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymer data: CARBOPOL is listed in The USP/NF as Carbomer. This is also the INCI name.

1 2

0.5% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm and 250 C with appropriate spindle. 1.0% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm with appropriate spindle. 4 4.0% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm with appropriate spindle. 5 0.2% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm with appropriate spindle. 3

6

B.F. Goodrich Emulsion Test.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 87

Carbopol EZ-1 Carbopol EZ-2 Pemulen 1621 Pemulen 1622

Viscosity mPas2 45,000-65,000 50,000-70,000 3 2,000-12,000 2,000-12,0005

Table 2.2b R•I•T•A Corp. Woodstock, IL, USA Cosmetic and Industrial Grades Trade Name3 ACRITAMER 501E

Viscosity, mPas1 5,400-11,400

pH, (0.5% Soln.) 2.7-3.3

Appearance White Powder

Moisture, % 2.0 max

ACRITAMER 504E ACRITAMER 505E

26,500-39,500 40,000-70,000

2.7-3.3 2.7-3.3

White Powder White Powder

2.0 max 2.0 max

ACRITAMER 934 ACRITAMER 940

26,000-39,500 45,000-70,000

2.7-3.3 2.7-3.3

White Powder White Powder

2.0 max. 2.0 max.

ACRITAMER 941

5,400-11,400

2.7-3.3

White Powder

2.0 max.

Features2 Lower viscosity, for moderately ionic systems Intermediate viscosity Highest viscosity, excellent clarity Intermediate viscosity Highest viscosity, excellent clarity Lower viscosity, for moderately ionic systems

Notes for R•I•T•A Cross-linked Acrylic Polymer data: 1 0.5% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm and 25 0 C with appropriate spindle. 2 Residual solvent in ACRITAMER “E” series is aliphatic hydrocarbon, in all others, Benzene. 3 ACRITAMER has the INCI name Carbomer

88 Rheology Modifier Handbook

2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 89

3. Alginates This group of rheology modifiers is truly derived from the sea. Although several chemical treatments are utilized in their manufacture, they can still be classified as natural products. Brown seaweed, Macrocytis pyrifera, is the main source of algin, the raw material for the production of alginates. It is found in kelp beds in the relative calm waters along the coastline of six of the seven continents and Greenland. Macrocystis, a perennial plant, is harvested on a continuing basis. Subsequent processing produces the products, described in this section, which are mainly various salts of alginic acid. Efforts to define the structure of alginic acid and its salts began in 1930 and have continued since. As expected, the structure is complex and varies depending on the species of brown seaweed used in its manufacture and consists primarily of homo- and copolymers of Mannuronic Acid and Glucuronic Acid. A more thorough discussion of the structure can be found in the reference below. A. Recommended Application Areas Food B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Mixtures of water and minor amounts of water-miscible organic solvents

C. Ionic Charge Anionic D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Not recommended for systems containing monomeric, cationic species 2. Recommended for systems with pH of 4-9 3. Sensitive to dissolved monoand polyvalent electrolytes

E. Useful Reference “Kelco Alginate products for scientific water control”, Third Edition, Monsanto-Kelco Technical Bulletin.

Table 2.3. Monsanto-Kelco Company San Diego, CA, USA 1. Food Grades 1

Trade Name

Viscosity , mPas

pH

Appearance

Mesh Size

a. Sodium Alginates KELGIN HV/F KELGIN MV/F KELGIN F/F KELGIN LV/F KELGIN XL/F KELVIS KELCOSOL KELTONE HV MANUGEL DMB MANUGEL DJX MANUGEL GHB KELTONE LV MANUCOL DH MANUCOL DM MANUCOL DMF

800 400 300 80 30 760 1300 400 300 200 75 50 65 250 300

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

Ivory-Granular Ivory-Granular Ivory-Granular Ivory-Granular Ivory-Granular Ivory-Granular Cream Fibers Cream-Fibrous Ivory-Granular n/a Ivory-Granular Cream-Fibrous n/a Cream-Granular Cream-Granular

28 28 80 42 42 150 80 80 150 200 60 150 60 60 150

7 7 7 7 7

90 Rheology Modifier Handbook

3. Alginates

Table 2.3, continued Monsanto-Kelco Alginates 1. Food Grades, continued Trade Name

Solution Characteristics

pH

Appearance (As Received)

Mesh Size

KELTOSE





KELSET c. Specialty Algin Blends MANUGEL C MANUGEL JKB MANUGEL L98 MANUGEL PTJ MANUCOL JKT  DARILOID DARILOID QH Conc. DARILOID XL MARLOID CMS LACTICOL F336 LACTICOL F616 LACTICOL CFT

Soft Gel @ 2%

n/a

Ivory Granular

80

Soft Gel @ 2%

n/a

Lt. Ivory Fibrous

80

Gelling Blend Gelling Blend Gelling Blend Gelling Blend Gelling Blend Soluble in Milk Soluble in Milk Soluble in Milk Soluble in Milk Soluble in Milk Soluble in Milk Soluble in Milk

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 10.0 10.2 10.0 10.0 10.0 n/a n/a

Ivory Granular Ivory Granular Ivory Granular Ivory Granular Ivory Granular Light Ivory-Granular Light Ivory-Granular Light Ivory-Granular Light Ivory-Granular Light Ivory-Granular n/a n/a

60 60 150 150 250 42 100 42 28 60 42 200

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 91

b. Self-gelling Alginates

Monsanto-Kelco Alginates 1. Food Grades, continued 1

Trade Name

Viscosity , mPas c. Refined Potassium Alginates 270 KELMAR Improved KELMAR 400 d. Propylene Glycol Alginates KELCOLOID HVF 400 KELCOLOID LVF 120 KELCOLOID DH 400 KELCOLOID S 20 KELCOLOID O 25 MANUCOL ESTER B 20 MANUCOL ESTER E/RK 125 2 MANUCOL ESTER M 500 e. Propylene Glycol Alginate Blends  300 @ 2% SHERBELIZER

pH

Appearance

Mesh Size

7.0 7.0

Cream-Granular Cream-Fibrous

100 80

4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 n/a 4.0

Cream-Fibrous Cream-Fibrous Cream-Agglomerate Cream-Fibrous Cream-Fibrous Cream-Fibrous n/a Fibrous

80 80 20 80 80 60 60 40

7

Light Ivory-Granular

14

Conc. DARILOID KB

Soluble in Milk Soluble in Milk

n/a 5.4

n/a Light Ivory-Granular

29 14

150

n/a

n/a

20



DRICOID KB



KELNOODLIZER

92 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.3, continued

Table 2.3, continued Monsanto-Kelco Alginates 2. Industrial Grades a. Sodium Alginates Trade Name

pH

Appearance

Mesh Size

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

Tan-Granular Tan-Granular Tan-Granular Tan Tan Tan Tan Tan

n/a n/a n/a Granular Granular Granular Granular Granular

3

n/a

White-Fibrous

80

b. Alginic Acid TM

KELACID

Notes for Monsanto-Kelco Alginate data: 1 1% Aqueous solution with Brookfield Model LV @ 60rpm 250C with appropriate spindle. 2. 1% Sodium Citrate solution with Brookfield Model RV @ 20rpm and 250C with appropriate spindle. 3 1% Aqueous solution sequestered with Calgon, measured with Brookfield Model RV @ 20rpm and 200C with appropriate spindle.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 93

MANUTEX RS MANUTEX RS 92 MANUTEX RSX KELTEXTM KELTEX S MANUTEXTM RM MANUTEX RH MANUTEX RD

1

Viscosity , mPas 300 49 200 800 1300 2 300 2 60 2 9

94 Rheology Modifier Handbook

4. Associative Thickeners The rheology modifiers in this section are grouped together because of their functionality rather than their chemical structure. Although the structure of the products listed in this section vary considerably, all develop their rheological benefits through the process of “associative” thickening. The various structures of the products described in this section are listed in the following tables. Further details about their structures may be obtained directly from the suppliers. They are water-soluble or water-dispersible polymers that feature both hydrophilic and hydrophobic moieties within the same polymeric molecule. The hydrophobic segments of the molecule are capable of forming intermolecular associations and absorbing on the surface of dispersed particles in the system, hence the name, “associative”. This mechanism provides thickening and rheology modification much greater than achieved with unmodified polymers of equal molecular weight. A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Personal Care 2. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Systems Water

C. Ionic Charge Nonionic D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Suitable for systems containing anionic, nonionic and cationic species 2. Some products recommended for systems between pH of 2&10 3. Some products suitable for systems containing H2O2 or NaOCl

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 95

E. Useful References 1. “Acrysol Thickeners and Rheology Modifiers”, Rohm and Haas Company Bulletin RMT2A. 2. “Aculyn46 personal care polymer”, Rohm and Haas Company Bulletin FC-404.

Table 2.4a RHEOX, Inc. Hightstown, NJ, USA A. Industrial Grades Trade Name RHEOLATE 204 RHEOLATE 205 RHEOLATE 208 RHEOLATE 210 RHEOLATE 244 RHEOLATE 255 RHEOLATE 278 RHEOLATE 300 RHEOLATE 310 RHEOLATE 350

Polymer Type Polyether Urea Polyurethane Polyether Urea Polyurethane Polyether Urea Polyurethane Polyether Urea Polyurethane Polyether Urea Polyurethane Polyether Urea Polyurethane Polyether Urea Polyurethane Polyether Polyol Polyether Polyol Polyether Polyol

Notes for RHEOX Associative Thickener data: 1 Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether

Appearance Powder Powder Powder Liquid (Soln.) Liquid (Soln.) Liquid (Soln.) Liquid (Soln.) Liquid (Soln.) Liquid (Soln.) Liquid (Soln.)

% Active 100 100 100 25 25 25 25 32 32 50

Solvent(s) None None None Water Water/DGBE1 Water/DGBE Water/DGBE Water/DGBE Water Water

96 Rheology Modifier Handbook

4. Associative Thickeners

4. Associative Thickeners Table 2.4b Rohm and Haas Company Philadelphia, PA, USA 1. Personal Care Grades Polymer Type1 HMNP HMNP

Viscosity, mPas 11,000 <3000

Appearance Hazy Liquid Hazy Liquid

% Active 35 14-16

Solvent2 Water/PG n/a

HMEOUC HMEOUC HMEOUC HMEOUC HMNP HMNP HMNP

3,000-3,500 1,000-2,500 2,500-3,800 2,000-3,000 275-375 11,000 2,500

Hazy Liquid Hazy Liquid Hazy Liquid Hazy Liquid Hazy Liquid Hazy Liquid Hazy Liquid

17.5 25 20 17.5 60 35 17.5

Water Water/DGBE Water Water/DGBE Water/Methanol Water/PG Water/DGBE

2. Industrial Grades ACRYSOL RM-8W ACRYSOL RM-825 ACRYSOL RM-2020 ACRYSOL SCT-275 ACRYSOL TT-678 ACUSOL 880 ACUSOL 882

Notes for Rohm and Haas Associative Thickener data: 1 HMNP = Hydrophobically Modified Nonionic Polyol, HMEOUC = Hydrophobically Modified Ethylene Oxide Urethane Block Copolymer. 2 PG = Propylene Glycol, DGBE = Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 97

Trade Name ACULYN 44 ACULYN 46

Table 2.4c Süd-Chemie Rheologicals München, Germany Industrial Grades Trade Name OPTIFLO L100 OPTIFLO H400 OPTIFLO H500

Polymer Type1 HMNP HMNP HMNP

Viscosity, mPas 2,500-2,000 2,500-3,500 3,500-4,000

Notes for Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Associative Thickener data: 1 HMNP = Hydrophobically Modified Nonionic Polymer 2 DGBE = Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether.

Appearance n/a n/a n/a

% Active 20 20 17.5

Solvent2 Water Water/DGBE Water/DGBE

98 Rheology Modifier Handbook

4. Associative Thickeners

106 Rheology Modifier Handbook

6. Microcrystalline Cellulose These rheology modifiers are produced from alpha cellulose. Cellulose fibers consist of amorphous (paracrystalline) regions and crystalline regions. Hydrolysis permits the separation and removal of the amorphous material leaving the crystalline portion for further processing to obtain microcrystalline cellulose that is produced in either powdered or colloidal grades. The powdered grades are pure microcrystalline cellulose while colloidal grades are mixtures of microcrystalline cellulose and a protective colloid, usually Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC) but also Xanthan Gum.

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical

C. Ionic Charge

1. Powdered grades: nonionic 2. Colloidal grades: Anionic (because of presence of the protective colloid) B. Recommended Solvent D. Compatibility/Stability Systems Characteristics 1. Excellent thermal stability 1. Water 2. Mixtures of water with water- 2. Readily flocculated by miscible organic solvents electrolytes, cationic polymers and Note: Microcrystalline is insoluble surfactants in water but can be dispersed in it to achieve rheology modification.

Useful References 1. “Avicel ® Cellulose Gel (Microcrystalline Cellulose) General Technology”, FMC Corp. Technical Bulletin. 2. “Avicel RC-591 Microcrystalline Cellulose and Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium, NF, BP, Pharmaceutical Emulsions and Suspensions”, FMC Corp. Technical Bulletin.

Microcrystalline Cellulose Table 2.6 FMC Corp. Philadelphia, PA, USA

Trade Name Avicel RC-501

Microcrystalline Cellulose, % 91

% Colloidal (0.2 micron) 30

Initial Viscosity, mPas 1 72-168 @ 2.1%

Avicel RC-581

89

70

72-168 @ 1.2%

Avicel RC-591F

88

70

39-175 @ 1.2%

Avicel CL-611

85

70

50-151 @ 2.6%

Avicel RCN-30

75

40

620 @ 3%

MicroQuick WC-595 Stabilizer Avicel PH-101 Avicel PH-102 Avicel PH-105 Avicel FD-100

22

15

10-100 @ 6%

100 100 100 100

0 0 0 0

n/a n/a n/a n/a

Features Bulk dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC Bulk dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC Spray dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC Spray dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC Colloidal grade co-processed with Xanthan Gum & Maltodextrin Colloidal grade co-processed with whey Spray dried powdered grade Spray dried powdered grade Spray dried powdered grade Spray dried powdered grade

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 107

1. Food Grades

FMC Microcrystalline Cellulose 1. Food Grades, continued Trade Name Novagel RCN-10 Novagel RCN-15

Microcrystalline Cellulose, % 90 85

Guar Gum, % 10 15

Viscosity @ 4%, mPas 1 4,000 max. 4,000 max.

Sodium CMC, % 8.3-13.8 8.3-13.8 11.3-18.8

Viscosity, mPas 1 72-168 @ 1.2% 39-91 @ 1.2% 50-118 @ 2.6%

Features Co-processed MCC and Guar Gum Co-processed MCC and Guar Gum

2. Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name Avicel RC-581 Avicel RC-591F Avicel CL-611

Microcrystalline Cellulose, % 80.2-85.7 80.2-85.7 75.2-82.7

Notes for FMC Microcrystalline Cellulose data: 1 Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm with appropriate spindle, measured at 120 sec.

pH 6-8 @ 1.2% 6-8 @ 1.2% 6-8 @ 2.6%

Loss on Drying, % 6.0 max. 6.0 max. 6.0 max.

108 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.6, continued

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 109

7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium These rheology modifiers are classified chemically as cellulose ethers and are produced by reacting alkali cellulose with sodium monochloroacetate. Their unit chemical structure, depicted in Figure 2.3 below, is composed of two anhydroglucose units each of which originally contains three hydroxyl. Sodium Carboxymethyl groups are substituted for some of the hydrogens of these hydroxyl groups. The Degree of Substitution (DS) is defined as the average number of substituted with Sodium Carboxymethyl substituted per anhydroglucose unit. Commercial products typically have a DS between about 0.7 and 1.2.

Figure 2.3 (Reprinted from Aqualon Div, Hercules, Inc. Technical Bulletin Ref.1)

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care 4. Household/Institutional

B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1 . Hot or cold water

C. Ionic Charge

Anionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Best stability at pH 7-9 2. Trivalent cations can cause precipitation

110 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Useful References “AQUALON Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose, Physical and Chemical Properties”, Hercules, Inc., Technical Bulletin 250-10F.

7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium Table 2.7 Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA 1. Food Grades

Aqualon CMC 7HF Aqualon CMC 7H3SF Aqualon CMC 7H4F Aqualon CMC 7HOF Aqualon CMC 7LF Aqualon CMC 7MF Aqualon CMC 7M2F Aqualon CMC 7M8SF Aqualon CMC 9H4F Aqualon CMC 9M8F Aqualon CMC 9M31F

Viscosity, mPas

1

1,000-3,000 @ 1% 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 2,500-6,000 @1% 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 25-50 @2% 2 400-800 @2% 100-200 @2% 2 200-800 @2% 2,500-6,000 @1% 400-800 @2% 1,500-3,100 @2%

DS

3

0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.80-0.95 0.80-0.95 0.80-0.95

pH, 2% Soln. 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

Appearance White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

Moisture, % 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 111

Trade Name

Aqualon Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 2. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades Trade Name Aqualon CMC 7HP Aqualon CMC 7H3SP Aqualon CMC 7H4P Aqualon CMC 7HOP Aqualon CMC 7LP Aqualon CMC 7L2P Aqualon CMC 7MP Aqualon CMC 7M2P Aqualon CMC 7M8SP Aqualon CMC 9H4P Aqualon CMC 9M8F Aqualon CMC 9M31F Aqualon CMC 12M8P Aqualon CMC 12M31P

Viscosity, mPas 1

DS

3

1,000-3,000 @ 1% 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 2,500-6,000 @1% 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 25-50 @2% 2 50-200 @4% 2 400-800 @2% 100-200 @2% 2 200-800 @2% 2,500-6,000 @1% 400-800 @2% 1,500-3,100 @2% 800-3,100 @2% 400-800 @2%

0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.80-0.95 0.80-0.95 0.80-0.95 1.15-1.45 1.15-1.45

pH, 2% Soln. 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

Appearance White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

Moisture, % 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max.

112 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.7, continued

Table 2.7, continued Aqualon Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 3. Industrial Grades Trade Name

1,000-3,000 @ 1% 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 2,500-6,000 @ 1% 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 25-50 @ 2% 2 50-200 @ 4% 2 400-800 @ 2% 100-200 @ 2% 2 200-800 @ 2% 2,500-6,000 @ 1% 400-800 @ 2% 1,500-3,100 @ 2% 800-3,100 @ 2% 400-800 @ 2% ≅ 500 @ 12%

3

DS 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.65-0.90 0.80-0.95 0.80-0.95 0.80-0.95 1.15-1.45 1.15-1.45 1.15-1.45

pH, 2% Soln.

Appearance

Moisture, %

7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.0

White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max. 8.0 max.

Notes for Aqualon Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium data: 1 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0 C and 30 rpm with appropriate spindle. 2 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0 C and 60 rpm with appropriate spindle. 3 Degree of substitution, i.e. the average number of hydroxyl groups substituted per anhydroglucose unit.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 113

Aqualon CMC 7H Aqualon CMC 7H3S Aqualon CMC 7H4 Aqualon CMC 7HO Aqualon CMC 7L Aqualon CMC 7L2 Aqualon CMC 7M Aqualon CMC 7M2 Aqualon CMC 7M8S Aqualon CMC 9H4 Aqualon CMC 9M8 Aqualon CMC 9M31 Aqualon CMC 12M8 Aqualon CMC 12M31 AMBERGUM  1221

Viscosity, mPas 1

114 Rheology Modifier Handbook

8. Hydroxyethylcellulose The reaction of Ethylene Oxide with Cellulose produces this group of rheology modifiers. Hydroxyethyl groups are attached to Cellulose by direct reaction of Ethylene Oxide with one or more of the three Anhydroglucose units of the polymer backbone or by reaction with previously substituted hydroxyl groups to form side chains. The Idealized structure of these cellulosic polymers is depicted in Figure 2.4 below:

Figure 2.4 Structure of Hydroxyethylcellulose (Reprinted from Union Carbide Corp. Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below)

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional C. Recommended Solvent Systems Water

B. Ionic Charge Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Compatible with most anionic, nonionic, amphoteric and cationic ingredients 2. Excellent stability in the presence of electrolytes

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 115

Useful References 1." NATROSOL® Hydroxyethylcellulose ", Aqualon Technical Bulletin

250-1 1E

2. "CELLOSIZE® Hydroxyethylcellulose", Union Carbide Corp. Technical Bulletin P3-5777

Table 2.8a Aqualon Company Wilmington, DE, USA 1. Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name NATROSOL 250G Pharma NATROSOL 250H NF NATROSOL 250 HX Pharma NATROSOL 250L NF NATROSOL 250M Pharma

Viscosity, mPas 1 2

150-400 @2% 1,500-2,500 @1% 1,500-2,500 @1% 75-150 @5% 4,500-6,500 @2%

2

pH, 2% Soln. 7

Appearance White-Lt. Tan Powder

Moisture, % 5.0 max.

7 7 7 7

White-Lt. Tan Powder Fine, White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder

5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max.

116 Rheology Modifier Handbook

8. Hydroxyethylcellulose

Table 2.8a, continued Aqualon Hydroxyethylcellulose 2. Personal Care and Industrial Grades Viscosity, mPas 1 25-105 @2% 2

NATROSOL 250H Pharma NATROSOL 250HR NATROSOL 250HHR NATROSOL 250H4R NATROSOL 250JR NATROSOL 250KR NATROSOL 250LR NATROSOL 250MR

150-400 @2% 1,500-2,500 @1% 1,500-2,500 @1% 3,500-5,000 @1% 2,600-3,300 @1%

Appearance White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder

Moisture, % 5.0 max. 5.0 max.

7 7 7 7 7

White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder

5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max.

7 7 7

White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder White-Lt. Tan Powder

5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max.

7 ≈7

White-Lt. Tan Powder Off-white Powder

5.0 max. 8.0 max.

2

150-400 @5% 1,500-2,500 @2% 75-150 @5% 4,500-6,500 @2% 800-1,500 @1% 150-750 @ 1%

NATROSOL 250MHR NATROSOL PLUS3

pH, 2% Soln. 7 7

2

Notes on Aqualon Hydroxyethylcellulose data: 1 2

0

Brookfield Model LV @ 25 C and 30rpm with appropriate Spindle. 0

Brookfield Model LV @ 25 C and 60rpm with appropriate Spindle 3 Cetyl Hydroxyethylcellulose (INCI Adopted Name)

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 117

Trade Name NATROSOL 250ER NATROSOL 250GR

Table 2.8b Union Carbide Corporation Danbury, CT, USA 1. Personal Care and Industrial Grades Trade Name CELLOSIZE PCG 10 CELLOSIZE QP 3L CELLOSIZE QP 09L CELLOSIZE QP 09H CELLOSIZE QP 40 CELLOSIZE QP 300 CELLOSIZE QP 4400H CELLOSIZE QP 15000H CELLOSIZE QP 30000H CELLOSIZE QP 52000H CELLOSIZE QP 100MH CELLOSIZE WP 09L CELLOSIZE WP 09H

Viscosity, mPas 1 4,400-6,000 @ 1% 2

215-282 @ 5% 75-112 @ 5% 113-150 @ 5% 80-125 @ 2% 300-400 @ 2%

2 2

4,800-6,000 @ 2% 1,100-1,500 @1% 1,500-1,900 @1% 2,400-6,000 @1% 4,400-6,000 @1% 75-112 @5% 113-150 @5%

pH, 2% Soln. 6-7 6-7

Appearance White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder

Volatile, % 5 5

6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7

White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder

5 5 5 5

6-7

White-Cream Powder

5

6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7

White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder

5 5 5 5 5 5

Notes on Union Carbide Hydroxyethylcellulose data: Brookfield Model LVF @ 250 C and 30rpm with appropriate Spindle.

1 2

Brookfield Model LVF @ 250 C and 60rpm with appropriate Spindle.

118 Rheology Modifier Handbook

8. Hydroxyethylcellulose

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 119

9. Hydroxypropylcellulose The reaction of Propylene Oxide with Cellulose produces this group of rheology modifiers. Hydroxypropyl groups can attached to cellulose by direct reaction of propylene oxide with one or more of the three hydroxyl groups of the anhydroglucose units that make up the polymer backbone or by reaction with previously substituted hydroxyls to form side chains. One major difference between Hydroxyethylcellulose and Hydroxypropylcellulose is the solubility characteristics, the latter being soluble in water and a number of organic solvents while the former is soluble only in water.

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care 4. Household/Institutional

B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water at room Temp. to 40°C 2. Polar Organic Solvents 3. Certain Chlorinated Hydrocarbons

C. Ionic Charge Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Compatible with most anionic and nonionic gums and polymers

Useful References “KLUCEL® Hydroxypropylcellulose, Physical Properties”, Aqualon Technical Bulletin 250-2D

and

Chemical

Table 2.9 Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA 1. Food, Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades Trade Name KLUCEl HFF KLUCEL MFF KLUCEL GFF KLUCEL JFF KLUCEL LFF KLUCEL EFF 2. Industrial Grades KLUCEL H KLUCEL M KLUCEL G KLUCEL J KLUCEL L KLUCEL E

Viscosity, mPas 1,500-3,000 @ 1% 1 4,000-6,500 @ 2% 2 150-400 @ 2% 2 150-400 @ 5% 2 75-150 @ 5% 1 200-600 @ 10% 2

pH, 2% Soln. 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5

Appearance White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder

Moisture, % 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max.

1,500-3,000 @ 1% 1 4,000-6,500 @ 2% 2 150-400 @ 2% 2 150-400 @ 5% 2 75-150 @ 5% 1 150-700 @ 10% 2

5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5 5.0-8.5

White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder White-Off-white Powder

5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max.

Notes for Aqualon Hydroxypropylcellulose data: 1 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0C and 30rpm with appropriate spindle. 2 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0C and 60rpm with appropriate spindle.

120 Rheology Modifier Handbook

9. Hydroxypropylcellulose

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 121

10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose Reacting both Methyl Chloride and Propylene Oxide with cellulose produces this group of rheology modifiers. The structure of these products is depicted in Figure 2.5 below.

Figure 2.5 Typical Chemical Structure of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (Reprinted from The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below)

As with other cellulose derivatives, the average number of hydroxyl groups of each anhydroglucose unit in the polymer backbone that have been substituted with an organic group is referred to as the “Degree of Substitution” (DS). For these products, DS is ≈ 1.2-2.0. Another parameter that defines these rheology modifiers is the number of moles of hydroxypropyl per mole of anhydroglucose. This is the “Molar Substitution” (MS). For these products, its range is ≈ 0.1 – 0.8.

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care 4. Household/Institutional

B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Mixtures of water and polar organic solvents

C. Ionic Charge

Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1 . Compatible with most anionic and nonionic gums and polymers 2. Good tolerance for electrolytes

122 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Useful References

1. “BENECEL® High Purity Methylcellulose, Methylhydroxyethylcellulose, Methylhydroxypropylcellulose 2. “METHOCEL® Cellulose Ethers Technical Handbook”, The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin 192-01062-1296XGW. 3. “A Formulators Guide to METHOCEL Cellulose Ethers in Personal Care Products”, The DowChemical Company Technical Bulletin 1991149-1292AMS.

10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose Table 2.10a Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA

Viscosity, Trade Name 

BENECEL MP 824 BENECEL MP 843 BENECEL MP 874 BENECEL MP 943

1

mPas 20,000 4,000 40,000-60,000 3,800-5,700

Methoxyl DS 2

HydroxyPropyl MS 3

pH, 1% Soln.

Appearance

19-24 19-24 19-24 28-30

4-12 4-12 4-12 7-12

5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0

Fine, White-Cream Powder Fine, White-Cream Powder Fine, White-Cream Powder Very Fine, White-Cream Powder

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 123

1. Food, Pharmaceutical & Personal Care Grades

Aqualon Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 2. Industrial Grades Trade Name

Viscosity, 1

CULMINAL MHPC-25 CULMINAL MHPC-50 CULMINAL MHPC-400 CULMINAL MHPC-843 CULMINAL MHPC-1034 CULMINAL MHPC-3000 CULMINAL MHPC-6000 PF CULMINAL MHPC-12000 PFF CULMINAL MHPC-20000 P CULMINAL MHPC-20000 PFR CULMINAL MHPC-20000 S

mPas 25-35 45-55 400-500 3,800-5,700 25,500-34,500 3,500-4,700 6,000-8,000 12,000-16,000 20,000-27,500 20,000-27,500 10,000-20,000

pH, 1% Soln.

Appearance

5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0

White-Cream Granules White-Cream Granules White-Cream Granules White-Cream Powder White-Cream Granules White-Cream Granules Fine, White-Cream Powder Very Fine, White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder Fine, White-Cream Powder White-Cream Granules

Notes for Aqualon Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose data: 1

2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 200 C DS = Degree of Substitution, i.e. the average number of substituent groups per anhydroglucose unit. 3 MS = Molar Substitution , i.e. the number of moles of hydroxypropyl groups per mole of anhydroglucose. 2

124 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.10a, continued

10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose Table 2.10b The Dow Chemical Company Midland, MI, USA

Viscosity, Trade Name 

METHOCEL E15 Food Grade METHOCEL E50 Food Grade METHOCEL E4M Food Grade METHOCEL F50 Food Grade METHOCEL F4M Food Grade METHOCEL K100 Food Grade METHOCEL K4M Food Grade METHOCEL K15M Food Grade METHOCEL K100M Food Grade

mPas

1

15 50 4,000 50 4,000 100 4,000 15,000 100,000

Methoxyl DS 2

HydroxyPropyl MS 3

Moisture, %

Appearance

1.9 1.9 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4

0.23 0.23 0.23 0.13 0.13 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 125

1. Food Grades

Dow Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 2. Pharmaceutical Grades Viscosity, Trade Name METHOCEL E15LV Premium METHOCEL E50 Premium METHOCEL E4MPremium METHOCEL F50 Premium METHOCEL F4M Premium METHOCEL K100LV Premium METHOCEL K4M Premium METHOCEL K15M Premium METHOCEL K100M Premium

1

mPas 2.4-3.6 4,000 4-6 5-7 12-18 40-60 4,000 15,000 100,000

Methoxyl DS 2

HydroxyPropyl MS 3

Moisture, %

Appearance

1.9 1.9 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4

0.23 0.23 0.23 0.13 0.13 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.21

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder

126 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.10b, continued

Table 2.10b, continued Dow Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose Trade Name

Viscosity, 1

METHOCEL 40-100 METHOCEL 40-101 METHOCEL 40-202 METHOCEL K4MS METHOCEL K15MS

mPas 12,000 75,000 4,000 4,000 15,000

Methoxyl DS 2

Hydroxypropyl MS 3

Moisture, %

Appearance

1.4 1.4 1.9 1.4 1.4

0.85 0.85 0.21 0.21 0.21

3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder White/Off-white Powder

Notes for Dow Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose data: 1

2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 200 C DS = Degree of Substitution, i.e. the average number of substituent groups per anhydroglucose unit. 3 MS = Molar Substitution , i.e. the number of moles of hydroxypropyl groups per mole of anhydroglucose. 2

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 127

3. Personal Care Grades

128 Rheology Modifier Handbook

11. Methylcellulose This group of rheology modifiers is produced by reacting Methyl Chloride with Cellulose. The resulting polymers are depicted structurally in Figure 2.6 below:

Figure 2.6 Chemical Structure of Methylcellulose (Reprinted from The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below)

As with other cellulose derivatives, the average number of hydroxyl groups of each anhydroglucose unit in the polymer backbone that have been substituted with an organic group is referred to as the “Degree of Substitution” (DS). For these products, DS is ≈ 1.6–1.9. A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Mixtures of water with minor amounts of water-miscible organic solvents

C. Ionic Charge Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Compatible with most anionic, nonionic, amphoteric and cationic ingredients 2. Good tolerance for dissolved electrolytes

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 129

Useful References 1. “BENECEL® High Purity Methylcellulose, Methylhydroxyethylcellulose, Methylhydroxypropylcellulose 2. “METHOCEL® Cellulose Ethers Technical Handbook”, The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin 192-01062-1296XGW. 3. “A Formulators Guide to METHOCEL Cellulose Ethers in Personal Care Products”, The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin 1991149-1292AMS.

Table 2.11a Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA 1. Food, Pharmaceutical & Personal Care Grades Viscosity, Trade Name 

BENECEL M 042 BENECEL M 043 2. Industrial Grades CULMINAL MC 25S CULMINAL MC 3000P CULMINAL MC 4000PS

1

mPas 380-570 3,800-5,700 25-35 3,400-4,700 4,700-5,700

Methoxyl %

pH, 1% Soln.

Appearance

27.5-31.5 27.5-31.5

5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0

Fine, White-Cream Powder Fine, White-Cream Powder

27.5-31.5 27.5-31.5 27.5-31.5

5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0 5.5-8.0

White-Cream Granules White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder

Notes for Aqualon Methylcellulose data: 1

0

2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 20 C

130 Rheology Modifier Handbook

11. Methylcellulose

11. Methylcellulose Table 2.11b The Dow Chemical Company Midland, MI, USA

Trade Name METHOCEL A40M Food Grade METHOCEL A4C Premium METHOCEL A4M Premium METHOCEL A15LV Premium

Viscosity, mPas 1 40,000 400 4,000 15

Methoxyl, % 27.5-31.5 27.5-31.5 27.5-31.5 27.5-31.5

pH, 1% Soln. 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8

Notes for Dow Methylcellulose data: 1

0

2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 20 C

Appearance White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 131

1. Food, Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades

132 Rheology Modifier Handbook

12. Guar & Guar Derivatives Guar gum is obtained from the endosperm of two leguminous plants, cyamaposis tetragonalobus and psoraloides. It is composed of galactose and mannose connected through glycosidic linkages. Thus, it is classified chemically as a galactomannan, a hydrophyllic polysacharride. Product variations are achieved by reacting pendant methoxy groups on the guar molecule with various organic species to produce hydroxypropyl and quaternary ammonium guar derivatives. The idealized structure of unmodified guar gum is depicted in Figure 2.7 below.

Figure 2.7 (Reprinted from Hercules, Inc. Technical Bulletin, Ref 1)

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care

B. Recommended Solvent Systems Water

C. Ionic Charge Nonionic or Cationic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics Good compatibility with most surfactant systems.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 133 Useful References 1. “SUPERCOL Guar Gum”, Hercules, Inc. Technical Bulletin 25021A. 2. “ JAGUAR C”, Rhodia Technical Bulletin RP-JAGC. 3. “ JAGUAR HP”, Rhodia Technical Bulletin RP-JAGHP.

Table 2.12a Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA 1. Food Grades Trade Name SUPERCOL G2-S SUPERCOL G3-S SUPERCOL GF SUPERCOL K-1 SUPERCOL U

Guar Type 1 GG GG GG GG GG

Viscosity, mPas 2 4,500 3,800 4,500 1,000 5,100

Appearance Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder

Moisture, % 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12

% -200 Mesh 20 max. 10 max. 70 max. 70 max. 80 min.

Features Excellent dispersability Slower hydration than G2-S Fast hydration Retort stability High thickening efficiency

134 Rheology Modifier Handbook

12. Guar & Guar Derivatives

Table 2.12a, continued Aqualon Guar & Guar Derivatives 2a. Personal Care Grades - Hydroxypropyl Guar Guar Type1 HPG HPG

Viscosity, mPas 2 4,000-5,000 3,800-4,800

Appearance Fine, Off-white Powder Fine, Off-white Powder

Moisture, % n/a n/a

-200 Mesh, % 90 90

Features Non-buffered polymer Self-hydrating grade

2b. Personal Care Grades - Cationic Guar N-Hance 3000

GHPTC

2,500 min.3

Fine, Off-white Powder

10 max.

80 min.

N-Hance 3196

GHPTC

4,000 min.

Fine, Off-white Powder

10 max.

n/a

N-Hance 3198

GHPTC

3,800-4,800

Fine, Off-white Powder

10 max.

n/a

N-Hance 3205

GHPTC

3,000-4,000

Fine, Off-white Powder

10 max.

n/a

N-Hance 3215

GHPTC

3,200-4,200

Fine, Off-white Powder

10 max.

n/a

Degree of Cationic Substitution - 0.07 Degree of Cationic Substitution - 0.13 Degree of Cationic Substitution - 0.07 Degree of Cationic Substitution - 0.13 Degree of Cationic Substitution - 0.20

Notes on Aqualon Guar Gum data: 1 INCI names: GG= Guar Gum, HPG = Hydroxypropyl Guar, GHPTC= Guar Hydroxypropyltrimonium Chloride 2 1.0% aqueous solution measured with Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm and 250 C. 3 1.0% aqueous solution measured with Brookfield Model LV at 6 rpm and 250 C.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 135

Trade Name N-Hance HP40 N-Hance HP40S

Table 2.12b Rhodia, Inc. Courbevoie, France, Cranbury, NJ, USA 1. Food & Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name Jaguar 45DF Jaguar 4000FC Jaguar 4500F Jaguar 6,000 Jaguar EZ Jaguar GSA Jaguar HV 400F UNIGUAR 20 UNIGUAR 150

Viscosity, mPas.1 4,000 - 5,000 3,500-4,500 4,000-5,000 6,000 3,500-4,500 2,600-3,600 5,000 min. 12,5002 3,000

Appearance Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder

Moisture, % 8-13 8-13 8-13 12 max. 8-13 12 max. 12 max. 11 11

-200 Mesh, % 20 max. 80 min. 90 min. 30 max. 94 max. 80 min. 98 min. -40 65-85 max.

Features Moderate hydration rate, dust free Moderate hydration rate Fast hydration rate Very fast hydration rate Very fast hydration rate, easy to disperse Moderate hydration rate Fast hydration rate Very easily dispersible Easily dispersible

136 Rheology Modifier Handbook

12. Guar & Guar Derivatives

Table 2.12b, continued Rhodia Guar and Guar Derivatives 2a. Personal Care Grades - Hydroxypropyl Guar Viscosity, mPas.1 3,600-4,600 3,100-3,900

pH 8.5-11.0 6-7.5

Appearance Powder Powder

Moisture, % 6.0-12-0 12

JAGUAR HP-60 JAGUAR HP-105

2,800-4,000 2,500-4,500

9.5-10.5 9.0-11.0

Powder Powder

6.0-13.0 3.5-10.0

JAGUAR HP-120

1250

8.5-11.0

Powder

5.0-9.0

Features Highest viscosity grade High viscosity, medium. HP3 substitution Glycol compatible High clarity, moderate HP3 substitution Thickens ethanol solutions

2b. Personal Care Grades - Cationic Guar Trade Name INCI Name3 Viscosity,mPas.1 pH Appearance % Moisture JAGUAR C-13S GHPTC 3,000-4,000 6-7 Powder 6-12 JAGUAR C-14S GHPTC 3,000-4,000 9-11 Powder 6-13 JAGUAR C-17 GHPTC 2,000-4,000 8.5-10.5 Powder 6-12 JAGUAR C-162 HPGHPTC 300-1,000 8.5-10.5 Powder 13 max. HI-CARE 1000 GHPTC 1,200-1,900 8.0-11.0 Powder 13 max Notes for Rhodia Guar Gum data: 1 1.0% aqueous solution measured using Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm and 250 C. 2 2.0% aqueous solution measured using Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm and 250 C. 3 HP = Hydroxypropyl, GHPTC = Guar Hydroxypropyl Trimonium Chloride, HPGHPTC = Hydroxypropyl Guar Hydroxypropyl Trimonium Chloride.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 137

Trade Name JAGUAR HP-8 JAGUAR HP-11

138 Rheology Modifier Handbook

13. Locust Bean Gum Another type of rheology modifier obtained from the endosperm of a seed is Locust Bean Gum. In this case, the seeds are from the carob tree, ceratonia siliqua. Thus, the gum is sometimes referred to as carob gum. The structure of Locust Bean Gum is reported to consist of a linear chain of β-D-mannopyranosyl units linked 1,4 with single-membered α-Dgalactopyranosyl units occuring as side branches. The galactopyranosyl units are linked 1,6 with the main chain1. It is classified as a high molecular weight, hydrophilic polysaccharide. A. Recommended Application Areas Food

B. Recommended Solvent Systems Water

C. Ionic Charge Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics Requires heating to develop rheological properties

Useful Reference Handbook of Water-Soluble Gums and Polymers, Davidson, R.L, Ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1980

13. Locust Bean Gum

Food Grades Trade Name Type C233 FCC Type 28/32 FCC Type 28/32 FCC, Coarse Mesh Type 20/24 FCC

Gum Content, % 73 min. 76 min. 76 min. 73 min.

Viscosity @ 1%, mPas 2,800-3,200 2,800-3,200 2,800-3,200 2,000-2,400

pH 6-7 5.5-7 5.5-6 6-7

Moisture, % 14 max. 14 max. 13 max. 14 max.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 139

Table 2.13a Ashland Chemical Company Fine Ingredients Div. Columbus, OH, USA

Table 2.13b Rhodia, Inc. Courbevoire, France, Cranbury, NJ, USA Food Grades Trade Name

Viscosity @ 1%, mPas

pH

Appearance

-200 Mesh, %

Locust Bean Gum 100MST Locust Bean Gum HG-175 Locust Bean Gum HG-200 MEYPRODYN 200

3,000 min. 3,000 min. 2,800 min. 2,000 min.

3.5-8.0 5.4-7.0 5.4-7.0 6.0-7.0

n/a Cream Powder Cream Powder Cream Powder

10 min. 25 max. 60 max. 65 max.

140 Rheology Modifier Handbook

13. Locust Bean Gum

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 141

14. Organoclays

Organoclays, as their name suggests, are mineral-based rheology modifiers, the first of three such types of additives included in this handbook (the others being Silica and Water-swellable Clays). They are produced from clay minerals of the smectite group of clays, principally hectorite and bentonite. Following mining and grinding of the crude clay ore, extensive beneficiation processes are used to remove undesirable components yielding highly-purified smectite clays that are used as the basis for these products. At this point in the process, these clays are termed “water-swellable”. They can be readily dispersed (not dissolved) in water where they develop a three-dimensional colloidal structure, not unlike a “house-ofcards”. This colloidal structure provides thickening and other desirable rheological effects (see Part 2, Section 19 for further information about Water-Swellable Clays). The purified smectite clays can also be modified with a number of different long-chain organic compounds. These compounds, usually cationic in nature, are electrostatically bonded to the surfaces of individual clay platelets. This modification process converts the clay to a hydrophobic, solvent-dispersible ingredient that can modify the rheology of organic solvent-based systems. They are commercially available as dry, free-flowing powders or “mastergels” where the Organoclay has been predispersed in one or more an organic compounds or silicones. A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Personal Care 2. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Systems Aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons

C. Ionic Charge Cationic D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics Some grades require use of a chemical (polar) activator

142 Rheology Modifier Handbook Useful References 1. “Rheology Handbook”, RHEOX, Inc. Technical Bulletin PB 113. 2. “Cosmetics & Rheology”, RHEOX, Inc. Technical Bulletin DS1799E. 3 . “Rheological Additives”, Süd Chemie Rheologicals Technical Bulletin.

14. Organoclays Table 2.14a RHEOX, Inc. Hightstown, NJ, USA

Trade Name a. Dry Products

INCI Name

Appearance

BENTONE 27

Stearalkonium Hectorite

Powder

BENTONE 34

Quaternium-18 Bentonite

Powder

BENTONE 38

Quaternium-18 Hectorite

Powder



b. “Mastergels” Trade Name BENTONE GEL CAO

BENTONE GEL DOA BENTONE GEL EUG

INCI Name Castor(Ricinus Communis)Oil(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and) Propylene Carbonate Dioctyl Adipate(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate Octyldodecanol(and) Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Appearance Gel

Gel Gel

Comments High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended Other Ingredients Castor Oil, Propylene Carbonate

Dioctyl Adipate, Propylene Carbonate Octyldodecanol, Propylene Carbonate

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 143

1. Personal Care Grades

RHEOX Organoclays 1b. Personal Care Mastergls, continued Trade Name BENTONE GEL EUG BENTONE GEL GTCC

BENTONE GEL IPM BENTONE GEL IPP BENTONE GEL ISD

BENTONE GEL LOI

INCI Name Octyldodecanol(and) Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate Isopropyl Myristate(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate Isopropyl Palmitate(and) Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate Isododecane(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite (and)Propylene Carbonate Lanolin Oil(and)Isopropyl Palmitate(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate(and)Propylparaben

Appearance Gel Gel

Gel Gel Gel

Gel

Other Ingredients Octyldodecanol, Propylene Carbonate Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride, Propylene Carbonate Isopropyl Myristate, Propylene Carbonate Isopropyl Palmitate, Propylene Carbonate Isododecane, Propylene Carbonate Lanolin Oil, Isopropyl Palmitate, Propylene Carbonate

144 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.14a, continued

Table 2.14a, continued RHEOX Organoclays 1b. Personal Care Mastergels, continued

BENTONE GEL 10ST BENTONE GEL SIL BENTONE GEL TN BENTONE GEL VS-5 BENTONE GEL VS-5PC

INCI Name Mineral Oil(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite (and)Propylene Carbonate Petroleum Distillates(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate Cyclomethicone(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Alcohol 40 C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate Cyclomethicone(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Alcohol 40 Cyclomethicone(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Appearance Gel Gel Gel Gel Gel Gel

Other Ingredients Mineral Oil, Propylene Carbonate Petroleum Distillates, Propylene Carbonate Cyclomethicone, Alcohol SDA 40 C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate, Propylene Carbonate Cyclomethicone, Alcohol SDA 40 Cyclomethicone, Propylene Carbonate

2. Industrial Grades Trade Name 

BENTONE 27 BENTONE 34 BENTONE 38

Organoclay Type Stearalkonium Hectorite

Appearance Powder

Comments High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended

Quaternium-18 Bentonite Quaternium-18 Hectorite

Powder Powder

High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 145

Trade Name BENTONE GEL MIO

Table 2.14b Southern Clay Products, Inc. Gonzales, TX, USA 1. Personal Care and Industrial Grades Type Q-18H

Appearance

Moisture, %

Light Cream Powder

2.0

High shear, polar activator recommended

SAB SAB Q-18/BAB n/a Q-18H

Light Cream Powder Light Cream Powder Light Cream Powder Cream Powder Powder

2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0

Easily dispersible, no activator needed High shear dispersion recommended High shear and a polar activator recommended High shear dispersion recommended For Silicone Oil Systems

Organoclay Trade Name 

Claytone 40 Claytone AF Claytone APA Claytone HT Claytone LMW Claytone SO

1

Comments

146 Rheology Modifier Handbook

14. Organoclays

Table 2.14b, continued Southern Clay Products Organoclays 2. Industrial Grades Trade Name Claytone 38H Claytone 2000 Claytone II Claytone ED

OMH OMM OB OMM

Appearance Off-white to Pink Powder Light Cream Powder Off-white Powder Powder

Moisture, % 4.0 2.0 n/a n/a

Claytone EM Claytone HY Claytone IMG-400 Claytone PS-3 Claytone TG

OMM n/a n/a OMM

Powder Light Cream Powder Powder Light Cream Powder Tan Powder

1.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.0

Comments High shear, polar activator recommended High shear, polar activator recommended Easily dispersible Easily dispersible, for low to medium polarity systems Very rapid dispersing Self-activating, easily dispersible

High shear and a polar activator recommended

Notes for Southern Clay Products data: 1

INCI Names: Q-18B = Quaternium-18 Bentonite, SAB = Stearalkonium Bentonite, Q-18/BAB = Quaternium-18/Benzalkonium Bentonite, BAB = Benzalkonium Bentonite 2

OMH = Organically Modified Hectorite, OB = Organophilic Bentonite, OMM = Organically Modified Montmorillonite.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 147

2

Organoclay

Table 2.14c Süd-Chemie Rheologicals München, Germany 1. Personal Care Grades a. Powder Form Trade Name TIXOGEL LG b. “Mastergels” Trade Name

Organoclay Type1 SAB

Appearance Lt. Cream Powder

TIXOGEL FTN TIXOGEL IDD-1168 TIXOGEL IHD-1235 TIXOGEL IPM TIXOGEL LAN

Organoclay Type1 SAB Q-18B Q-18B Q-18B Q-18B

Viscosity, mPas 1,500,000 2,400,000 3,500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000

Appearance

TIXOGEL MIO TIXOGEL OMS TIXOGEL TIO-1234

Q-18B Q-18B Q-18B

1,300,000 1,300,000 2,000,000

Green Gel Green Gel Green Gel Buff Gel Yellow-Green Gel Green Gel Green Gel White Gel

TIXOGEL VSP

Q-18B

2,000,000

Buff Gel

Particle Size, µm 90% <88

Moisture, % 3.0 max. Other Ingredients

C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate, Propylene Carbonate Isododecane, Propylene Carbonate Isododecane, Propylene Carbonate Cyclomethicone, Propylene Carbonate Lanolin Oil, IPP, Propylene Carbonate Odorless Mineral Spirits, Propylene Carbonate Odorless Mineral Spirits, Propylene Carbonate Cyclomethicone, Phenyl Trimethicone, Micronized TiO2, Propylene carbonate Cyclomethicone, Propylene Carbonate

148 Rheology Modifier Handbook

14. Organoclays

Table 2.14c, continued

Organoclay Type2 a. Conventional Organoclays TIXOGEL VP QABC TIXOGEL TE QAS TIXOGEL TP QABC TIXOGEL VZ QABC b. Self-Activating Organoclays TIXOGEL EZ 100 QABC TIXOGEL EZ 200 QABC

Appearance

Moisture, %

Lt. Cream Powder Lt. Cream Powder Lt. Cream Powder Lt. Cream Powder

2.5 max. 2.5 max. 1,5 max. 3.0 max.

Requires polar activator plus high shear Requires polar activator plus high shear Requires polar activator plus high shear Requires polar activator plus high shear

Lt. Buff Powder Lt. Buff Powder

2.5 max. 3.0 max.

Lt. Buff Powder

3.0 max.

Easily dispersible for low-medium polarity systems Easily dispersible for medium to high polarity systems Easily dispersible for low-medium polarity systems

Off-white Powder

3.0 max

Requires heat activation

Trade Name

TIXOGEL EPA QABC c. Heat-Activated Organoclay ADVITROL 8-10 COOCC

Comments

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 149

Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Organoclays 2. Industrial Grades

Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Organoclays 2. Industrial Grades d. Maximum Performance Organoclays Organoclay Trade Name Type2 TIXOGEL MP QABC TIXOGEL MP 100 QABC TIXOGEL MP 250 QABC

Appearance Lt. Cream Powder Lt. Buff Powder Lt. Buff Powder

Moisture, % 2.5 max 2.5 max. 2.5 max.

Comments Requires polar activator + high shear Self Activating, easily dispersible Self Activating, easily dispersible for medium to high polarity systems

Notes for Süd-Chemie Organoclays: 1 INCI Names; SAB = Stearalkonium Bentonite, Q-18B= Quaternium-18 Bentonite, 2 QAS = Quaternary Ammonium Smectite, QABC = Quaternary Ammonium Bentonite Complex, COOCC = Castor Oil/Organoclay Complex 3 Brookfield Model RV with Helipath Stand and TF Spindle at 2.5 rpm. 4 PC = Propylene Carbonate, IPP = Isopropyl Palmitate

150 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.14c, continued

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 151 15. Polyethylene Polyethylene is the most widely used plastic in the world today. Its chemical structure is: (-CH 2 - CH 2-) n

High molecular weigh versions of this ubiquitous polymer are very commonly found in film, extruded and molded products. But lower molecular weight Polyethylene is also used as a rheology modifier for organic solvent systems. Available product line variations include oxidized homopolymers, oxidized high density homopolymers and copolymers with Vinyl Acetate or Acrylic Acid. These products are available as powders, granules, prills and grease-like products. A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Personal Care 2. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Svstems 1 .Aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons 2. Organic esters 3. Oils, silicones

C. Ionic Charge n/a D.Compatibility/Stability Characteristics

Useful References “Performance Additives”, AlliedSignal Advanced Materials Technical Bulletin AS-506-Rl

Table 2.15 AlliedSignal, Inc. Morristown, NJ, USA 1. Personal Care Grades Density, Trade Name g/cc a. Micronized Polyethylene Wax  0.96 ACumist B-6 ACumist B-12 0.96 ACumist B-18 0.96 ACumist C-5 0.95 ACumist C-12 0.95 ACumist C-18 0.95 b. Oxidized Polyethylene ACumist A-12 0.99 ACumist A-18 0.99

Appearance

Acid No., mg KOH/g

Mettler Drop Point, 0 C2

Ave. Particle Size, µm

Micronized Powder

nil

126

6

Micronized Powder Micronized Powder Micronized Powder Micronized Powder Micronized Powder

nil nil nil nil nil

126 126 121 121 121

12 18 5 12 18

Micronized Powder Micronized Powder

26-40 26-40

137 137

12 18

152 Rheology Modifier Handbook

15. Polyethylene

Table 2.15, continued

1. Personal Care Grades, continued Trade Name

Density, g/cc

c. Ethylene/Acrylic Acid Copolymers  0.92 A-C 400 A-C 400A A-C 405(S) A-C 405(M) A-C 405(T) A-C 430 A-C 540 A-C 540A A-C 580

0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.94

Viscosity, mPas 1

Mettler Drop Point,

Appearance

13

Prills

595

92

13 11 8 6 26 40 40 75

Powder Prills Prills Prills Grease-like Prills Powder Prills

595 600 600 600 600 575 575 650

92 94 100 102 75 105 105 95

Vinyl Acetate, %

0

C2

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 153

AlliedSignal Polyethylene

AlliedSignal Polyethylene 2. Industrial Grades a. Ethylene Homopolymers Trade Name

Density, g/cc

Appearance

Viscosity, mPas 1

Acid No., mg KOH/g

A-C 6 A-C 6A A-C 7 A-C 7A A-C 8 A-C 8A A-C 9 A-C 9A A-C 9F A-C 15 A-C 16 A-C 617 A-C 617A A-C 715 A-C 725 A-C 735 A-C 1702

0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.88

Prills Powder Prills Powder Prills Powder Prills Powder Fine Powder Prills Prills Prills Powder Diced Diced Diced Grease-like

375 375 450 450 450 450 450 450 450 125 525 180 180 4,000 1,400 6,000 30

nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil

Mettler Drop Point, 0

C2 106 106 109 109 113 113 115 115 115 109 102 101 101 109 110 110 90

154 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.15, continued

Table 2.15, continued AlliedSignal Polyethylene 2. Industrial Grades Density, g/cc

Appearance

b. Oxidized Homopolymers A-C 629 0.93 Prills A-C 629A 0.93 Powder A-C 655 0.93 Prills A-C 656 0.92 Prills A-C 680 0.93 Prills A-C 6702 0.85 Grease-like c. High Density Oxidized Homopolymers A-C 307 0.98 Granular A-C 307A

0.98

Powder

A-C 316

0.98

Granular

A-C 316A

0.98

Powder

A-C 325 A-C 330

0.99 0.99

Granular Granular

A-C 392

0.99

Granular

A-C 395

1.00

Granular

A-C 395A

1.00

Powder

Viscosity, mPas 1

Acid No., mg KOH/g

Point, C2

200 200 210 185 250 35

15 15 16 15 16 15

101 101 107 98 108 88

3

5-9

140

3

5-9

85,000

85,000

Mettler Drop 0

4 4

3

16

140 140

3

16

140

3

25

136

3

30

137

3

30

138

3

41

137

3

41

137

8,500

8,500 4,400

3,600 4,500 2,500

2,500

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 155

Trade Name

AlliedSignal Polyethylene 2. Industrial Grades Trade Name

Density, g/cc

Appearance

d. Ethylene/Acrylic Acid Copolymers A-C 5120 0.94 Prills A-C 5180 0.96 Grease-like e. Micronized Polyethylene Wax ACumist A-6 0.99 Micronized Powder ACumist A-45 0.99 Micronized Powder ACumist B-9 0.96 Micronized Powder ACumist C-9 0.95 Micronized Powder ACumist C-30 0.95 Micronized Powder ACumist D-9 0.95 Micronized Powder Notes on AlliedSignal Polyethylene data: 1 Brookfield @ 140 0C 2 3 4

Per ASTM D-3954 Brookfield @ 150 0C Per ASTM D-3104

Viscosity, mPas 1

Acid No., mg KOH/g

Mettler Drop Point,

650 650

120 185

92 75

26-40 26-40 nil nil nil nil

137 137 126 121 121 118

6 45 9 9 30 9

0

C2

156 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.15, continued

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 157 16. Polyethylene Oxide Polyethylene Oxide polymers are produced by heterogeneous polymerization of ethylene oxide using any one of several metallic catalyst systems’. The chemical structure of these resins is:

The molecular weight of these polymers ranges from about 100,000 to several million. Although Polyethylene Oxide has the same chemical structure as Polyethylene Glycol, the latter polymers are produced by a different process, have molecular weights of 20,000 or less and are not normally considered to be rheology modifiers. A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Chlorinated Hydrocarbons

C. Ionic Charge Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Very shear sensitive in solution 2. Compatible with anionic, cationic and amphoteric species

Useful References 1. Braun, D.B. and DeLong, D.J., Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology, Third Edition, 18, pp616-632, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1982. 2. “RITA PEO”, R·I·T·A Corp. Technical Bulletin 3. “POLYOX® Water-soluble Resins”, Union Carbide Technical Bulletin P5-2655.

Table 2.16a R•I•T•A. Corp. Woodstock, IL USA 1. Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name Viscosity, mPas 1 PEO-1 NF 50-200 @ 5% 2. Personal Care and Industrial Grades PEO-2 200-2,500 @ 5% PEO-3 2,500-5,500 @ 5% PEO-8 20-70 @ 0.5% PEO-15 130-250 @ 0.5% PEO-18 240-430 @ 0.5% PEO-27 600-800 @ 0.5%

≈ Molecular Wt. 210,000

pH 6-8

Appearance White Powder

% Moisture <1.0

400,000 1,000,000 1,900,000 3,600,000 4,400,000 7,200,000

6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8

White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder White Powder

<1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0

Note for R•I•T•A. Polyethylene Oxide data: 1 At 250 C. (Contact supplier for other measurement parameters)

158 Rheology Modifier Handbook

16. Polyethylene Oxide

16. Polyethylene Oxide Table 2.16b Union Carbide Corp. Danbury, CT USA

~ Mol. Wt. Trade Name SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-10 NF SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-80L NF SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-80H NF SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-750 NF SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-3000 NF SENTRY POLYOX WSR-205 NF SENTRY POLYOX WSR-1105 NF SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-12K NF SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-60K NF SENTRY POLYOX WSR-301 NF SENTRY POLYOX WSR-Coagulant NF SENTRY POLYOX WSR-303 NF

Viscosity1, mPas 30-50 @ 5% 2 65-90 @ 5% 2 90-115 @ 5% 2 600-1,200 @ 5%3 2,250-4,500 @ 5% 4,500-8,800 @ 5% 8,800-17,600 @ 5% 400-800 @ 2% 3 2,000-4,000 @ 2% 3 1,500-4,500 @ 1% 4,500-7,500 @ 1% 7,500-10,000 @ 1%

100,000 200,000 200,000 300,000 400,000 600,000 900,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 4,000,000 5,000,000 7,000,000

pH 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10

Appearance Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder

Moisture, % <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 159

1. Pharmaceutical Grades

Union Carbide Polyethylene Oxide 2. Personal Care and Industrial Grades ~ Molecular Wt. Trade Name POLYOX WSRN-10 POLYOX WSRN-80 POLYOX WSRN-750 POLYOX WSRN-3000 POLYOX WSRN-3333 POLYOX WSR-205 POLYOX WSR-1105 POLYOX WSRN-12K POLYOX WSRN-60K POLYOX WSR-301 POLYOX WSR- Coagulant POLYOX WSR-303 POLYOX WSR-308

Viscosity1, mPas 10-50 @ 5% 2 65-115 @ 5% 2 600-1,200 @ 5% 3 2,250-4,500 @ 5% 2,250-3,350 @ 5% 4,500-8,800 @ 5% 8,800-17,600 @ 5% 400-800 @ 2% 3 2,000-4,000 @ 2% 3 1,650-5,500 @ 1% 5,500-7,500 @ 1% 7,500-10,000 @ 1% 10,000-15,000 @ 1%

100,000 200,000 300,000 400,000 400,000 600,000 900,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 4,000,000 5,000,000 n/a 7,000,000

Notes for Union Carbide Polyethylene Oxide data: 1 Brookfield Model RV @ 2rpm and 250C with appropriate spindle 2 Brookfield Model RV @ 50rpm and 250C with appropriate spindle 3 Brookfield Model RV @ 10rpm and 250C with appropriate spindle

pH 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10

Appearance Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder

Moisture, % <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0

160 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.16b, continued

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 161 17. Polyvinylpyrrolidone These rheology modifiers are produced by the polymerization of N-vinyl pyrrolidone to yield polymers with the chemical structure depicted below:

Figure 2.8 Structure of Polyvinylpyrrolidone (Reprinted from ISP Corp. Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2)

Commercial grades of Polyvinylpyrrolidone, a.k.a. PVP, are produced with average molecular weight ranging from 2,000 to about 3 million. They are supplied as free-flowing white powders or aqueous solutions. A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Alcohols 3. Glycerin & Glycols 4. Chlorinated Hydrocarbons

C. Ionic Charge Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Compatible with most anionic, cationic and amphoteric species 2. Can be cross-linked by strong alkali. 3. Solutions can turn yellow when heated.

162 Rheology Modifier Handbook Useful References: 1. “Soluble Polyvinylpyrrolidone for the Pharmaceutical Industry”. BASF Technical Bulletin ME 270e. 2. “Performance Enhancing Products for Personal Care”, International Specialty Products Product BulletinP PC01-1297USA. 3. “Performance-Enhancing Products for Industrial Markets”, International Specialty Products Product Bulletin 2302-300.

Table 2.17a BASF Aktiengesellschaft Ludwigshafen, Germany, Mount Olive, NJ, USA 1. Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name Kollidon 12PF Kollidon 17PF Kollidon 25 Kollidon 30 Kollidon 90F

K-Value @ 1%, cstk.1 10.2-13.82 15.3-18.02 22.5-26.7 27.0-32.1 81.0-96.3

Molecular Weight 2,000-3,000 7,000-11,000 28,000-34,000 44,000-54,000 1,000,000-1,500,000

Appearance Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder

pH, 5% Soln. 3.0-5.0 3.0-5.0 3.0-5.0 3.0-5.0 4.0-7.0

Moisture, % = 5.0 = 5.0 = 5.0 = 5.0 = 5.0

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 163

17. Polyvinylpyrrolidone

BASF Polyvinylpyrrolidone 2. Industrial Grades Trade Name Luviskol K17 Luviskol K30 Luviskol K80 Luviskol K90 Luviskol K30 Solution Luviskol K60 Solution Luviskol K85 Solution Luviskol K90 Solution Luviskol K115 Solution

K-Value @ 1%, cstk.1 15.0-19.02 27.0-33.0 74.0-82.0 88.0-96.0 27.0-33.0 52.0-62.0 83.0-88.0 90.0-98.0 110.0-130.0

Solids Content, % 95.0-100.0 95.0-100.0 95.0-100.0 95.0-100.0 29.0-31.0 44.0-46.0 19.0-21.0 19.0-21.0 10.5-11.5

Appearance Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder Yellow Solution Yellow Solution Yellow Solution Yellow Solution Yellow Solution

pH, 5% Soln. 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 5.0-8.0 5.0-9.0 7.0-9.0 7.0-9.0 7.0-9.0 7.0-9.0 7.0-9.0

Notes for BASF Polyvinylpyrrolidone data: 1 2

K-Values are derived from relative viscosity measurements and are calculated according to Fikentscher’s equation. 5% aqueous solution.

164 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.17a, continued

17. Polyvinylpyrrolidone Table 2.17b International Specialty Products Wayne, NJ, USA

K-Value @ 1%, Trade Name cstk.1  PLASDONE C-15 16-182 PLASDONE C-30 29-32 PLASDONE K-25 24-26 PLASDONE K-29 29-32 PLASDONE K-32 29-32 PLASDONE K-90 85-95 PLASDONE K-90D 85-95 PLASDONE K-90M 85-95 2. Personal Care Grades POVIDERM SK3 28-34 PVP K-15 13-192 PVP K-30 26-35 PVP K-60 50-62 PVP K-90 80-100 PVP K-120 114-130

~Molecular Weight 8,000 58,000 34,000 58,000 58,000 1,300,000 1,300,000 1,300,000

Appearance White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder

pH, 5% Soln. 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0

Moisture, % 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max. 5.0 max.

n/a 6,000-15,000 40,000-80,000 240,000-450,000 900,000-1,500,000 2,000,000-3,000,000

White Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder

3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0 3.0-7.0

5.0 max. 5.0 max 5.0 max 5.0 max 5.0 max 5.0 max

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 165

1. Pharmaceutical Grades

International Specialty Products Polyvinylpyrrolidone 3. Industrial Grades Trade Name PVP K-15 PVP K-15 PVP K-30 PVP K-30 PVP K-60 PVP K-90 PVP K-90 PVP K-120 PVP K-120

K-Value @ 1% cstk.1 13-192 13-192 27-33 27-33 50-62 88-92 90-100 110-130 108-130

Viscosity @ 5% mPas.3 n/a 1 n/a 3 10 n/a 150 n/a 350

Appearance Yellow Aqueous Soln. White - Cream Powder Yellow Aqueous Soln. White - Cream Powder White - Cream Powder Yellow Aqueous Soln. White - Cream Powder Yellow Aqueous Soln. White - Cream Powder

pH, 5% Soln. 6-9 3-7 6-9 3-7 3-7 4-9 3-7 6-9 4-8

Actives, % 28-32 95 min. 29-31 95 min. 95 min. 20-24 95 min. 11-13 95 min.

Notes for International Specialty Products Polyvinylpyrrolidone data: 1 K-Values are derived from relative viscosity measurements and are calculated according to Fikentscher’s equation. 2 5% aqueous solution. 3 Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm and 250 C and appropriate spindle.

166 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.17b, continued

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 167 18. Silica Silica, the most abundant mineral on the earth’s surface, occurs in nature in both crystalline form and amorphous form. The most common crystalline form of silica is the mineral quartz and diatomaceous earth is an example of the amorphous form of silica. It is more formally known as silicon dioxide:

SiO 2 This section focuses on synthetically produced silicas useful as rheology modifiers. The first type of synthetic silica is referred to as fumed silica. This is an amorphous form produced by high temperature, vapor phase hydrolysis of silicon tetrachloride in a mixed oxygen/hydrogen flame. The resulting particles of silica are of extremely small size and have very large surface area per gram. Because of the particle characteristics and the ability to form a three-dimensional network in liquid systems, they can be effectively used to modify the rheology of compositions in which they are used. The unique particle characteristics of fumed silica also accounts for the very low bulk density of these products. Some grades are therefore “densed” or compressed to increase the bulk density to facilitate packaging, shipping and use in certain applications. Precipitated silica, a second type of synthetic silica, is also amorphous and of very fine particle size and large surface area. It is produced by reaction of an alkaline silicate, preferably sodium silicate, with a mineral acid, usually sulfuric acid. The silicon dioxide precipitate thus formed is filtered, dried, milled and classified by particle size. Some grades are also available in granular form. Since it is a mineral, silica is insoluble in water and organic solvents. But the fine particle size of these grades of silica permits them to be dispersed in these solvents to produce desirable rheological effects. Although both fumed and precipitated silica are hydrophilic as produced, it is sometimes desirable in certain systems to use a hydrophobic grade of synthetic silica. These types of products are produced by reacting the numerous silanol (SiOH) groups on the surface of the silica particles

168 Rheology Modifier Handbook with appropriate organic hydrophobes. Chlorosilanes are a common choice although there are a myriad of other possibilities. Although silica is approved as a direct food additive for human consumption, its primary function in those applications is to improve the flow and anti-caking characteristics of powdered food products. C. Ionic Charge

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional

n/a

B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Most Organic Liquids 3. Silicones

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Effectiveness increases with degree of dispersion 2. Excellent viscosity/temperature stability

Useful References: 1. “Cab-0-Sil® Untreated Fumed Silica Properties and Functions”, Cabot Corp. Technical Bulletin CGEN-8A. 2 . “Basic Characteristics of AEROSIL® ,Number ll”, Degussa AG Technical Bulletin 11-10-l-596DD. 3 . “Fumed Silica”, Degussa AC Technical Bulletin 6-50-1-694H.

18. Silica A. Fumed Silica

1. Pharmaceutical Grades (Untreated) Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1  CAB-O-SIL M-5 200 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL M-5P 200 ± 15 CAB-O-SIL PTG 200 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL HS-5 325 ± 25 2a. Personal Care Grades (Untreated) CAB-O-SIL M-5 200 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL H-5 300 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL HS-5 325 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL EH-5 380 ± 30 2b. Personal Care Grades (Surface-Treated) Trade Name Surface Treatment CAB-O-SIL TS-720 Dimethylsiloxane CAB-O-SIL TS-610 Dimethydichlorosilane CAB-O-SIL TS-530 Hexamethyldisilazane

Ave. Particle Size, nm 14 14 14 7

pH @ 4% 3.7-4.3 3.8-4.2 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3

Moisture, % <1.5 <1.0 <1.5 <1.5

14 7 7 7

3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3

<1.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5

Surface Area, m2/gm1 100 ± 20 120 ± 20 212 ± 28

Ave. Particle Size, nm n/a n/a n/a

pH @ 4% n/a n/a n/a

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 169

Table 2.18a Cabot Corp. Tuscola, IL, USA

Cabot Fumed Silica 3a. Industrial Grades (Untreated) Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 CAB-O-SIL L-90 90 ± 10 CAB-O-SIL LM-130 130 ± 15 CAB-O-SIL LM-150 160 ± 15 CAB-O-SIL LM-150D2 160 ± 15 CAB-O-SIL M-5 200 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL M-7D2 200 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL MS-55 255 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL MS-75D2 255 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL H-5 300 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL HS-5 325 ± 25 CAB-O-SIL EH-5 380 ± 30 3b. Industrial Grades (Surface-Treated) Trade Name Surface Treatment CAB-O-SIL TS-720 Dimethylsiloxane CAB-O-SIL TS-610 Dimethydichlorosilane CAB-O-SIL TS-530 Hexamethyldisilazane CAB-O-SIL TS-500 n/a Notes for Cabot Fumed Silica: 1 BET method , 2 “Densed” (compressed) Grade

Ave. Particle Size, nm 20 16 n/a n/a 14 14 n/a n/a 7 7 7

pH @ 4% 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3 3.7-4.3

Moisture, % <0.5 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5

Surface Area, m2/gm1 100 ± 20 120 ± 20 212 ± 28 212 ± 28

Ave. Particle Size, nm n/a 4.0-5.0 4.5-6.5 9.50-11

pH @ 4% <0.6 <0.5 n/a n/a

170 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.18a, continued

18. Silica A. Fumed Silica

1. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades (Untreated) Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 AEROSIL 200 200 ± 25 AEROSIL 380 380 ± 30 2. Personal Care Grades ( Surface Treated) Trade Name Surface Treatment AEROSIL R812 Trimethylsilyl AEROSIL R972 Dimethylsilyl 3. Industrial Grades a. Standard Hydrophilic (Untreated) Grades Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 AEROSIL 90 90 ± 15 AEROSIL 130 130 ± 25 AEROSIL 150 150 ± 15 AEROSIL 200 200 ± 25 AEROSIL 300 300 ± 30 AEROSIL 380 380 ± 30

Ave. Particle Size, nm 12 7

pH @ 4% 3.6-4.3 3.6-4.3

Moisture, % <1.5 <1.5

Surface Area, m2/gm1 260 ± 30 110 ± 20

Ave. Particle Size, nm 7 16

pH @ 4% 5.5-8.52 3..6-5.02

Ave. Particle Size, nm 20 16 14 12 7 7

pH @ 4% 3.6-4.3 3.6-4.3 3.6-4.3 3.6-4.3 3.6-4.3 3.6-4.3

Moisture, % <1 <1.5 <0.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 171

Table 2.18b Degussa AG Frankfurt am Main, Germany

Degussa Fumed Silica 3. Industrial Grades b. Special Hydrophilic (Untreated) Grades Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 AEROSIL OX50 50 ± 15 AEROSIL TT600 200 ± 50 AEROSIL MOX803 80 ± 20 AEROSIL MOX1703 170 ± 30 AEROSIL COK844 170 ± 30 c. Hydrophobic (Surface Treated) Grades Trade Name Surface Treatment AEROSIL R202 AEROSIL R805 AEROSIL R812 AEROSIL R972 AEROSIL R974

Dimethylsiloxane Octyl Trimethylsilyl Dimethylsilyl Dimethylsilyl

Ave. Particle Size, nm 40 40 30 15 n/a

pH @ 4% 3.8-4.5 3.6-4.5 3.6-4.5 3.6-4.5 3.6-4.3

Moisture, % <1.5 <2.5 <1.5 <1.5 <1.5

Surface Area, m2/gm1

Ave. Particle Size, nm 14 12 7 16 12

pH @ 4%

90 ± 20 150 ± 25 260 ± 30 110 ± 20 170 ± 20

Notes for Degussa Fumed Silica: 1 BET method. 2 Measured in 50:50,Water:Methanol. 3 “Co-fumed” Silicon Dioxide with a minor amount ot Aluminum Oxide. 4 A 5:1 Mixture of Fumed Silica and Fumed Aluminum Oxide

4-62 3.5-5.52 5.5-8.52 3.6-5.02 3.4-5.02

172 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.18b, continued

18. Silica B. Precipitated Silica

Pharmaceutical & Personal Care Grade (Untreated) Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1  SIDENT 22S 190 Industrial Grades (Untreated) SIPERNAT 22S 190 SIPERNAT 22LS 190 FK 500 LS 475 Industrial Grade (Surface-Treated) Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 SIPERNAT D11 90 Notes for Degussa Precipitated Silica: BET method

1

Ave. Particle Size, µm <10

pH @ 5% 5.5-7.5

Moisture, % <=7

5 3 4

6.2 6.2 6.7

5.5 5.5 2.5

Ave. Particle Size, µm 3

pH @ 5% 10.0

Moisture, % 3.0

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 173

Table 2.18c Degussa AG Frankfurt am Main, Germany

174 Rheology Modifier Handbook 19. Water-swellable Clay These rheology modifiers, as their name suggests, are mineral-based, the third of three such types of additives included in this handbook (the others being Silica and Organoclays). Most are produced from clay minerals of the smectite group of clays, principally hectorite and bentonite. Following mining and grinding of the crude clay ore, extensive beneficiation processes are used to remove undesirable components yielding high purity smectite clay. But also included in this section are unique water-swellable clays called Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate. These are synthetic hectorite minerals that closely resemble natural hectorite in both structure and composition. They are layered hydrous magnesium silicates that are free of natural clay impurities and are synthesized under controlled conditions2. They produce clear, thickened fluids and gels, unlike the natural water-swellable clays which produce opaque aqueous dispersions. When dispersed in water (not dissolved, for they are not soluble in water), the clay particles do swell (hence the name) and, if exposed to sufficient shear forces during mixing, separate into individual clay platelets. Because these platelets have negatively-charged faces and edges with a small positive charge, the edges of one platelet are attracted to the faces of another platelet and they develop a three-dimensional, “house-of-cards” colloidal structure. This colloidal structure provides thickening and other desirable rheological effects.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 175

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Systems 1. Water 2. Mixtures of water and minor amounts of water-miscible organic solvents

C. Ionic Charge Anionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Effectiveness increases with amount of shear applied during dispersion 2. Excellent viscosity/temperature stability 3. Most grades sensitive to dissolved electrolytes 4. Not recommended for systems containing cationic species

Useful References 1. “Rheological Additives for Waterborne Systems”, RHEOX, Inc. Technical Bulletin PB 192. 2 . “LAPONITE® Properties and Applications”, Southern Clay Products/Laporte Absorbents Technical Bulletin TB-3. 3 . “Rheological Additives Handbook”, Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Technical Bulletin. 4 . “VEEGUM®/VANGEL® From the Earth... A Natural Ingredient for Cosmetics, Pharmaceuticals and Household Products”, R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. Technical Bulletin VAS 1462.

Table 2.19a Laporte Absorbents Cheshire, UK 1. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades Trade Name LAPONITE D LAPONITE DF LAPONITE XLG LAPONITE XLS LAPONITE RD LAPONITE RDS

Mineral Type Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate

Appearance White Powder

pH @ 2% n/a

Moisture, % n/a

White Powder

n/a

n/a

White Powder

n/a

n/a

White Powder

n/a

n/a

White Powder

9.8

10

White Powder

9.7

10

Features Dentifrice grade Dentifrice grade, stabilized against fluoride absorption High clarity Sol grade of XLG, improved electrolyte tolerance Standard grade Sol grade of RD, improved electrolyte tolerance

176 Rheology Modifier Handbook

19. Water-swellable Clay

19. Water-swellable Clay

1. Personal Care Grades Trade Name INCI Name BENTONE EW Hectorite BENTONE LT1 Hectorite(and)Hydroxyethylcellulose BENTONE MA Hectorite 2. Industrial Grades Trade Name Mineral Type BENTONE AD Hectorite BENTONE CT Hectorite BENTONE EW Hectorite BENTONE HC Hectorite BENTONE LT1 Hectorite BENTONE MA Hectorite Note for RHEOX Water-swellable Clay: 1. Blend of Hectorite Clay and Hydroxyethylcellulose

Viscosity, mPas n/a n/a n/a

Appearance Powder Powder Powder

Viscosity, mPas n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Appearance Powder Powder Powder Powder Powder Powder

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 177

Table 2.19b RHEOX, Inc. Hightstown, NJ, USA

Table 2.19c Southern Clay Products, Inc. Gonzales, TX, USA 1. Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name Bentolite NF

Mineral Type Bentonite

Viscosity mPas 2 n/a

Appearance Fine Powder

n/a

Moisture, % 5-8

Gelwhite H NF

Montmorillonite

1,950 @ 5%

Fine Powder

9.5

8

2,500 @ 5% 525 @ 10% 275 @ 10% 2

Fine Powder Fine Powder Fine Powder

10.0 9.0 n/a

8 10 n/a

General purpose grade Lower viscosity grade Low viscosity grade

700 @ 5% 2

Fine Powder

n/a

n/a

High viscosity grade

1900 @ 5%

Off-white Powder Fine Powder Fine Powder

10.5

6

9.5 7.5

10 max. 10 max.

2. Personal Care Grades Gelwhite GP Montmorillonite Gelwhite L Montmorillonite Gelwhite MAS-L Magnesium Aluminum Silicate Gelwhite MAS-H Magnesium Aluminum Silicate 3. Industrial Grades Bentolite D Bentonite Bentolite H Bentolite L

Bentonite Bentonite

n/a n/a

pH

Features Meets NF requirements Meets NF requirements

For paints and coatings Neutral pH

178 Rheology Modifier Handbook

19. Water-swellable Clay

Table 2.19c, continued Southern Clay Products Water-swellable Clay Trade Name

Viscosity mPas 1 n/a

Bentolite L-10

Mineral Type Magnesium Aluminum Silicate Bentonite

Bentolite WH Mineral Colloid BP

Bentonite Montmorillonite

n/a 750 @ 5% 3

Mineral Colloid MO

Montmorillonite

2,000 @ 3% 3

Bentolite L-3

n/a

Notes for Southern Clay Products Water-swellable Clay data: 1 Brookfield Model RV at 20rpm with appropriate spindle 2 Brookfield Model LV at 60rpm with appropriate spindle 3 Brookfield Model RV at 50rpm with appropriate spindle

Appearance

pH

Off-white powder Off-white powder Fine Powder Off-white Powder Off-white Powder

7.5

Moisture, % 10

Comments

7.5

8

n/a 9.0

n/a 10

Low viscosity grade

9.0

10

High viscosity grade

For refractory mixes Low viscosity for coating applications

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 179

3. Industrial Grades

Table 2.19d Süd-Chemie Rheologicals München, Germany, 1. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades Trade Name OPTIGEL CF OPTIGEL CG OPTIGEL CK OPTIGEL CL OPTIGEL SH

Mineral Type Activated Smectite Activated Smectite Activated Smectite Activated Smectite SMS1

2.Personal Care Grade “Mastergel” OPTIGEL GWXBentonite 1285B

Viscosity, mPas 2 n/a

pH 9-11

Appearance Pink Powder

n/a

9-11

Green Powder Off-white Powder White Powder White Powder

3,100 @ 4% 9-11 10,000 @ 2%

n/a

50, 000 as received3

n/a

Light Gray Gel

Moisture, % 9 max. 10 10 9 max.

Features Stable against electrolytes Most effective in neutral alkaline systems High brightness, easy to disperse Excellent brightness

12

Synthetic Hectorite, Produces Clear Gels

n/a

Also contains water, Xanthan Gum and preservatives

180 Rheology Modifier Handbook

19. Water-swellable Clay

Table 2.19d, continued

Trade Name OPTIGEL WA OPTIGEL WM OPTIGEL WX OPTIFLO  L100 OPTIFLO H400 OPTIFLO H500

Mineral Type1 OAMB OMAB

Viscosity, mPas 2 8,200 @ 2%

OMAB

2,900 @ 2% 2,500-2,800 2,500-3,500 3,500-4,500

n/a n/a

pH

Appearance

7 n/a

White Powder Light Cream Powder n/a n/a n/a n/a

n/a n/a n/a n/a

Moisture, % 10 9 10 n/a n/a n/a

Comments General Purpose Industrial Grade For Systems with little or no binder Stable against electrolytes

Note for Süd-Chemie Water-swellable Clay data: 1 OMAB = Organically Modified Activated Bentonite, SMS = Synthetic Magnesium Silicate, 2 Brookfield Model RV with Helipath stand, TF spindle at 2 rpm.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 181

Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Water-swellable Clay 3. Industrial Grades

Table 2.19e R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. Norwalk, CT, USA 1. Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name VEEGUM

Mineral Type MAS2 Type IA

MAS2 Type IB Purified Bentonite VEEGUM HV MAS2 Type IC VEEGUM K MAS2 Type IIA 2. Personal Care Grades VEEGUM F VEEGUM HS

Viscosity, mPas 1 225-600 @ 5%

Al/Mg Ratio 0.5-1.2

pH @ 5% 9.0-10-0

150-450 @ 5% 40-200 @ 5%

0.5-1.2 3.5-5.5

9.0-10.0 9.0-10.0

800-2200 @ 5% 100-300 @ 5%

0.5-1.2 1.4-2.8

9.0-10.0 9.0-10.0

Features purpose pharmaceutical

General grade Fine ground grade of VEEGUM Greater stability in presence of electrolytes High viscosity grade For acidic systems

Trade Name VEEGUM D VEEGUM PLUS4 VEEGUM PRO

INCI Name3 MAS MAS TMAS

Viscosity, mPas 1 100-300 @ 5% 350-750 @ 3% 300-500 @ 1.5%

Appearance Off-white Flakes White Powder Tan Flakes

pH @ 5% 9.0 9.0-10.0 8.0-9.0

VEEGUM Ultra

MAS

225-450 @ 5%

White Powder

3.7-4.7

Features For dentifrice applications High viscosity grade Highest viscosity cosmetic grade Easily dispersible, bright white

182 Rheology Modifier Handbook

19. Water-swellable Clay

Table 2.19e, continued R.T. Vanderbilt Water-swellable Clay 3. Industrial Grades Viscosity, mPas 1 600±300 @ 4%

Appearance Off-white Flakes

pH 8.5-9.5 @ 4%

150-350 @ 6% 40-200 @ 5%

Off-white Flakes Off-white Flakes

9.0 8.5-9.5 @ 5%

VAN GEL O

MAS3 Purified Bentonite MAS

200-450 @ 8%

Off-white Flakes

9.0

VEEGUM CER5 VEEGUM T

Hectorite Hectorite

75-175 @ 1% 220-800 @ 4%

Tan Powder Tan Flakes

9.5-10.5 9.0-10.0

VAN GEL C VAN GEL ES

Features General purpose industrial grade For very high pH systems Greater stability in presence of electrolytes For systems containing oxidizing agents For ceramic applications General purpose industrial grade

Notes for R.T. Vanderbilt Water-Swellable Clay data: 1 Measured on an aqueous dispersion at the solids content indicated using a Brookfield Model LV at 60rpm and 250 C with appropriate spindle 6 minute reading. 2 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate conforming to USP/ National Formulary monograph requirements. 3 MAS = Magnesium Aluminum Silicate, TMAS = Tromethamine Magnesium Aluminum Silicate. 4 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate/Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium blend. 5 Hectorite/Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium blend.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 183

Mineral Type MAS3

Trade Name VAN GEL B

184 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Xanthan Gum Xanthan gum is described chemically as an exocellular heteropolysaccharide. The chemical structure of Xanthan gum is depicted in the figure below:

M+=Na, KorCa

Figure 2.9 Structure of Xanthan Gum (Reprinted from Monsanto-Kelco Company Technical Bulletin. Ref. 2)

The molecular weight of the gum is reported to be approximately 2x106 and the molecular conformation is described as helical with the trisaccharide side chains aligned with the backbone. An aerobic fermentation process using the bacterium Xanthomonous Campestris produces the gum The production process involves a multistep inoculation preparation followed by fermentation, pasteurization, precipitation by an alcohol, drying, milling and packaging.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 185

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care 4. Household/Institutional B. Recommended Solvent Systems Water

C. Ionic Charge Anionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. Excellent viscosity/temperature stability 2. Susceptible to gelation by polyvalent cations 3. Not recommended for systems containing cationic species

Useful References: 1. “Jungbunzlauer Xanthan”, Jungbunzlauer AG Technical Bulletin. 2. “Xanthan Gum Natural Biogum for Scientific Water Control”, Fifth Edition, Monsanto-Kelco Co. Technical Bulletin. 3. “Guide to Hydrocolloid Products”, Rhodia, Inc. Technical Bulletin.

Table 2.20a Jungbunzlauer, Inc. Vienna, Austria 1. Food, Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades Trade Name J.X.G. FNA J.X.G. FFA J.X.G. FGA J.X.G. FNB J.X.G. FFB J.X.G. FNAC J.X.G. FGAC J.X.G. FNS J.X.G. FNAS J.X.G. FFST J.X.G. FNP J.X.G. FED J.X.G. FNFD J.X.G. FDF J.X.G. FCS

Viscosity, mPas.1 1,550-1,700 1,550-1,700 1,550-1,700 1,400-1,550 1,400-1,550 1,550-1,700 1,550-1,700 >1900 1,700-1,850 1,400-1,550 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,300-1,700

Mesh Size 80 200 45 80 200 80 45 80 80 200 80 n/a 80 200 200

% Moisture <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13

Features High viscosity standard grade High viscosity standard grade High viscosity standard grade Low viscosity standard grade Low viscosity standard grade Better stability at low pH and with salts Better stability at low pH and with salts For low salt systems 50:50 blend of XNA & XNS Salt tolerant grade Smooth flow characteristics Agglomerated grade “Dust free”, treated with 1% edible oil “Dust free”, treated with 1% edible oil Forms clear solutions

186 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Xanthan Gum

Table 2.20a, continued

Trade Name J.X.G. TNAC J.X.G.TGAC J.X.G. TNS J.X.G. TGE J.X.G. TGD

Viscosity, mPas.1 1,550-1,700 1,550-1,700 >1900 1,200-1,600 n/a

Mesh Size 80 45 80 45 45

% Moisture <13 <13 <13 <13 <13

Features Better stability at low pH and with salts Better stability at low pH and with salts For low salt systems Easily dispersible Easily dispersible (not sold in USA)

Note for Jungbunzlauer Xanthan Gum data: 1 1% in 1% KCl Solution, Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm. and 250 C with appropriate spindle.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 187

Jungbunzlauer Xanthan Gum 2. Industrial Grades

Table 2.20b Monsanto-Kelco Co. San Diego, CA, USA 1. Food, Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades Trade Name Viscosity, mPas.1  KELTROL 1,400 KELTROL F 1,400 KELTROL T 1,400 KELTROL TF 1,400 KELTROL BT 1,400 KELTROL GM 1,400 KELTROL SF 1,050 KELTROL RD 1,400 KELTROL RHD 1,400 KELTROL HP 1,500 a. Xanthan Gum Blends GFS Gel @ 1% KELGUM Gel @ 1% DRICOID 200 600 DRICOID 280 400 KOB87 2700

pH2 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0

Mesh Size 80 200 80 200 80 42 80 14 28 80

% Moisture 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

60 60 14 14 100

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Features Standard grade Fine powder Produces clear solutions Fine powder, produces clear solutions Brine tolerant Agglomerated grade Smooth flow characteristics Easily Dispersible Easily Dispersible

188 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Xanthan Gum

Table 2.20b, continued

Trade Name KELZAN KELZAN AR KELZAN D KELZAN S KELZAN T KELFLO

Viscosity, mPas.1 1,400 n/a n/a 1,400 1,400 n/a

pH2 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0

Mesh Size 40 n/a n/a 40 40 n/a

% Moisture 12 12 12 12 12 12

Features Standard Grade Altered rheology & alkali stability Cellulase enzyme free Easily dispersible Produces clear solutions For liquid animal feed supplements

Notes for Monsanto-Kelco Xanthan Gum data: 1 1% in 1% KCl Solution, Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm and 250 C with appropriate spindle 2 1.0% Solution in distilled water.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 189

Monsanto-Kelco Xanthan Gum 2. Industrial Grades

Table 2.20c Rhodia, Inc. Courbevoie, France, Cranbury, NJ USA 1. Food & Pharmaceutical Grades Trade Name RHODIGEL RHODIGEL 200 RHODIGEL Clear RHODIGEL EZ RHODIGEL Supra RHODIGEL Ultra RHODIGUM  WV-H RHODIGUM WV-M RHODIGUM OE-H RHODIGUM OE-M RHODIGUM WG-H RHODIGUM WG-M RHODIGUM WG-L

Viscosity, mPas.1 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 14,000 7,500 3,000 3,900 145-1702 100-1252 35-552

pH3 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 5.5-7.0 5.5-7.0 5.5-7.0 5.5-7.0 5.5-7.0 5.5-7.0 5.5-7.0

Mesh Size 95% min. -80 92% min. -200 92% min. -200 90% min. -30 95% min. -14 95% min. -80 85% min. -200 85% min. -200 45% min. -200 55% min. -200 30% max.. -200 25% max. -200 20% max.. -200

Moisture, % 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 14 max. 14 max. 14 max. 14 max. 14 max. 14 max. 14 max.

Features Standard Grade Fine powder Produces clear solutions Easily dispersible Very coarse grade Unusual viscosity characteristics Xanthan/Guar Blend Xanthan/Guar Blend Xanthan/Guar Blend Xanthan/Guar Blend Xanthan/Locust Bean Blend Xanthan/Locust Bean Blend Xanthan/Locust Bean Blend

190 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Xanthan Gum

Table 2.20c, continued

2. Personal Care Grades Trade Name RHODICARE H RHODICARE S RHODICARE T RHODICARE XC

Viscosity, mPas.1 1,200-1,800 1,200-1,800 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600

pH3

Mesh Size

6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0

1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600 1,200-1,600

6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0 6.0-8.0

200 80 95% min. -80 95% min. -80

Moisture, % 13 max. 13 max. 6-14 6-12

Features Fast hydration grade Standard cosmetic grade Produces clear solutions Lower microbial content

98% min. -50 98% min. -50 98% min. -50 98% min. -50 98% min. -50

12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

Standard Grade Cationic tolerant Easily dispersible Fast hydration Produces clear solutions

3. Industrial Grades RHODOPOL 23 RHODOPOL 50MC RHODOPOL 50MD RHODOPOL G RHODOPOL T

Notes for Rhodia Xanthan Gum data: 1 1.0% in 1% KCl Solution, Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm. and 250 C with appropriate spindle 2 Gel strength in grams using Texture Technologies TA-XT2 3 1.0% Solution in distilled water,

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 191

Rhodia Xanthan Gum

Selecting the Best Candidates 193

Part 3 Selecting the Best Candidates for the Application

Page Introduction

194

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

199

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

213

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications

222

Rheology Modifiers for Household/Institutional Applications

242

194 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Introduction Part 2 of this handbook lists about 750 commercially available rheology modifiers. With so many choices, the task of selecting the best candidates for the intended application might seem formidable. But the manufacturers of these products have greatly simplified the task by providing considerable guidance in the selection process. Their technical literature usually contains recommendations for the appropriate application of their products. References to this technical literature are contained in the introduction to each section of Part 2. Tables in this Part summarize these supplier’s recommendations and were developed, in most cases, with the assistance of supplier’s technical personnel. The tables are arranged by industry, i.e. Food, Pharmaceutical, Personal Care or Household/Institutional. The term Household/Institutional encompasses such products as dish and fabric detergents, hand soaps, hard-surface cleaners, auto and furniture polishes, etc. Each table consists of two columns. The left column lists specific consumer product types within the given industry category. The right column is headed by the name of a specific chemical type of rheology modifier. Below this, are listed the supplier’s product recommendations. These are the specific grades of their rheology modifiers they recommend for use in the indicated type of consumer product. Note that all tables do not have the same types of products listed because only those for which there is a recommended rheology modifier are included in any given table. Having identified the trade name rheology modifier(s) recommended for the intended application, more information about them can be found in the pertinent section of Part 2. A cross-reference to the appropriate table in Part 2 is included in the heading of the right column. There may also be a supplier-developed starting formulation(s) in Part 4, although it was not possible to include starting formulations for every type of consumer product containing every rheology modifier recommended.

Selecting the Best Candidates 195 At this point, direct contact with the supplier(s) of the rheology modifier(s) candidates is strongly recommended. Appendix C provides contact information. Such contact can provide additional important information such as the availability and selling price of the product, information on new and improved products that might be even more suitable for the application and supplier-developed starting formulations for the desired product. Another approach to selecting the best candidates, particularly in cases where the intended application is not included in the Part 3 tables, is to consider the following important parameters when attempting to select the best rheology modifier candidates for the application: 1. Type of Application In many countries, the federal government regulates the ingredients used in food and pharmaceutical products. In the United States, the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), an agency of the U.S. Government regulates food and pharmaceutical ingredients including rheology modifiers and determines which additive are acceptable for human consumption. Similar regulations exist in other nations. The FDA regulations relating to rheology modifier use in foods are published in the Code of Federal Regulations, (Latest Revision) Title 21, § 172, 182 and 184. In some cases, the regulations may also include reference to two other important compendia, The Food Chemicals Codex and the United States Pharmacopoeia/National Formulary. These two publications contain monographs that are, in effect, specifications for the properties of rheology modifiers used as direct food and pharmaceutical additives. Handbook users involved with the use of rheology modifiers in food or pharmaceutical applications should be intimately familiar with the pertinent sections of local regulations and will want to select candidates that conform to these regulatory requirements. Excipients in personal care products are not normally regulated but manufacturers of personal care products usually decide that the products they use in these consumer products should meet the same stringent requirements as food or pharmaceutical grade products with respect to microbial, pathogen and heavy metal content.

196 Rheology Modifier Handbook The ingredients in household and institutional products are essentially unregulated. Any of the 20 types of rheology modifiers could conceivably be used in these products. But other considerations come into play here not the least of which are cost effectiveness, compatibility and stability in the system. 2. The Liquid Phase The second parameter that should be considered is the nature of the liquid phase of the composition. The most common liquid phase is, of course, water. But other possible liquid phases include mixtures of water and minor amounts of water-miscible polar organic solvents such as alcohols, glycols and glycol ethers or polar solvents such as alcohols, glycols and glycol ethers alone, or non-polar solvents such as low molecular weight aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons, organic esters and silicon fluids. The rheology modifier selected should be recommended for the intended liquid phase by the supplier. 3. Other Application Parameters Does the intended application require a rheology modifier that produces a clear product? Many, but not all, of the products listed herein can yield clear compositions. In some cases, suppliers have developed special “clear” grades of their products to answer this need. It is frequently necessary to consider also other ingredients in the intended formulation that might influence the performance of the rheology modifier. Common ingredients that sometimes affect rheology modifier performance are strong acids (pH of system >3), strong bases (pH of system <11), strong oxidizing agents, dissolved electrolytes and organic cationic species such as quaternary ammonium compounds. Considering these three parameters, Figure 3.1, Selection Worksheet, is presented as an aid to rheology modifier selection. The leftcolumn of the chart lists the 20 types of rheology modifiers. To the right are columns headed by the performance parameters listed above. One suggested way to use this worksheet is to highlight the columns that are pertinent to the application. Then, using a straight edge horizontally across the page, identify those rheology modifiers that will satisfy all the desired performance requirements.

Table 3.1a Selection Worksheet

Ó Ó Ó Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó ˜

Ó

˜

Ó

Cationics Present

Ó

Dissolved Electrolytes

Ó

Ó

Ó Ó

Strong Oxidizers

Ó

System pH >11

Ó Ó

System pH <3

Polar Solvents

Ó Ó

Clear Systems

Water & Mixtures1

Ó Ó

Organics & Silicones2

Household/ Institutional

Ó

Other Ingredients/Parameters

Ó

Ó Ó

Ó Ó

˜

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó Ó

Ó Ó

Ó Ó

Ó Ó

Ó

Ó Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó

Ó Ó Ó

Ó Ó

Selecting the Best Candidates 197

Acrylic Polymers Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers Alginates AssociativeThickeners Carrageenan Microcrystalline Cellulose Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium Hydroxyethylcellulose Hydroxypropyl cellulose Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose Methylcellulose

Personal Care

Rheology Modifier

Fluid Phase

Pharmaceutical

Food

Application Type

Dissolved Electrolytes

Cationics Present

Strong Oxidizers

System pH >11

System pH <3

Ó

Ó

˜

Ó

Ó

Ó Ó

Ó

Clear Systems

Ó

Other Ingredients/Parameters

Organics & Silicones2

Ó

Polar Solvents

Personal Care

Guar & Guar Derivatives Locust Bean Gum Organoclays Polyethylene Polyethylene Oxide Polyvinylpyrrolidone Silica Water-swellable Clay Xanthan Gum

Water & Mixtures1

Pharmaceutical

Ó

Rheology Modifier

Fluid Phase Household/ Institutional

Food

Application Type

Ó Ó

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Ó Ó

Ó Ó Ó

n/a n/a

n/a n/a

n/a n/a

n/a n/a Ó

Ó Ó ˜ ˜

n/a ˜ Ó

n/a ˜ Ó

Legend: Ó = Recommended, ˜ Only certain grades recommended, n/a not applicable Notes: 1 Includes mixtures of water and minor amount of water-miscible polar solvent 2 May also include chlorinated hydrocarbons

n/a ˜

Ó n/a

198 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.1b Selection Worksheet

Selecting the Best Candidates 199 Table 3.2a

1. Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Cheesecake

Glazes & Icing

Pie & Pastry Filling

2. Beverages Fruit Drinks 3. Dairy Products Cream Cheese Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet Milk Shakes Processed Cheese & Cheese Sauce Sour Cream Whipped Topping Yogurt 4. Prepared Foods Relish Salad Dressing

Alginates see Table 2.3 KELTONE, MANUGEL, MANUCOL, KELGIN, KELVIS, KELCOSOL, DARILOID & LACTICOL KELTONE, MANUGEL, MANUCOL, KELGIN, KELVIS, KELCOSOL, DARILOID, KELMAR & LACTICOL KELTONE, MANUGEL, MANUCOL, KELGIN, KELVIS, KELCOSOL, DARILOID, KELMAR & LACTICOL KELCOLOID HVF & LVF DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID KELCOSOL, KELTONE, DARILOID, LACTICOL, MARILOID, DRICOID & SHERBILIZER DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID KELCOSOL, KELTONE, DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID KELTONE, MANUGEL & KELCOLOID DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID KELCOLOID, MANUCOL ESTERS KELCOLOID, MANUCOL ESTERS

200 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.2b

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Pie & Pastry Filling 2. Beverages Fruit Drink 3. Dairy Products Chocolate Milk Coffee Creamer Evaporated Milk Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet Milk Shake Whipped Topping Yogurt 4. Prepared Foods Cooked Fish Product Cooked Ham Product Cooked Poultry Product Cooked Pudding Low-Fat Ground Meat, Sausage Ready-to-Eat Dessert Salad Dressing Structured Food Water-gel Dessert 5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert

Instant Pudding

Carrageenan see Tables 2.5a & 2.5b GENU USD-1 SEAKEM & VISCARIN GENULACTA LK-60 & K-100 GENULACTA K-100 GENULACTA LRC-21 GENUVISCO CSH-2 & GENULACTA L-100 GENULACTA LP-60 & LRC-21 GENULACTA LRC-21 GENULACTA LRA-50 GENUGEL FB-91 & MB-73 GENUGEL CHP-200, CHP-2, MB-61F & ME-83F GENUGEL CHP-2, CHP-200 & MB61F, ME-83 & ME-83F GENULACTA P-100 & PL-93 GENUGEL ME-83 & GENUVISCO MP-11F SEAKEM & VISCARIN GENUVISCO CJ SEAKEM & VISCARIN SEAKEM & VISCARIN GENUVISCO CSM-2 SEAKEM & VISCARIN GENULACTA CP-100

Selecting the Best Candidates 201

Table 3.2c

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Glazes & Icing 2. Beverages Bar Mix Fruit Drink High Fiber Drink 3. Dairy Products Cheese, Creamed and Processed Chocolate Milk Ice Cream, Sherbet Low Fat Sour Cream

Cellulose, Microcrystalline see Table 2.6 AvicelRC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611, WC-595 WCN-30 & Novagel RCN-15 Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611, WC-595 & WCN-30 Novagel RCN-10 & RCN-15 Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611, WC-595 & WCN-30 Novagel RCN-10 & RCN-15 Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611, WC-595 & WCN-30 Novagel RCN-10 Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611, WC-595 & WCN-30 Avicel RC-501

Whipped Topping 4. Prepared Foods Salad Dressing Avicel RC-591, CL-611 & Novagel RCN-15 Sauces and Gravy Avicel RC-591 & CL-611 5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert Avicel WC-595 Frying Batter Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611, WC-595 & WCN-30

202 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.2d

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Glazes & Icing 2. Beverages Bar Mix Fruit Drink High Fiber Drink 3. Dairy Products Cheese, Creamed and Processed Chocolate Milk Ice Cream, Sherbet Whipped Topping 4. Prepared Foods Ready-to-Eat Dessert Salad Dressing Sauces and Gravies Syrups 5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert Frying Batter Pet Food

Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium see Table 2.7 Aqualon CMC 9H3SXF Aqualon CMC 7LF & 7HXF Aqualon CMC 9M31XF, 7HXF & 9H4XF Aqualon CMC 7LF Aqualon CMC 7H3SF Aqualon CMC 9M31F Aqualon CMC 7HF & 7HOF Aqualon CMC 7MF & 7HF Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Aqualon CMC 9M31XF & 9H4XF Aqualon CMC 7H3SF & 7H4R Aqualon CMC 7LF & 9M31XF Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF & 9M31XF Aqualon CMC 7HF, 9M8F & 9M31XF Aqualon CMC 7H4F, 7HF & 9H4XF

Selecting the Best Candidates 203

Table 3.2e Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Glazes & Icing 2. Dairy Products Whipped Topping 3. Prepared Foods Structured & Extruded Food

Hydroxypropylcellulose see Table 2.9 KLUCEL GFF KLUCEL GFF KLUCEL MFF

204 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.2f

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Cake Doughnut Glazes & Icing Muffin Pie & Pastry Filling Tortilla/Taco

2. Dairy Products Ice Cream, Sherbet Whipped Topping

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose see Tables 2.10a & 2.10b BENECELMP843 METHOCEL F50FG1, K100FG & K4MFG BENECEL MP 843 METHOCEL F50FG & K100FG BENECEL MP 843 METHOCEL E15FG, K-100FG & K4MFG BENECEL MP 843 METHOCEL F50FG & K100FG BENECEL MP 874 METHOCEL K100FG & K100MFG BENECEL MP 843 METHOCEL E-15FG, K100MFG & K4MFG BENECEL MP 824 & MP 843 METHOCEL K4MFG & K100MFG BENECEL MP 824 METHOCEL F50FG, & K100FG

Selecting the Best Candidates 205 Table 3.2f, continued Application 3. Prepared Foods Fruit Spread Salad Dressing

Sauce and Gravy Soup Structured & Extruded Food Syrup Water-gel Dessert 4. Other Food Products Flavor Oil Emulsion Frying Batter Pet Food

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose METHOCEL K4MFG BENECEL MP 824, MP 874 & MP 943 METHOCEL F4MFG, K4MFG, & K100MFG METHOCEL K4MFG, & K100MFG, METHOCEL K4MFG BENECEL MP 824 & MP 843 METHOCEL F4MFG BENECEL MP 824 METHOCEL K4MFG METHOCEL K4MFG & K100MFG METHOCEL E15FG & E50FG BENECEL MP 874 METHOCEL E15FG, F50FG, K100FG BENECEL MP 843 & MP 874 METHOCEL K100FG, K4MFG & K100MFG

206 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.2g

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Cake Mix Doughnut Muffin Pie & Pastry Filling Tortilla/Taco 2. Beverages Fruit Drink 3. Dairy Products Cream Cheese Ice Cream, Sherbet Milk Shake Processed Cheese & Cheese Spread Whipped Topping Yogurt 4. Prepared Foods Baby Food Ready-to-Eat Dessert Salad Dressing Sauce and Gravy Soup Structured & Extruded Food

Methylcellulose see Tables 2.11a & 2.11b METHOCEL A4CFG1 BENECEL M 043 METHOCEL A4CFG METHOCEL A4CFG BENECEL M 043 METHOCEL A4MFG & A15FG METHOCEL A4MFG METHOCEL A15FG METHOCEL A4CFG METHOCEL A4CFG METHOCEL A40MFG METHOCEL A4CFG METHOCEL A15FG METHOCEL A40MFG METHOCEL A4MFG METHOCEL A4CFG BENECEL M 043 METHOCEL A4MFG BENECEL M 043 METHOCEL A4MFG & A40MFG METHOCEL A4MFG BENECEL M 043 METHOCEL A4MFG & A40MFG

Selecting the Best Candidates 207 Table 3.2g, continued Application 5. Other Food Products Frying Batter Pet Food

Methylcellulose BENECEL M 042 & M 043 METHOCEL A4MFG METHOCEL A4MFG

208 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.2h

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Cake Mix Doughnut Glazes & Icing Muffin Pie & Pastry Filling Tortilla/Taco 2. Beverages Fruit Drink 3. Dairy Products Chocolate Milk Cream Cheese Ice Cream, Sherbet Milk Shake Processed Cheese & Cheese Spread

Guar & Guar Gum Derivatives see Tables 2.12a & 2.12b SUPERCOL U Jaguar 4500F, EZ, 6000 & HV400F SUPERCOL U Jaguar 4500F, 6000, HV400F & EZ SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F SUPERCOL U Jaguar HV400F, 4500F & 6000 SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F SUPERCOL GF Jaguar 4500F & 4000FC SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 400FC SUPERCOL U Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F SUPERCOL G2-S & G3-S Jaguar 4000FC SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 4500F & HV400F SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 4000FC,4500F, EZ & HV400F

Selecting the Best Candidates 209 Table 3.2h, continued Application Guar & Guar Gum Derivatives 3. Dairy Products, continued Whipped Topping Jaguar 4000FC, 4500F & HV 400F Yogurt SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 4500F & 4000FC 4. Prepared Foods Baby Food SUPERCOL GF Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Ready-to-Eat Dessert SUPERCOL U Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Salad Dressing SUPERCOL GF Jaguar HV400F & 6000 Sauce and Gravy Jaguar 6000, 4000FC, 4500F, EZ & HV400F Soup SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 6000, 4500F, EZ & HV400F Structured & Extruded Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Food 5. Other Food Products Frying Batter Jaguar HV400F & 4500F, 6000 & EZ Pet Food SUPERCOL G2-S & G3-S Jaguar 4000FC

210 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.2i

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Bakery Filling

2. Beverages Fruit Drink, Dry Mix & Liquid

3. Dairy Products Cream Cheese

Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet Milk Shake Cottage Cheese Sour Cream Yogurt

4. Prepared Foods Instant Soups Sauce. Gravy & Marinade

Locust Bean Gum see Tables 2.13a & 2.13b Ashland Locust Bean Gum Locust Bean Gum HG-175 & HG-200 Ashland Locust Bean Gum Locust Bean Gum HG-175 & HG-200 Ashland Locust Bean Gum Locust Bean Gum HG-175, HG200 & MEYPRODYN Ashland Locust Bean Gum Locust Bean Gum HG-175 & HG-200 Ashland Locust Bean Gum Ashland Locust Bean Gum Ashland Locust Bean Gum Ashland Locust Bean Gum Locust Bean Gum HG-175, HG200 & MEYPRODYN Ashland Locust Bean Gum MEYPRODYN Ashland Locust Bean Gum Locust Bean Gum HG-175, HG200 & MEYPRODYN

Selecting the Best Candidates 211 Table 3.2j

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application 1. Bakery Products Bakery Filling

Cake, & Brownie, Dry Mix & Finished Goods

Glazes & Icing

Muffin, Doughnut Dry Mix & Finished Goods Pizza and Pie Crust, Tortilla, Pastry 2. Beverages Fruit Drink, Dry Mix & Liquid 3. Dairy Products Cheesecake Cream Cheese

Cottage & Ricotta Cheese Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet

Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20a – 2.20c J.X.G. FFB KELTROL RHODIGEL, Ultra J.X.G. . FFB KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM RHODIGEL, , 200, Ultra J.X.G. FFB KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM RHODIGEL Ultra J.X.G. FFB KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM RHODIGEL 200 & Ultra KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM

J.X.G. FNA, FED & FNCS KELTROL & KELTROL F RHODIGEL, 200 & Ultra KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID RHODIGEL KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID RHODIGEL

212 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.2j, continued Application Xanthan Gum 3. Dairy Products, continued Milk Shake J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID RHODIGEL Processed Cheese & J.X.G. FNA Cheese Spread KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID RHODIGEL Sour Cream J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID RHODIGEL Whipped Topping J.X.G. FNA KELTROL RHODIGEL Yogurt KELTROL 4. Prepared Foods Relish, Chutney & Salsa KELTROL Salad Dressing KELTROL Sauce. Gravy & Marinade J.X.G. FFB & FNA KELTROL RHODIGEL, 200, EZ, Supra & Ultra Syrup J.X.G. FED, FFB & FNA KELTROL RHODIGEL Ultra, EZ & Supra 5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert J.X.G. FED, FFB & FNA KELTROL RHODIGEL, RHODIGEL Ultra Frying Batter KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM RHODIGEL, 200 & Ultra

Selecting the Best Candidates 213

Table 3.3a

2. Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup Oral Suspension

Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers see Table 2.2

CARBOPOL 934P NF, 974P NF, 971P NF CARBOPOL 934P NF, 974P NF & 971P NF Topical Therapeutic CARBOPOL 910 NF, 934 NF, 940 NF, 980 Cream NF, 342 NF, 382 NF, PEMULENTR-1 NF & TR-2 NF Topical Therapeutic Gel CARBOPOL 910 NF, 934 NF, 940 NF, 980 NF, 941 NF, 981 NF, 1342 NF, 1382, PEMULENTR-1 NF & TR-2 NF Topical Therapeutic CARBOPOL 910 NF, 934 NF, 941 NF, 974 Lotion NF, 981 NF, 1342 NF, 1382, PEMULEN TR-1 NF & TR-2 NF Topical Therapeutic CARBOPOL 941 NF Spray Topical Therapeutic PEMULEN TR-1 NF Suspension

214 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.3b

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup Oral Suspension

Carrageenan see Table 2.5b

Viscarin GP-109NF & GP-209NF Gelcarin  GP-379NF, SeaSpen PF Topical Therapeutic Gelcarin GP-379NF & GP-911NF, Cream Viscarin GP-109NF, GP-209NF, GP328NF Topical Therapeutic Gel Gelcarin GP-379NF, GP812NF & GP-911NF Topical Therapeutic Gelcarin GP-379NF, & GP-911NF, Lotion Viscarin GP-109NF,GP-209NF, GP-328NF, SeaSpen PF Topical Therapeutic Gelcarin GP-379NF, Viscarin GP-109NF, Spray GP-209NF & GP-328NF SeaSpen PF Topical Therapeutic Gelcarin GP-379NF Viscarin GP-109NF, Suspension GP-209NF & GP-328NF SeaSpen PF

Selecting the Best Candidates 215

Table 3.3c

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications Microcrystalline Cellulose see Table 2.6

Application Aqueous Systems Oral Suspension Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Suspension

AVICEL RC-591 NF & CL-611 AVICEL RC-591 NF & CL-611 AVICEL RC-591 NF

Table 3.3d

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel Ophthalmic Lubricant Oral Liquid/Syrup Oral Suspension Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Gel Topical Therapeutic Lotion Topical Therapeutic Suspension

Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium see Table 2.7 Aqualon CMC 7H3SF Aqualon CMC 7H3SF Aqualon CMC 9M31SF & 12M31 SF Aqualon CMC 7MF & 7LF Aqualon CMC 7MF Aqualon CMC 7M3SF Aqualon CMC 7MF Aqualon CMC 7LF & 7MF

216 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.3e

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications Application 1. Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel Ophthalmic Lubricant Oral Suspension Salve/Ointment Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Gel Topical Therapeutic Lotion Topical Therapeutic Suspension 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup Salve/Ointment Suppository Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Lotion

Hydroxyethylcellulose see Table 2.8a - 2.8b NATROSOL250HX Pharma NATROSOL 250HX Pharma NATROSOL 250L NF NATROSOL 250H NF NATROSOL 250HX Pharma NATROSOL 250HX Pharma NATROSOL 250HX Pharma NATROSOL 250L NF & 250H NF

NATROSOL 250G Pharma NATROSOL 250G Pharma NATROSOL 250G Pharma NATROSOL 250 M Pharma NATROSOL 250M Pharma

Selecting the Best Candidates 217

Table 3.3f

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application 1. Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel Ophthalmic Lubricant Oral Liquid/ Syrup Oral Suspension Salve/Ointment Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Gel Topical Therapeutic Lotions Topical Therapeutic Suspensions 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup Salve/Ointment Suppository Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Lotion

Hydroxypropylcellulose see Table 2.9 KLUCEL HF NF & HXF NF KLUCEL HXF NF & EXH Pharma KLUCEL HXF NF KLUCEL LF Pharma, & HF NF KLUCEL HF NF & HXF NF KLUCEL HF NF & MF NF KLUCEL HXF NF KLUCEL HXF NF KLUCEL LF Pharma

KLUCEL HXF NF KLUCEL HXF NF KLUCEL GF NF KLUCEL MF NF KLUCEL MF NF

218 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.3g

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application 1. Aqueous Systems Ophthalmic Lubricant Oral Liquid/Syrup Oral Suspension Spray Bandage Surgical Scrub Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Gel Topical Therapeutic Lotion Topical Therapeutic Suspension 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose see Tables 2.10a & 2.10b METHOCEL E50P, F4MP, E4MP METHOCEL K15MP METHOCEL K100MP METHOCEL E50P METHOCEL K4MP METHOCEL K4MP METHOCEL K15MP METHOCEL K15MP METHOCEL K15MP METHOCEL E4MP

Selecting the Best Candidates 219 Table 3.3h

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application 1. Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup Oral Suspension Spray Bandage Surgical Scrub Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Gel Topical Therapeutic Lotion Topical Therapeutic Suspension

Methylcellulose see Tables 2.11a & 2.11b METHOCEL A4MP METHOCEL A4MP METHOCEL A15LVP METHOCEL A4MP METHOCEL A4MP METHOCEL A4MP METHOCEL A4MP METHOCEL A4MP

Table 3.3i

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications Application 1. Aqueous Systems Ophthalmic Lubricant Oral Liquid/Syrup

Oral Suspension Surgical Scrub Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Gel 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Suppository

Polyvinylpyrrolidone see Table 2.17a & 2.17b Kollidon 17PF, 25, 30 & 90F Kollidon12PF, 17PF, 25, 30, 90F PLASDONE C-15, C-30, K-25,K29, K-32 & K-90/D/M Kollidon 12PF, 90F PLASDONE K-25,K-29, K-32 & K-90/D/M PLASDONE K-25,K-29, K-32 & K90/D/M Kollidon 30 & 90F PLASDONE K-25,K-29, K-32 & K90/D/M

220 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.3j

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application 1. Aqueous Systems Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Spray 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup Salve/Ointment

Silica see Table 2.18a CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5 CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5 CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5 CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5

Table 3.3k

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel Oral Suspension Salve/Ointment Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Lotion Topical Therapeutic Suspension

Water-swellable Clay see Tables 2.19c & 2.19e VEEGUMD Bentolite  NF VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, K & HS VEEGUM VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV & K VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV & K Bentolite NF VEEGUM & VEEGUM K

Selecting the Best Candidates 221

Table 3.3l

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application Aqueous Systems Dental Impression Material

Dental Treatment Gel

Oral Liquid/Syrup

Oral Suspension

Topical Therapeutic Cream Topical Therapeutic Gel

Topical Therapeutic Lotion Topical Therapeutic Suspension

Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20a – 2.20c J.X.G. FNA KELTROL CR RHODIGEL J.X.G. FFB & FNA KELTROL, KELTROL CR, F & FT RHODIGEL J.X.G. FNA & FNCS KELTROL T, TF RHODIGEL Clear J.X.G. FNA KELTROL & KELTROL CR RHODIGEL J.X.G. FNA J.X.G. FNA KELTROL T, TF RHODIGEL Clear J.X.G. FNA J.X.G. FNA KELTROL & KELTROL CR RHODIGEL

222 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.4a

3. Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Hair Care Conditioner Hair Color Permanent Wave Relaxer Shampoo Shampoo, Antidandruff Styling Gel/Cream 2. Skin Care Cream Depilatory Gel Liquid Soap Lotion Sunscreen

Acrylic Polymers see Tables 2.1a – 2.1c STRUCTURE PLUS STRUCTURE 2001 & 3001 STRUCTURE 2001 & 3001 STRUCTURE 2001 STRUCTURE PLUS ACULYN 22 & 33 ACULYN 22 STRUCTURE 2001 ACULYN 22 & 33 STRUCTURE PLUS ACULYN 22 & 33 STRUCTURE 2001 ACULYN 22 STRUCTURE 2001 ACULYN 22 ACULYN 22 ACULYN 22 & 33 RHEOLATE ACULYN 22 & 33

Selecting the Best Candidate 223

Table 3.4b

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Hair Care Curl Activator Shampoo Shampoo, Antidandruff Styling Gel/Cream 2. Skin Care Cream

Exfoliating Cream/Lotion Fragrance Gel Lotion

Shave Cream/Gel Shower Gel Sunscreen

Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers see Tables 2.2a & 2.2b Carbopol 940, Ultrez 10 Carbopol ETD 2020 Carbopol ETD 2020 Carbopol 940, Ultrez 10 & Pemulen TR-1 ACRITAMER940 & 505E Carbopol ETD 2020, Ultrez 10, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 ACRITAMER 934, 940 941 & 501E Carbopol ETD 2020 & Ultrez 10 Carbopol 981, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 Carbopol ETD 2020 & Ultrez 10 ACRITAMER 940 Carbopol 934, 940, 980, ETD 2050, Ultrez 10, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 ACRITAMER 934, 940 & 941 Carbopol 2984 & Ultrez 10 Carbopol ETD 2020 Carbopol ETD 2020, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 ACRITAMER 941

224 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.4c

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Liquid Makeup Mascara 2.Hair Care Conditioner Hair Color Permanent Wave 3.Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream Lotion Sunscreen

Associative Thickeners see Table 2.4b ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44 & 46 ACULYN 44

Selecting the Best Candidate 225

Table 3.4d

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Eye Shadow Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Dental Care Denture Adhesive Mouthwash/ Gargle Toothpaste/Gel 3. Hair Care Conditioner Curl Activator Hair Color 4. Skin Care Cream Fragrance Gel Lotion Shave Cream/Gel Sunscreen

Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium see Table 2.7 Aqualon CMC 7LF Aqualon CMC 7LF Aqualon CMC 7LF Aqualon CMC 7LF Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Aqualon CMC 7MXF & 9M31XF Aqualon CMC 9H31SF Aqualon CMC 1221 Aqualon CMC 9M8F Aqualon CMC 9M8F Aqualon CMC 9M8F Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Aqualon CMC 7M Aqualon CMC 9M3SXF Aqualon CMC 7M

226 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.4e

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Eye Shadow Lipstick/Gloss Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Dental Care Denture Adhesive Mouthwash/ Gargle Toothpaste/Gel

3. Hair Care Conditioner Curl Activator Hair Color Shampoo Shampoo, Antidandruff Styling Gel/Cream 4. Skin Care Roll on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream Depilatory Exfoliating Cream/Lotion

Hydroxyethylcellulose see Tables 2.8a & 2.8b NATROSOL 250LR NATROSOL 250LR NATROSOL 250H Pharma NATROSOL 250LR NATROSOL 250LR NATROSOL 250H Pharma NATROSOL 250H Pharma NATROSOL 250H Pharma & NATROSOL PLUS (330 cstk.) CELLOSIZEPCG-10 NATROSOL 250HR CELLOSIZE QP-52,000H NATROSOL 250LR NATROSOL 250MR NATROSOL 250HR CELLOSIZE QP-4400H NATROSOL 250HR CELLOSIZE PCG-10 NATROSOL 250HHR NATROSOL 250HR NATROSOL 250HR NATROSOL 250MR NATROSOL 250MR

Selecting the Best Candidate 227

Table 3.4e, continued Application 4. Skin Care, continued Facial Mask Gel Liquid Soap Lotion Shave Cream/Gel Shower Gel Sunscreen

Hydroxyethylcellulose NATROSOL 250MR NATROSOL 250HHR NATROSOL 250HR NATROSOL 250HR NATROSOL 250HHR CELLOSIZE PCG-10 NATROSOL 250HR NATROSOL 250HR

228 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.4f

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Eye Shadow Lipstick/Gloss Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Dental Care Mouthwash/ Gargle Toothpaste/Gel 3. Hair Care Conditioner Curl Activator Shampoo Shampoo, Antidandruff Styling Gel/Cream 4. Skin Care Roll on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream Depilatory Exfoliating Cream/Lotion Facial Mask Gel Lotion Shave Cream/Gel Shower Gel Sunscreen

Hydroxypropylcellulose see Table 2.9 KLUCEL LF KLUCEL LF KLUCEL MF KLUCEL LF KLUCEL LF KLUCEL HXF KLUCEL HXF KLUCEL MF KLUCEL EF KLUCEL MF KLUCEL MF KLUCEL HF KLUCEL LF KLUCEL MF KLUCEL LF KLUCEL LF KLUCEL GF KLUCEL HF KLUCEL MF KLUCEL HF KLUCEL MF KLUCEL MF

Selecting the Best Candidate 229 Table 3.4g

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Eye Shadow Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Dental Care Mouthwash/ Gargle Toothpaste/Gel 3. Hair Care Conditioner Shampoo Shampoo, Antidandruff Styling Gel/Cream 4. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream

Depilatory Exfoliating Cream/Lotion

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose see Tables 2.10a & 2.10b METHOCEL 40-202 METHOCEL 40-202 METHOCEL 40-202 METHOCEL 40-202 METHOCEL E50P & E4MP METHOCEL K100MP METHOCEL 40-202, K15MP & K15MS METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP METHOCEL F4MP & 40-202 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202 & K100MP BENECEL MP943 BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP METHOCEL 40-100 METHOCEL 40-100

230 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.4g, continued Application Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 4. Skin Care, continued Facial Mask BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP Gel BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-202 Liquid Soap BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101 & 40-202 Lotion BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP Shave Cream/Gel BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202 & E4MP Shower Gel BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101 & 40-202 Sunscreen BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP

Selecting the Best Candidate 231 Table 3.4h

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Eye Shadow Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Dental Care Denture Adhesive Mouthwash/ Gargle Toothpaste/Gel 3. Hair Care Conditioner

Shampoo

Shampoo, Antidandruff Styling Gel/Cream 4. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream Depilatory

Guar & Guar Derivatives see Tables 2.12a & 2.12b SUPERCOL K-1 SUPERCOL K-1 SUPERCOL K-1 SUPERCOL K-1 SUPERCOL U SUPERCOL K-1 SUPERCOL U N-HANCE 3000 Hi-Care1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17, C-162 & HP-8 N-HANCE HP-40, HP-40S, 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215 Hi-Care1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17, C-162 & HP-8 SUPERCOL U N-HANCE HP 40 & HP 40S Jaguar HP-105 Jaguar HP-120 SUPERCOL U, N-HANCE 3000, HP-40 & HP-40S N-HANCE 3000 & SUPERCOL K-1 Jaguar C-162

232 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.4h, continued Application 4. Skin Care, continued Exfoliating Cream/Lotion Liquid Soap

Lotion

Shave Cream/Gel

Shower Gel

Sunscreen

Guar & Guar Derivatives N-HANCE 3000, HP-40, HP-40S, SUPERCOL K-1 N-HANCE 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215 Hi-Care 1000 Jaguar C-13S, C14S, C-17 & C-162 N-HANCE HP-40, HP-40S, 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215 Hi-Care 1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17, C-162 & HP-8 N-HANCE HP-40, HP-40S, 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215 Hi-Care 1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17 & C-162 N-HANCE 3196, 3205 & 3215, HP-40 & HP-40S Hi-Care 1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17 & C-162 N-HANCE 3000, HP-40, & HP-40S SUPERCOL U & K-1

Selecting the Best Candidate 233 Table 3.4i

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Eye Shadow

Lipstick/Gloss

Liquid Makeup

Mascara

2. Hair Care Styling Cream/Dressing 3. Nail Care Nail Lacquer

Organoclays see Tables 2.14a – 2.14c BENTONE 27 & 38 TIXOGEL OMS BENTONE 38, BENTONE GEL 10-ST, OMS, ISD, VS-5, VS-5PC & SVS TIXOGEL MIO & OMS BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL CAO, MIO & YVS TIXOGEL LAN & MIO BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL EUG, CTCC, PGC, MIO, YVS, VS-5, VS-5PC & SVS TIXOGEL FTN BENTONE GEL 10-ST, OMS, ISD, VS-5, VS-5PC & SVS TIXOGEL MIO, OMS, IDD-1678 & IHD1235 BENTONE GEL LOI, MIO, YVS, VS-5, VS-5PC, VS/IPM & SVS BENTONE 27 TIXOGEL LG

234 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.4i, continued Application 4. Skin Care Stick & Spray Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream

Exfoliating Cream/Lotion Lotion

Sunscreen

Organoclays BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL DOA, IPM, YVS, VS-5, VS-5PG, VS/IPM, & SVS Claytone  SO TIXOGEL FTN, IPM, & VSP BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL EUG, GTCC, PGC, LOI, MIO, TN, YVS, VS-5, VS-5PG & SVS TIXOGEL FTN, IPM, LAN, MIO & VSP BENTONE GEL EUG, GTCC, PGC, IPM, LOI, MIO, TN, YVS, VS-5PC, & SVS TIXOGEL IPM, LAN, MIO & OMS BENTONE GEL EUG, GTCC, PGC, IPM, LOI, MIO, TN, YVS, VS-5PC, & SVS TIXOGEL IPM, LAN, MIO & VSP BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL GTCC, PGC, TN, & SVS TIXOGEL LAN, VSP, TN & TIO-1234

Selecting the Best Candidate 235

Table 3.4j

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Skin Care Stick & Spray Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream Lotion Sunscreen

Polyethylene see Table 2.15 A-CPolyethylene A-C Polyethylene A-C Polyethylene AC Polyethylene A-C Polyethylene A-C Polyethylene

236 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.4k

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications

Application 1.Dental Care Denture Adhesive Toothpaste/Gel 2.Hair Care Conditioner Shampoo Shampoo, Antidandruff 3.Skin Care Cream Liquid Soap Lotion Shave Cream/Gel Shower Gel

Polyethylene Oxide see Tables 2.16a & 2.16b POLYOX WSR-301NF POLYOX WSR 205NF Sentry POLYOX WSR-205 POLYOX WSR N-750, 205, N-60K & 301 POLYOX WSR N-750, 205, N-60K & 301 POLYOX WSR-205 & N-60K POLYOX WSR-205, N-12K & N-60K POLYOX WSR-205 & N-60K POLYOX WSR-205 R.I.T.A. PEO-2

Selecting the Best Candidate 237 Table 3.4l

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Eye Shadow Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Hair Care Hair Color Permanent Wave Shampoo Styling Gel/Cream 3. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant Cream Depilatory Facial Mask Liquid Soap Lotion Shave Cream/Gel Shower Gel Sunscreen

Polyvinylpyrrolidone see Table 2.17 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3 POVIDERM SK3

238 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.4m

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Lipstick/Gloss Liquid Makeup Mascara 2. Dental Care Toothpaste/Gel 3. Hair Care Shampoo 4. Nail Care Nail Lacquer

5. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant & Deodorant Cream Fragrance Gel Lotion Sunscreen

Silica see Tables 2.18a – 2.18 c CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5 & EH-5 AEROSIL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5 AEROSIL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5 AEROSIL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5 AEROSIL 200, SIDENT8, 9,10 & 22S CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5 AEROSIL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5, TS610 & TS-530 AEROSIL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5 & TS-530 AEROSIL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5 AEROSIL, SIPERNAT22S & 22SL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5 & EH-5 SIPERNAT22S & 22SL SIPERNAT22S & 22SL CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5, HS-5, EH-5 & TS720 AEROSIL

Selecting the Best Candidate 239 Table 3.4n

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Shadow

Liquid Makeup

Mascara 2. Dental Care Toothpaste/Gel

3. Hair Care Conditioner Shampoo

Shampoo, Antidandruff Straightener Styling Gel/Cream

Water-swellable Clay see Tables 2.19a – 2.19e BENTONEMA & EW Gelwhite  MAS-H & MAS-L VEEGUM Laponite  XLG BENTONE EW & LT Gelwhite MAS-H & MAS-L Mineral Colloid BP & MO OPTIGEL CK, CG & SH VEEGUM, VEEGUM PLUS & Ultra BENTONE MA &EW VEEGUM Laponite D & DF OPTIGEL SH VEEGUM D BENTONE MA & EW VEEGUM HS BENTONE EW OPTIGEL CK &CG VEEGUM & VEEGUM HS Laponite XLG VEEGUM, VEEGUM HS & PRO Laponite XLG VEEGUM HS Laponite XLG

240 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.4n, continued Application 4. Nail Care Cuticle Cream 5. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant & Deodorant

Cream

Depilatory Exfoliating Cream/Lotion Facial Mask

Lotion

Sunscreen

Water-swellable Clay VEEGUM & VEEGUM Ultra BENTONE EW & LT Gelwhite L, GP, H NF, MAS-H & MAS-L VEEGUM HV Laponite XLG BENTONE MA, EW & LT OPTIGEL CK &CG VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, PLUS & Ultra Laponite XLG VEEGUM HS Laponite XLG VEEGUM, VEEGUM Ultra Laponite XLG Mineral Colloid BP & MO VEEGUM, VEEGUM HS, F & Ultra BENTONE MA, EW & LT Mineral Colloid BP & MO OPTIGEL CK &CG GWX-1285 & SH VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, PLUS & Ultra Laponite XLG BENTONE MA, EW & LT VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, PLUS & Ultra

Selecting the Best Candidate 241 Table 3.4o

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications Application 1. Color Cosmetics Liquid Makeup

2. Dental Care Mouthwash/Gargle

Toothpaste/Gel

3. Hair Care Shampoo

Styling Gel/Cream 4. Skin Care Cream Liquid Soap Lotion

Shower Gel Sunscreen

Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20a – 2.20c J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARES & T J.X.G. FCS KELTROL T & TF RHODICARE XC J.X.G. FCS & FNA KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARE S, XC & T J.X.G. FCS & FNA KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARE T & XC KELTROL RHODICARE T KELTROL RHODICARE S KELTROL RHODICARE XC J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARE S & T KELTROL RHODICARE T & XC KELTROL J.X.G. FNA

242 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.5a

4. Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products

Application

Acrylic Polymers see Tables 2.1a & 2.1b

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Hand Dishwashing Detergent ACUSOL 810 & 823 LADD Without Bleach ACUSOL 810 & 842 2. Fabric Care Liquid Laundry Detergent ACUSOL 810, 820 & 823 3. Hand Cleaners Waterless Hand Cleaner ACUSOL 810 & 820 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Basin, Tub & Tile ACUSOL 810, 820, 823 & 842 Floor Cleaner & Polish ACUSOL 830 Glass Cleaner ACUSOL 830 Graffiti Cleaner RHEOLATE 420 Mildew Remover ACUSOL 830 Oven & Grill Cleaner RHEOLATE 1 & 101 ACUSOL 820 & 823 Solvent Degreaser ACUSOL 830 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Drain Unclogger ACUSOL 820

Selecting the Best Candidates 243

Table 3.5b

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Application

Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers see Table 2.2

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher Spot Carbopol672, 674, Remover Carbopol ETD 2623 & 2691 Hand Dishwashing Detergent Carbopol 672, 676, ETD 2623 & 2690 Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Carbopol 672 & 676 Detergent (LADD) with Bleach LADD Without Bleach Carbopol 674 & Carbopol ETD 2691 2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener Carbopol ETD 2623 Laundry Pre-spotter Carbopol ETD 2623 Liquid Laundry Detergent Carbopol ETD 2691 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap Carbopol ETD 2020 & Ultrez 10 Waterless Hand Cleaner Carbopol ETD 2001, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Automobile Cleaner & Polish Carbopol 674, 694 & EZ-2 Basin, Tub & Tile Carbopol 674 & ETD 2691 Floor Cleaner & Polish Carbopol EZ-1 Furniture Polish Carbopol EZ-1 & EZ-2 Glass Cleaner Carbopol ETD 2623 Metal Cleaner & Polish Carbopol EZ-2 Mildew Remover Carbopol 672 & 676 Oven & Grill Cleaner Carbopol 672, 674, 676 & ETD 2691 Solvent Degreaser Carbopol ETD 2623

244 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.5b, continued Application Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish, continued Toilet Bowl Cleaner With Carbopol 672 & 676 Bleach Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Carbopol 674, 676 & ETD 2691 (Acid Type) 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel Carbopol 675, 690, EZ-1, EZ-2 & PEMULEN TR-1 & TR-2 Insect Repellant Carbopol Ultrez 10

Table 3.5c

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Application

Associative Thickeners see Table 2.4b

1. Fabric Care Fabric Softener ACUSOL 880 & 882 Liquid Bleach ACUSOL 880 & 882 Liquid Laundry Detergent ACUSOL 880 & 882 2. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Floor Cleaner & Polish ACUSOL 880 Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid ACUSOL 880 & 882 Type

Selecting the Best Candidates 245 Table 3.5d

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Application

Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium see Table 2.7 1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM1221 Spot Remover Hand Dishwashing Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Detergent Liquid Automatic Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Dishwasher Detergent without Bleach 2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Laundry Pre-spotter Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Liquid Laundry Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Detergent 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap Aqualon CMC 9M8 & 12M8 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Auto Cleaner & Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Basin, Tub & Tile Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Floor Cleaner & Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Furniture Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Glass Cleaner Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Graffiti Cleaner Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Metal Cleaner & Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Oven & Grill Cleaner Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Solvent Degreaser Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Acid Type

246 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.5d, continued Application

Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 5. Other Hous ehold/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel Aqualon CMC 7L, 7M & 9M31 Drain Unclogger Aqualon CMC 7L, 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Insect Repellant Aqualon CMC 7L, 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221

Selecting the Best Candidates 247 Table 3.5e

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Hydroxyethylcellulose Application see Tables 2.8a & 2.8b 1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Dishwasher Pre-spotter Hand Dishwashing Detergent NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR CELLOSIZE Liquid Automatic Dishwasher NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Detergent without Bleach 2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Laundry Pre-spotter NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Liquid Laundry Detergent NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR CELLOSIZE Starch, Aerosol NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Waterless Hand Cleaner NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR CELLOSIZE 4. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Basin, Tub & Tile NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR CELLOSIZE Floor Cleaner & Polish NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Furniture Polish NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Glass & Window NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Metal Cleaner NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Mildew Remover NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Oven & Grill Cleaner NATROSOL 250MBR & 250GR Solvent Degreaser NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type NATROSOL 250LR

248 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.5e, continued Application Hydroxyethylcellulose 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR CELLOSIZE Drain Unclogger NATROSOL 250LR Insect Repellant NATROSOL 250GR & 250LR Shoe Polish CELLOSIZE

Selecting the Best Candidates 249 Table 3.5f

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Hydroxypropylcellulose Application see Table 2.9 1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher KLUCEL L & G Spot Remover Hand Dishwashing Detergent KLUCEL L & G Liquid Automatic Dishwasher KLUCEL L & G Detergent without Bleach 2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener KLUCEL L Laundry Pre-spotter KLUCEL L & E Liquid Bleach KLUCEL E Liquid Laundry KLUCEL L & G Detergent Starch, Aerosol KLUCEL L & E 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap KLUCEL L & G Waterless Hand Cleaner KLUCEL G, L & M 4. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish KLUCEL L & G Basin, Tub & Tile KLUCEL L & G Floor Cleaner & Polish KLUCEL L & G Furniture Polish KLUCEL L & G Glass & Window KLUCEL L & G Metal Cleaner KLUCEL L & G Mildew Remover KLUCEL L & G Oven & Grill Cleaner KLUCEL L & G

250 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.5f, continued Application Hydroxypropylcellulose 4. Hard Surface Cleaners, continued Solvent Degreaser KLUCEL L & G Toilet Bowl Cleaner With KLUCEL L & G Bleach Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type KLUCEL L & E 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel KLUCEL L & E Drain Unclogger KLUCEL L & E Insect Repellant KLUCEL L & E

Selecting the Best Candidates 251 Table 3.5g

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose Application see Table 2.10a 1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher BENECEL MP943 & Spot Remover CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Hand Dishwashing BENECEL MP943 & Detergent CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Liquid Automatic BENECEL MP943 & Dishwasher Detergent CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 without Bleach 2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Laundry Pre-spotter BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Liquid Laundry Detergent BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Starch, Aerosol BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Waterless Hand Cleaner BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 4. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Basin, Tub & Tile BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Floor Cleaner & Polish BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843

252 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.5g, continued Application Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 4. Hard Surface Cleaners, continued Furniture Polish BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Glass & Window BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Metal Cleaner BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Mildew Remover BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Oven & Grill Cleaner BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Solvent Degreaser BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid BENECEL MP943 & Type CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Drain Unclogger BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Insect Repellant BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843

Selecting the Best Candidates 253 Table 3.5h

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Application

Polyvinylpyrrolidone see Table 2.17b

1. Fabric Care Laundry Pre-spotter PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Liquid Laundry Detergent PVP K-30 2. Hand Cleaners Detergent Bars PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Waterless Hand Cle aner PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 3. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Metal Cleaner PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Solvent Degreaser PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 3. Other Household/Institutional Products End Adhesive for PVP K-60 Toilet Tissue Institutional Sanitizers PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120

254 Rheology Modifier Handbook Table 3.5i

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Application

Water-swellable Clay see Tables 2.19a-2.19e

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Hand Dishwashing Detergent LAPONITERD Liquid Automatic Dishwasher LAPONITE RDS Detergent (LADD) With Bleach VAN GEL ES & O LADD Without Bleach BENTONE EW & LT OPTIGEL WA & SH VAN GEL ES 2. Fabric Care Liquid Bleach VAN GEL O 3. Hand Cleaners Waterless Hand Cleaner VEEGUM & VAN GEL B 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Auto Cleaner & Polish BENTONE EW VEEGUM & VEEGUM T Basin, Tub & Tile Cleaner LAPONITE RD & RDS BENTONE MA, HC, EW & LT GELWHITE GP & L OPTIGEL WX VEEGUM, VEEGUM, VAN GEL B, ES & O Floor Cleaner & Polish BENTONE EW Furniture Polish BENTONE EW VEEGUM, VEEGUM T & VAN GEL B Glass Cleaner LAPONITE RD

Selecting the Best Candidates 255

Table 3.5i, continued Application Water-swellable Clay 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish, continued Graffiti Cleaner BENTONE EW & LT VEEGUM T & VAN GEL B Metal Cleaner LAPONITE RD VEEGUM, VAN GEL B, C, & ES Mildew Remover LAPONITE RDS VEEGUM T, VAN GEL B & O Oven & Grill Cleaner LAPONITE RD & RDS BENTONE EW Mineral Colloid BP & MO VEEGUM T, VAN GEL B & C Toilet Bowl Cleaner With VEEGUM T & VAN GEL O Bleach Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type VEEGUM & VAN GEL B 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel LAPONITE RD Carpet Shampoo LAPONITE RD Insect Repellant VEEGUM Ultra

256 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 3.5j

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products Application 1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent Without Bleach 2. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap Waterless Hand Cleaner

Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20b & 2.20c KELZAN KELZAN S RHODOPOL 23, & 50MD KELZAN RHODOPOL 23 KELZAN RHODOPOL 23

3. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Auto Cleaner & Polish KELZAN S RHODOPOL 23 & 50MD Basin, Tub & Tile Cleaner KELZAN S , AR & T RHODOPOL 23, 50MD & T Metal Cleaner RHODOPOL 23 Oven & Grill Cleaner KELZAN S & D RHODOPOL 23 & 50MD Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type KELZAN T RHODOPOL 23

Formulary 257

PART 4 FORMULARY Page Introduction

259

Food Formulations Baked Goods Dairy Products Desserts Processed Foods Sauces, Gravies and Glazes Other Food Formulations

261 266 270 281 286 295

Pharmaceutical Formulations Therapeutic Creams Therapeutic Gels Therapeutic Lotions Therapeutic Suspensions Other Pharmaceutical Formulations

297 307 319 323 338

Personal Care Formulations Antiperspirants Color Cosmetics Dental Care Hair Care Skin Care Shaving Soaps Sunscreens Other Personal Care Formulations

340 343 351 355 379 403 406 411 418

258 Rheology Modifier Handbook Page Household/Institutional Formulations Air Fresheners Dish, Cutlery and Utensil Cleaners Fabric Care Hard Surface Cleaners and Polishes Oven and Grill Cleaners Waterless Hand Cleaners Other Household/Institutional Formulations

425 428 435 447 478 483 486

Formulary 259

Introduction Most suppliers of rheology modifiers have R&D personnel who are assigned the development of “starting/prototype” formulations designed to demonstrate how their products can be used in various applications and the recommended method of incorporating the rheology modifier into the formulation. This also offers another opportunity for the suppliers to “showcase” their product(s). This part of the handbook contains 231 of these starting formulations published by 18 of the suppliers. This is but the tip of the iceberg. Hundreds of other formulations are available and the user is encouraged to contact the suppliers to request starting formulations for other consumer products of interest but not included here. The formulations are arranged first by industry, i.e. Food, Pharmaceutical, Personal Care and Household/Institutional Products. and then by the type of compos ition. For example, in the Food Section, the formulations are grouped into Baked Goods, Dairy Products, Desserts, Processed Foods, Sauces and Other Foods. The name of the supplier who developed the formulation appears below the name of the formulation. The supplier’s rheology modifier(s) always appears in bold capital type as the trade name of a commercially available product of the formulation supplier. If the formulation also includes another rheology modifier that is not a product of the supplier, it also appears in bold type. The generic name common to the particular industry involved is used and the trade name in parenthesis follows. As will be apparent upon reviewing the formulations, it is a common practice to use more than one rheology modifier in a formulation. In some cases the supplier provides the industry-specific generic name for an ingredient as well as a trade name product for that ingredient. The user can find the supplier of the trade name product in the appropriate industry directory.

260 Rheology Modifier Handbook The number of abbreviations used in these formulations has been limited to three: “Wt.%” for Weight Percent, “ml” for milliliters and “q.s.”, (quantum sufficit) - as much as required. When a percentage appears in parenthesis following an ingredient, it refers to the concentration of the active ingredient the solution used (usually an aqueous solution). In a few formulations, the concentration of the individual ingredients in Wt.% does not total 100% for reasons unknown to the authors. These cases are noted at the bottom of the formulation. The user should discuss this issue with the supplier of the formulation. In almost all formulations, a recommended mixing procedure is presented. In those few cases where the supplier's literature did not include the mixing procedure, the user is encouraged to contact the supplier for the procedure. Some rheology modifier suppliers chose not to supply formulations for this handbook. So, if the user finds a formulation herein containing a particular type of rheology modifier, for example, xanthan gum, it is recommended that the user contact suppliers of xanthan gum to get their formulation recommendation too.

Food Formulations 261

1. Food Formulations A. Baked Goods 1. Bakery Cream (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient GENULACTA USD-1 Modified Starch Sugar Powdered Skim Milk Salt Flavor Food Color

Wt. % 0.70 4.00 20.00 4.00 q.s. q.s. q.s.

Purified Water Total

71.30 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Dissolve the dry blend in the water. Pasteurize and fill.

262 Rheology Modifier Handbook

2. Chocolate Layer Cake (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingre dient Sugar Cake Flour Dutch Cocoa Dry Whole Eggs Powdered Non-Fat Dry Milk Baking Powder Salt Baking Soda METHOCEL K100 Food Grade

Wt. % 22.60 20.20 3.80 2.50 2.50 0.80 0.52 0.23 0.15

Purified Water Shortening Vanilla

35.10 11.10 0.50 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Using a kitchen mixer with wire whisk attachment, dry blend the Part A ingredients thoroughly using slow speed. Add the Part B ingredients and mix using medium speed for 5 minutes. Pour the batter into a suitable size, greased baking pan and bake for 28 minutes @ 1820 C.

Food Formulations 263

3. Reduced Calorie, Fat-Free Fudge Brownies (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

B

C

D

Ingredient Sugar Cocoa Powder, Fat-Free EC25 Emulsifier

Wt. % 36.70 7.00 0.25

Corn Syrup 42DE Purified Water Liquid Egg Whites

11.60 8.10 5.40

Glycerin Vanilla

4.00 0.25

Cake Flour NOVAGEL BK2130 Salt Polargel Starch Baking Powder Total

20.40 5.00 0.80 0.25 0.25 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in a bowl mixer at slow speed. Add the Part B ingredients and mix for 2-3 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until a smooth consistency is obtained. Add the Part D ingredients and mix for 3-4 minutes or until a smooth consistency is obtained. Pour into a suitable baking pan and bake for 22-30 minutes. @ 1750 C.

264 Rheology Modifier Handbook

4. Plain Muffins (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Sugar Salt Powdered Non-Fat Dry Milk Shortening

B

Eggs

C

Purified Water Vanilla

D

Wt. % 16.82 0.30 2.10 13.80 8.41 28.82 0.30

METHOCEL F50 Food Grade Cake Flour Baking Powder Total

0.03 28.02 1.40 100.00

Mixing Procedure Cream the Part A ingredients. Add Part B in two stages, creaming well after each addition. Stir in the Part C ingredients and mix thoroughly. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the batter. Mix until smooth and uniform. Pour the batter into a greased muffin pan and bake for 15 minutes. @ 1960 C.

Food Formulations 265

5. Whipped Topping Ink (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Glycerin METHOCEL K100M Food Grade FD&C Blue No. 2

Wt. % 20.00 2.00 0.40

Purified Water

77.60 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until smooth and uniform. Chill Part B to 7 0 C and mix with Part A for 5 minutes. Package and store at room temperature.

266 Rheology Modifier Handbook

B. Dairy Products 6. Chocolate Milk with Stable Cocoa Suspension (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient GENULACTA LK-60 Sugar Cocoa

Wt. % 0.025 6.000 1.500

Milk (9% Milk Solids, Non-Fat) Total

92.475 100.000

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with Part B. Heat to pasteurization temperature and hold for the prescribed time, i.e. 30 minutes. @ 750 C for batch sterilization or 16 seconds. @. 820 C for continuous sterilization. Cool to 100 C and fill in paper cartons, plastic or glass bottles.

Food Formulations 267

7. UHT Processed Chocolate Milk (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient SeaKem CM611 Sugar Cocoa

Wt. % 0.025 6.000 0.695

Milk (2% Fat)

93.280 100.000

Total

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with cold Part B. Homogenize @ 650 C. Cool to 250 C or lower and fill aseptically. UHT process @ 143 -1490 C for 3-4 seconds.

268 Rheology Modifier Handbook

8-10. Ice Cream Stabilizers (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulations

Ingredient GENULACTA L-100 Guar Gum Locust Bean Gum Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium Sugar or Dextrose Total

Stabilizer Formula 8 9 10 5.00 5.00 7.00 45.00 45.00 35.00 50.00 50.00 58.00 100.00 100.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure The ingredients are dry blended and incorporated into the ice cream formulation. The concentration of stabilizes required depends on many factors, i.e. the higher the solids content of the ice cream formulation, the lower the concentration of stabilizer required.

Food Formulations 269

11. Non-Fat Process Cheese (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Standard Skim Milk Cheese

Wt. % 54.00-56.00

B

Purified Water

See Note 1

C

Non-Fat Dry Milk Solids Sweet Dairy Whey Powder Buttermilk Solids Salt Disodium Phosphate Dihydrate Sodium Citrate NOVAGEL RCN-15 GELCARIN GP 911 SeaKem GP 418 Sorbic Acid

Lactic Acid (10% Solution) APO Caroteneal Solution #73 Annatto Extract Note 1: Sufficient to achieve 58% water in the finished product D

3.80 3.80 3.00 2.10 1.40 0.80 1.00 0.60 0.30 0.10 3.00 0.02 0.02

Mixing Procedure Grind Part A to fine particles. Place Part A in the cooker and start heating. Add Part B and a dry blend of the Part C ingredients. Add the Part D ingredients and cook for about 3 minutes @ 750 C.

270 Rheology Modifier Handbook

C. Desserts 12. Whipped Chocolate Dessert (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient GENULACTA SGI-3F GENU Pectin LM-104AS Powdered Skim Milk Sugar Cocoa Modified Starch Whipping Agent

Wt. % 0.30 0.10 3.00 22.00 4.50 2.00 2.00

Milk (5% Fat Content) Total

66.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with the cold milk(Part B). Preheat to 60-700 C. Homogenize and heat treat at ultra high temperature, 1400 C for 4 sec. Cool to 20-250 C and whip to a density of 0.6gms/ml. Fill into suitable containers.

Food Formulations 271

13. Instant Chocolate Mousse Dry Mix Powder (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient GENUVISCO CSM-2 Whipping Agent Pregelatinized Starch Powdered Sugar Cocoa Total

Wt. % 1.20 36.50 3.50 47.00 11.80 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend all the ingredients and package. Directions for Use Disperse 85 gms. of dry mix in 250 gms. of whole milk using an electric beater at low speed. Whip at highest speed for 2-3 min., pour into serving dishes and refrigerate until served.

272 Rheology Modifier Handbook

14. Low Calorie Whipped Chocolate Dessert (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient GENULACTA LRC-21 GENU Pectin LM-104AS Powdered Skim Milk Aspartame Cocoa Acesulfame -K Whipping Agent

Wt. % 0.50 0.30 4.00 0.03 4.00 0.05 2.00

Skimmed Milk Total

89.12 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with the cold Part B. Preheat to 60-700 C. Homogenize and heat treat at ultra high temperature, 1400 C for 4 seconds. Cool to 20-250 C and whip to a density of 0.6 gms/ml. Fill into suitable containers.

Food Formulations 273

15. 10% Fat Whipped Topping (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 73.78

B

METHOCEL F50 Food Grade

0.75

C

Granulated Sugar Sodium Alginate (Kelgin  LV)

14.96 0.10

D

Partially Hydrogenated Vegetable Oil

E

Polysorbate 60 Sorbitan Monostearate Polysorbate 80

9.96

Total

0.30 0.13 0.02 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 900 C. Disperse Part B in Part A and cool while stirring to 250 C or below. Heat Parts A + B to 500 C. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to A +B. Mix until dissolved. Melt Part D and add it along with the Part E ingredients. Heat the mixture to 650 C and hold for 30 minutes. Homogenize for 10 minutes. Package and freeze. To whip the topping, thaw it and whip at high speed until the desired texture is achieved ( approx. 3 minutes).

274 Rheology Modifier Handbook

16. Frozen Whipped Topping Mix (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 59.70 0.40 0.30 0.02

METHOCEL F50 Food Grade Polysorbate 60 Polysorbate 80

C

Sugar Sodium Alginate (Kelgin LV)

15.08 0.10

D

Partially Hydrogenated Vegetable Oil Sorbitan Monostearate

24.12 0.13

E

Vanilla Artificial Cream Flavor Total

0.10 0.05 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 820 C. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown with stirring. Continue stirring and hold at 820 C for 15 minutes. Cool while stirring in an ice water bath. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to the batch. Reheat to 490 C. Add the Part D ingredients and heat to 650 C for 10 minutes. Do not exceed 680 C! Homogenize for 10 minutes. Add the Part E ingredients and mix for 2 min. Pour into jars and freeze at -180 C. To prepare the topping, thaw the mix and whip it in a high speed mixer to the desired texture.

Food Formulations 275

17. Non-Dairy Whipped Topping (30% Fat) (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

METHOCEL F50 Food Grade METHOCEL K15M Food Grade

C

Granulated Sugar Sodium Alginate

D

Polysorbate 60 Polysorbate 80 Sorbitan Monostearate

E

Partially Hydrogenated Vegetable Oil

Wt. % 49.96 0.15 0.15 19.24 0.05 0.30 0.02 0.15

Total

29.98 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 900 C. Add the Part B ingredients with stirring. Cool while stirring to 250 C or below. Reheat to 500 C. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to the batch. While mixing, add the Part D ingredients in the order shown. Melt Part E and add it to the batch with stirring. Heat to 650 C an hold for 30 minutes. Homogenize for 10 minutes. Package and freeze at -180 C. To prepare the topping, thaw the mix and whip it in a high speed mixer to the desired texture.

276 Rheology Modifier Handbook

18. Ready-to Eat Water Gel Dessert (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Sugar Tripotassium Citrate GELCARIN DG

B

Purified Water

C

Food Color Flavor

D

Adipic Acid

Wt. % 13.30 0.15 0.68 85.57 q.s. q.s.

Total

0.30 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Disperse Part A in Part B with agitation. Add the Part C ingredients and heat the dispersion to 850 C. Add Part D and start packaging within 5 minutes. (Solution can be held @ 850 C for up to 30 minutes in order to complete the packaging process. There will be minimal loss of gel strength).

Food Formulations 277

19. Whipped Topping - Non-Dairy (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation Ingredient Purified Water AVICEL CL-611

Wt. % 60.00 0.40-0.60

B

GELCARIN GP-359 Sucrose

0.01-0.05 7.00

C

Sodium Caseinate

2.50

D

Corn Syrup

5.00

A

24.00 0.30 0.12 Total see note 1 Note 1: The amounts in this column do not total 100% but they are the exact values presented in the supplier’s literature. E

Hydrogenated Vegetable Fat Polysorbate 60 (Tween 60) Myverol 18

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients with rapid agitation. Dry blend the Part B ingredients and disperse them in Part A with continuous agitation. Add Part C and heat the batch to 630 C. Add Part D. Separately heat and mix the Part E ingredients and add them to the batch with continuous agitation. Pasteurize at 71-770 C for 30 minutes. Homogenize and cool to 2-50 C. Age for 24 hours.

278 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Whipped Topping - Dairy Type (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation Ingredient Purified Water AVICEL CL-611

Wt. % 59.00 0.40-0.60

B

GELCARIN GP-359 Sucrose

0.01-0.05 6.00

C

Non-Fat Milk Solids

5.00

D

Corn Syrup

6.00

E

Polysorbate 60 (Tween 60) Myverol 18

0.30 0.15

F

Milk Fat ( Cream)

A

20.00 Total see note 1 Note 1: The amounts in this column do not total 100% but they are the exact values presented in the supplier’s literature. Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients with rapid agitation. Dry blend the Part B ingredients and disperse them in Part A with continuous agitation. Add Part C and heat the batch to 630 C. Add Part D. Separately heat and mix the Part E ingredients and add them to the batch with continuous agitation. Add Part F with agitation. Pasteurize at 71-770 C for 30 minutes. Homogenize and cool to 2-50 C. Age for 24 hours.

Food Formulations 279

21. Drinkable Dessert Gel (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient High Fructose Corn Syrup or Sucrose GELCARIN DG 425B Sodium Citrate Color Flavor

B

Purified Water

C

Adipic Acid

Wt. % 15.30 0.40 0.15 0.48 0.24 83.13

Total

0.30 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Add Part A to Part B with agitation and heat to 850 C. Hold at that temperature for 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix for 1 minute. Pour into containers and cool to room temperature.

280 Rheology Modifier Handbook

22. Custard-Type Dry Mix (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient SeaGel FL644L Sugar Non-Fat Milk Solids Spray-Dried Emulsified Fat Cocoa Salt Sodium Hexametaphosphate Total

Grams/Pkg. 1.24 55.00 50.00 10.00 7.00 0.30 0.50 124.04

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients thoroughly. To prepare the custard, add 124.04 gms. of the dry blend to 475 ml. water with stirring. Cook over medium heat for about 5 minutes. Pour into glasses or molds and allow to cool and set.

Food Formulations 281

D. Processed Foods 23. Chicken Frankfurters (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredie nt Chicken MDM

B

Sodium Tripolyphosphate Nitrite Salt (0.6% NaNO2) Water/Ice

C

GENUGEL ME-83 Soy Protein (Danpro-S) Spices

D

Water/Ice

E

Potato Starch Sodium Ascorbate

F

Chicken Skin with Fat

Wt. % 40.00 0.30 1.80 18.00 0.40 2.00 0.40 17.00 2.00 0.05

Total

18.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Transfer the chicken to a bowl chopper. While chopping, add the ingredients in Part B. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add to Parts A + B while chopping. Add Parts D, E and F to the mix while chopping. Continue chopping until the desired consistency is achieved. Fill the mince into sterile casings. Cook @ 900 C until a center temperature of 750 C is reached in the sausage. Chill with a cold water spray for 30 minutes. If smoking is to be used; before cooking, dry for 15 minutes @ 550 C and smoke at 600 C and 60% R.H. for 15 minutes.

282 Rheology Modifier Handbook

24. Chicken Bologna (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Pork Fat Beef Fat Caseinate

Wt. % 8.50 8.50 1.00

B

Boiling Water Salt

C

Chicken MDM Sodium Tripolyphosphate

50.00 0.50

GENUGEL ME-83 Powdered Skin Milk Dextrose Soy Protein (Danpro-S) Potato Starch Mustard Dried Onion Garlic Powder Smoke Flavor Sodium Ascorbate

0.70 1.00 1.40 0.70 1.50 1.40 0.70 0.10 0.40 0.05

D

E

8.50 1.40

Water/Ice Total

13.65 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the pork and beef fat and mince through a 33 mm cutting plate. Transfer to a bowl chopper and add the caseinate at low speed. Increase the speed of the chopper. Add the boiling water and the salt after 2 minutes. Continue mixing until the emulsion is firm and homogeneous. Cool and store cold until the next day. Transfer the chicken to the bowl chopper and add the other Part C ingredient at low speed. (continued next page)

Food Formulations 283

24. Chicken Bologna, continued Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the bowl chopper. Add Part E in two steps. Add the Part A + B emulsion and continue mixing and chopping until the desired consistency is achieved. Fill into sterile casings. Cook @ 750 C until a center temperature of 720 C is reached. Chill with a cold water spray until center temperature is below 300 C

25. Chicken Breast Roll (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Sodium Tripolyphosphate

Wt. % 30.13 0.40

B

Salt

1.60

C

GENUGEL CHP-2 or ME-38 Dextrose Chicken Flavor

0.33 0.74 0.13

D

Chicken Breast Meat Total

66.67 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until the phosphate is dissolved. Dissolve Part B in Part A. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add to Parts A + B. Increase the surface area of Part D using a roller-tenderizer. Transfer Parts A - D to a vacuum tumbler and evacuate air until a 90% vacuum is achieved. Massage at 14 rpm for 30 minutes then at 8 rpm for 60 minutes. Stuff the drained meat into artificial casings or laminate bags (cook-in-bag). Heat the product at 750 C until the internal temperature reaches 720 C. Cool the product using direct water spray and store at 50 C.

284 Rheology Modifier Handbook

26. Low Fat Bologna (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Mechanically Deboned Meat Sodium Tripolyphosphate

Wt. % 50.00 0.30 0.70 2.00 0.70 0.50 1.00

GENUGEL ME-83 Salt Dextrose Powdered Skim Milk Soy Protein (Danpro-S) or Pork Protein (Drinde) Gluten Protein

C

Water/Ice

D

Spices Pepper Potato Starch

1.00 41.70

Total

0.50 0.10 1.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add the Part A ingredients to a bowl chopper and mix thoroughly. Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add to Part A along with half of Part C. Continue mixing and add the remainder of Part C. Dry blend and add the Part D ingredients and continue mixing until the desired consistency is achieved. Transfer the mix to a filling machine and fill into suitable casings. Cook at 750 C until the internal temperature reaches 720 C. Cool the product using direct water spray to 300 C and store at 50 C or less.

Food Formulations 285

27. Soy Patties - Cold Process (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water (at 2-50 C) Texturized Soy Protein Concentrate

Wt. % 10.73 20.74

Wheat Gluten Functional Soy Protein Concentrate METHOCEL A40M Purified Water (at 2-50 C)

4.74 3.12 0.75 50.00

C

Dried Molasses Salt Autolyzed Yeast Minces Onion Garlic Powder Grill Flavor Mace Coriander Ground Black Pepper

D

Vegetable Oil

1.62 0.75 0.75 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.04 0.04 0.04

Total

5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in a bowl type mixer at low speed for 5 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients and mix at low speed for 10 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients and mix 3 min. Add Part D and mix 2 minutes. Chill, if necessary to 50 C or lower. Form into patties, parcook, freeze and package.

286 Rheology Modifier Handbook

E. Sauces, Gravies and Glazes 28. Low-Fat Cheese Sauce (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Cheese Powder (SHARP-EE) Non-Fat Dry Milk Powder Starch (Thin ‘n Thik) METHOCEL A4C Food Grade Mustard Powder Garlic Powder Onion Powder White Pepper Paprika

Wt. % 11.00 9.00 1.70 0.30 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10

Purified Water

77.50 Total

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly dry blend the Part A ingredients. Mix Part A with Part B using a wire whisk. Cook over medium heat for 5 minutes. Allow the sauce to cool for 30 minutes.

Food Formulations 287

29. Newberg Sauce (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

AVICEL RC-591F

C

Xanthan Gum

D

Starch

Wt. % 87.25-88.65* 0.30-0.70 0.05 1.00-2.00

Corn Oil Non-Fat Dry Milk Hydrolyzed Plant Protein Monosodium Glutamate Sugar Salt Tetrasodium Pyrophosphate Onion Powder Polysorbate 60 Oleoresin Paprika Pepper, Fine Ground Celery Powder Sherry Flavor

3.68 3.09 0.78 0.66 0.55 E 0.50 0.27 0.27 0.10 0.05 0.02 0.02 0.01 Total 100.00 * After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix using rapid agitation for 7 minutes. Slurry Part D in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part E ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill. (continued next page)

288 Rheology Modifier Handbook

29. Newberg Sauce, continued Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package.

30. White Sauce (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation Ingredient A Purified Water

Wt. % 83.46-84.86*

B

AVICEL RC-591F

0.30-0.70

C

Starch

1.00-2.00

Corn Oil Non-Fat Dry Milk Hydrolyzed Plant Protein Monosodium Glutamate D

3.77 7.34 0.81 0.67

Salt Tetrasodium Pyrophosphate Onion Flavor Polysorbate 60 Celery (Ground) Turmeric

0.55 0.28 0.28 0.10 0.03 0.01 Total 100.00 * After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Slurry Part C in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part D ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill. Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package.

Food Formulations 289

31. Barbecue Sauce (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 29.49-30.82*

B

AVICEL RC-591F

0.33-0.66

C

Starch

1.00-2.00

Tomato Paste Vinegar (50 grain distilled) Lemon Juice Brown Sugar Salt Onion Powder Paprika

37.95 12.66 8.07 D 5.65 2.42 0.80 0.30 Total 100.00 * After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Slurry Part C in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part D ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill. Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package.

290 Rheology Modifier Handbook

32. Barbecue Sauce A (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Tomato Paste Brown Sugar Cider Vinegar Oil Salt METHOCEL A15 Food Grade Spices Hickory Flavor Starch (Instant Clearjel) Xanthan Gum Total

Wt. % 37.04 24.52 15.61 12.72 4.23 2.38 1.36 1.07 0.56 0.47 0.04 100.00

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended mixing procedures.

Food Formulations 291

33. Barbecue Sauce B (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation Ingredient Purified Water Tomato Paste Brown Sugar Cider Vinegar Soy Sauce Oil Salt METHOCEL A15 Food Grade Spices Hickory Flavor Modified Starch (Thermflo) White Sugar Total

Wt. % 27.95 25.07 7.34 19.72 4.48 1.79 1.79 1.36 1.21 1.79 0.18 7.34 100.00

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended mixing procedures.

292 Rheology Modifier Handbook

34. Brown Gravy (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

AVICEL RC-591F

C

Xanthan Gum

D

Starch

Wt. % 83.23-84.63* 0.30-0.70 0.50 1.00-2.00

Malto-Dextrin Hydrolyzed Plant Protein Hydrolyzed Plant Protein Non-Fat Dry Milk Salt Toasted Onion Powder Caramel Color White Pepper

4.00 3.25 2.20 E 1.75 1.50 0.60 0.25 0.02 Total 100.00 * After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix using rapid agitation for 7 minutes. Slurry Part D in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part E ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill. Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package.

Food Formulations 293

35. Fish Glaze (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Dextrose Malto-Dextrin (M040) Seafood Flavor Starch (Tender Jel 480) Salt METHOCEL K100M Food Grade Orange Powder Paprika Garlic Powder Parsley Powder Dried Green Onions Black Pepper, Ground

B

Purified Water

Wt. % 10.00 8.16 4.70 2.70 1.36 1.36 0.85 0.68 0.68 0.27 0.20 0.20

Total

68.84 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Add Part A to Part B with high speed mixing. Continue mixing for 15 minutes. After mixing, allow the glaze to stand for 10 minutes before use.

294 Rheology Modifier Handbook

36. Liquid Lemon Butter Glaze (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Dextrose Malto-Dextrin (M100) Butter Flavor Modified Starch Salt METHOCEL K100M Food Grade Lemon Powder Dill Weed Garlic Powder Onion Powder Black Pepper, Ground Wheat Flour Color

B

Vegetable Oil

C

Purified Water

Wt. % 2.04 13.59 2.10 1.74 2.40 1.80 1.20 0.15 1.02 0.27 0.18 1.77 q.s. 1.74

Total

70.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Add Part B to Part A and mix thoroughly. Add Parts A + B to Part C in a bowl-type mixer with high speed mixing. Continue mixing for 5 minutes. After mixing, allow the glaze to stand until the METHOCEL is fully hydrated.

Food Formulations 295

F. Other Foods 37. Cream of Chicken Soup (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Purified Water Whole Milk Modified Starch (Consista)

Wt. % 49.69 26.11 2.53

Vegetable Oil Chicken Bouillon Margarine Salt Pepper (Ground) METHOCEL A4C Food Grade

2.11 1.81 1.47 0.21 0.08 0.20

Chicken Meat (Cooked and Cubed) Total

15.79 100.00

Mixing Procedure Blend the Part A ingredients in a pan on low heat for 2 minutes. Mix the Part B ingredients together and add them to Part A. Mix for 2.5 minutes. Add Part C and heat to boiling, stirring constantly. Simmer for 10 minutes. Chill overnight and reheat to serving temperature.

296 Rheology Modifier Handbook

38. Italian Dressing (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Vegetable Oil White Vinegar (5% Acidity) Purified Water

Wt. % 47.22 25.87 25.87

VISCARIN SD 339 Spices, Seasoning (Seasoning Mix #9849-A-36)

0.52 0.52 Total

100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients until thoroughly mixed. Add the Part B ingredients and mix until the dressing thickens.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 297

2. Pharmaceutical Formulations A. Therapeutic Creams 1. Antibiotic Cream I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 1382

C

Polymyxin B Sulfate

10.00

Mineral Oil Sorbitan Oleate Methylparaben Propylparaben

15.00 0.50 0.10 0.01

Tromethamine

0.30 100.00

D

E

Wt. % 72.09 2.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm, add Part C to Parts A + B and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. with rapid agitation. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.

298 Rheology Modifier Handbook

2. Antibiotic Cream II (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 1382

2.00

C

Neomycin Sulfate Polymyxin B Sulfate

0.50 0.07

D

Mineral Oil Sorbitan Oleate Methylparaben Propylparaben Glycerol

E

Tromethamine

Wt. % 70.82

15.00 0.50 0.10 0.01 10.00

Total

1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm, add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch with rapid agitation. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 299

3. Analgesic Cream (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water PEMULEN TR-1 NF CARBOPOL 940 NF

Wt. % 54.02 0.30 0.05

B

Camphor

C

Methyl Salicylate Menthol Eucalyptus Oil

18.00 5.00 2.50

D

Cetyl Alcohol

10.00

E

Propylene Glycol Methylparaben Propylparaben

F

Sodium Hydroxide

5.00

5.00 0.12 0.01

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Blend the dry ingredients in Part A and slowly sift them into the water while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (8001500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add Part B to Part A while mixing. Combine the Part C ingredients. Melt Part D at 500 C and combine the Part D ingredients. Mix Parts C, D and E. Heat Parts A + B to 500 C Add the mixture of Parts C, D and E to the batch. with good agitation. Neutralize with Part F and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.

300 Rheology Modifier Handbook

4. 10% TEA Salicylate Cream (International Specialty Products) Formulation

A

Ingredient Glyceryl Stearate Cetyl Alcohol Cetyl Phosphate (and) DEA Cetyl Phosphate Stearyl Stearoyl Stearate Coco-Caprylate/Caprate Cetyl Palmitate Dimethicone

Wt. % 5.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 0.50

B

Purified Water

C

Magnesium Aluminum Silicate Xanthan Gum

0.55 0.25

D

Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00

E

50.20

Purified Water Trolamine Salicylate (TEA Salicylate) Propylene Glycol Total

10.00 10.00 5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part B to 850C. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to Part B with rapid agitation. Continue mixing at 850C until smooth and uniform. Add the Part A ingredients to Parts B+C at 850C. Continue mixing and cool to 600C. Add Parts D and E in that order and continue mixing while cooling to 350C.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 301

5. Burn/Bite Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

VEEGUM 

1.50

C

Propylene Glycol Dimethicone

3.00 0.20

D

Wt. % 56.80

Mineral Oil Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol Menthol USP Benzocaine USP C18-36 Acid Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate Polysorbate 60 Preservative Total

10.00 17.00 1.00 5.00 3.00 12.00 0.50 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A with rapid agitation. Continue mixing until the dispersion is smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and mix while heating to 75-800C. Separately mix and heat the Part D ingredients, keeping the Benzocaine suspended, to 75-800C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing and begin cooling. Package at 400C.

302 Rheology Modifier Handbook

6. Anti-Inflammatory Cream (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 1382

C

Mineral Oil Sorbitan Oleate Methylparaben Propylparaben Betamethasone Dipropionate

D

Tromethamine

Wt. % 83.64 0.70 15.00 0.50 0.10 0.01 0.05

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part C ingredients and add the mixture to the batch with rapid agitation. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 303

7. Calamine Cream I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 32.00

B

CARBOPOL 1382

C

Diazolidinyl Urea Propylene Glycol

0.50 15.00

D

Ethanol Lidocaine Camphor

15.00 1.00 6.30

E

Mineral Oil Sorbitan Oleate Calamine

15.00 0.50 8.00

F

Cetyl Alcohol

5.00

G

Fragrance

1.50

Total

0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B with good mixing. Separately combine the Part D ingredients, add them to the batch and continue mixing for about 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part E ingredients. Melt Part F at 500C and add it to the Part E mixture. Add Parts E + F to the batch with good mixing. Add Part G and mix well. Author’s note; The supplier of this formula appears to have omitted the Neutralizing Agent that is normally required for CARBOPOL Resins.

304 Rheology Modifier Handbook

8. Calamine Cream II (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation Ingredient Purified Water Glycerin

Wt. % 65.30 10.00

B

Methylparaben Propylparaben

0.18 0.02

C

AVICEL RC-591

2.00

D

Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate Cetyl Alcohol

E

Zinc Oxide Calamine

A

10.00 2.50

Total

5.00 5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients together and heat to 750C. Add the Part B ingredients and mix until dissolved. Maintain the batch temperature @ 750C. Gradually add Part C to Parts A + B while mixing for 15 minutes or until Part C is homogeneously dispersed. Remove the heat and add the Part D ingredients with good mixing. Gradually add the Part E ingredients and continue mixing until uniformly dispersed. Adequate dispersion of the Part E ingredients was achieved with a propeller mixer. If the dispersion is not deemed adequate, an homogenizer or colloid mill may be used to improve it.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 305

9. Benzoyl Peroxide Acne Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient VEEGUM HV

B

Purified Water

C

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose

D

Ethyl Alcohol (SDA40) Propylene Glycol Laureth-4

E

Wt. % 2.00 38.35 1.50 30.00 6.00 5.00

Benzoyl Peroxide, 70% Paste Purified Water Total

7.15 10.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part A to Part B with good agitation and mix the dispersion continually until smooth and uniform. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until a uniform slurry is achieved. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until the batch is smooth and uniform. Mix the Part E ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Pass the resulting cream through a 3-roll mill several times to reduce the benzoyl peroxide particle size to a point where any grittiness is eliminated.

306 Rheology Modifier Handbook

10. Athlete’s Foot Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

VEEGUM

C

Sorbitol, 70% Polysorbate 80 Zinc Undecylenate

D

Caprylic Acid C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate Sorbitan Oleate C18-36 Acid Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate

E

Preservative

Wt. % 48.75 0.75 10.00 1.00 20.00 5.00 3.00 1.50 2.00 8.00 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A with rapid agitation. Continue mixing until the dispersion is smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform while heating to 70-750C. Separately mix and heat the Part D ingredients. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing and begin cooling. At 400C, add Part E

Pharmaceutical Formulations 307

B. Therapeutic Gels 11. Benzoyl Peroxide + Alpha-Bisabolol Gel (BASF Aktiengesellshaft) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

Carbomer 940

1.00

Alpha-Bisabolol (BASF) Propylene Glycol NF Triethanolamine PEG-40 Hydrogenated Castor Oil (Cremophor RH-40) KOLLIDON 30 Purified Water

0.20 6.00 1.00 3.00

C

D

Wt. % 40.00

3.00 40.80

Benzoyl Peroxide Total

5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure

Add Part B to Part A with good mixing and stir for 1 hour. Separate mix the Part C ingredients until the solution is uniform. Add Parts A + B to Part C with good mixing. Add Part D and mix until uniform.

308 Rheology Modifier Handbook

12. Surgical Lubricant Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 95.50

B

CARBOPOL 980 NF

1.00

C

Chlorhexidine Digluconate (20%)

1.50

D

Tromethamine Total

2.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add Part C and mix 30 minutes. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 309

13. Anti-Inflammatory Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Che micals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 92.00

B

CARBOPOL 934P NF

2.00

C

Ketoprofen

2.00

D

Tromethamine Total

4.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add Part C and mix. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.

310 Rheology Modifier Handbook

14. Analgesic Gel (American Distilling & Manufacturing, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

Sodium Magnesium Silicate

C

Ethyl Alcohol (SD39C) Isopropyl Myristate Menthol Camphor Distilled Witch Hazel Extract (14% Alcohol) Total

Wt. % 33.75 2.50 25.00 5.00 6.00 3.25 24.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with high shear. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix until smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 311

15. Antiseptic Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 93.80

B

CARBOPOL 934P NF

2.00

C

Povidone-Iodine

2.00

D

Tromethamine Total

2.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part C to Part A and mix for 30-45 minutes. Slowly sift in Part B and mix for 30-45 minutes. Neutralize with Part D.

312 Rheology Modifier Handbook

16. Keratolytic Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 980 NF

C

Ethanol Salicylic Acid

D

Ethomeen

Wt. % 51.00 3.00 44.00 2.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients together until the acid dissolves. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 313

17. Antipruritic Gel I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 940 NF

2.00

C

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride Disodium EDTA

0.05

D

Wt. % 96.70

NaOH (18% Solution) Total

1.25 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in order to Parts A + B and mix. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.

314 Rheology Modifier Handbook

18. Antipruritic Gel II (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 940 NF

2.00

C

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride Disodium EDTA

1.00 0.05

D

E

Wt. % 65.84

Ethanol Camphor Methylparaben Propylparaben

30.00 0.50 0.10 0.01

Trolamine Total

0.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, to Parts A + B and mix. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until the solids dissolve. Add Part D to the batch and mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes until the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 315

19. Icy Blue Camphorated Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water Disodium EDTA CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

Wt. % 86.06 0.10 0.90

Isopropyl Alcohol Camphor Polysorbate 20 Methylparaben FD&C Blue No. 1 (5% Solution) Triethanolamine (99%)

10.00 0.20 1.00 0.20 0.04 1.50 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Dissolve the Disodium EDTA in the Part A water heated to 25-450C. Slowly sift in the CARBOPOL resin. After the resin is thoroughly wetted, mix at slow speed. Separately combine the Part B ingredients and add the mixture to Part A with a moderate sweeping agitation until a clear gel is formed.

316 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Conductive Skin Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Purified Water CARBOPOL ETD 2001 Potassium Hydroxide (20% Solution) Propylene Glycol Purified Water Disodium EDTA Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (2.00% Solution of CMC 9M31F PH) Potassium Hydroxide (20% Solution) Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and)Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben Total

Wt. % 67.40 0.75 0.05 10.00 10.00 0.05 10.00 0.75 1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift the CARBOPOL resin into the Part A water while mixing at about 500-800 rpm. Add the remaining Part A ingredients and mix until uniform. Prepare a 2.00% aqueous solution of CMC and add it to the Part B water. Add to this the remaining Part B ingredients. Add Part B to Part A and mix until a smooth, clear gel is formed. Add Part C and mix until uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 317

21. Vaginal Moisturizer (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water CARBOPOL 971P NF NOVEON AA-1 USP

B

Glycerin Sorbic Acid

C

Trolamine

Wt. % 47.85 0.50 0.50 50.00 0.50

Total

0.65 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part B ingredients. Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part C and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.

318 Rheology Modifier Handbook

22. Vegetable Slimming Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

Wt. % 76.95 1.00

B

Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and)Ethyl paraben(and)Propylparaben(and)Butylparaben Nettle Extract Calendula Extract Witch Hazel Extract

2.00 3.00 2.00

C

Ethanol PEG-4- Hydrogenated Castor Oil Fragrance

5.00 0.40 0.05

D

Propylene Glycol Dimethicone Copolyol Wax

6.10 1.0

E

Sodium Hydroxide (18% Solution) Total

0.50

2.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the CARBOPOL resin in the Part A water heated to 25-450C. After the resin is wetted, mix slowly at low speed. Add the Part B ingredients with slow mixing. Separately mix the Part C and the Part D ingredients and add them, in order, to the batch. Neutralize with Part E and mix until a uniform gel forms.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 319

C. Therapeutic Lotions 23. Calamine Lotion (Southern Clay Products, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 79.30

B

GELWHITE H NF

2.00

C

Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7LF)

0.20

D

Glycerin

2.50

E

Calamine Zinc Oxide Total

8.00 8.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B slowly to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Add Part C and mix at moderate speed until well mixed. Add Part D and mix at medium speed. Slowly add the Part E ingredients with moderate agitation and mix until smooth and uniform.

320 Rheology Modifier Handbook

24. Poison Ivy Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 79.65

B

VEEGUM Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (Medium Viscosity)

1.50 0.30

C

Zirconium Oxide Propylene Glycol

4.00 5.00

Isopropyl Alcohol Benzocaine Menthol Preservative

8.00 1.50 0.05 q.s. 100.00

D

Total

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B with rapid mixing. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B + C with rapid mixing.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 321

25. 5% Benzoyl Peroxide Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 75.55

B

VEEGUM Xanthan Gum

0.90 0.40

C

Propylene Glycol Benzoyl Peroxide (70% Paste)

6.00 7.15

D

Laureth-4 Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol

A

Total

5.00 5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear until smooth and uniform. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and pass the mixture through a mill until smooth and uniform. Combine Part C with the Part D ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Continue mixing until the batch is smooth and uniform.

322 Rheology Modifier Handbook

26. Tea Tree Oil Acne Lotion (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Disodium EDTA Glycerin Propylene Glycol

Wt. % 85.30 0.05 1.00 2.00

B

PEMULEN TR-1 NF CARBOPOL 974P NF Tea Tree Oil (Pharmaceutical Grade) Mineral Oil PPG-20 Methyl Glucose Ether

0.25 0.30 4.00 3.50 1.50

C

Triethanolamine (99%)

0.50

D

Fragrance Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and)Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben Total

0.80 0.80 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while agitating @ 1000 rpm. Mix for 10-15 minutes. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until homogeneous.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 323

D. Therapeutic Suspensions 27. Ibuprofen Suspension (BASF Aktiengesellshaft) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Ibuprofen Crosspovidone (KOLLIDON CL-M) Purified Water KOLLIDON 90F Sucrose Sodium Citrate Purified Water

Grams 4.00 8.00 40.00 2.00 25.00 2.00 to 100 ml

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part B ingredients until the solids are dissolved. Disperse the Part A ingredients in Part B in the order shown. Add Part C and mix until uniform.

324 Rheology Modifier Handbook

28. Magaldrate Suspension (BASF Aktiengesellshaft) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water Magaldrate USP Crosspovidone (KOLLIDON CL-M) KOLLIDON 90F Orange Flavor Coconut Flavor Banana Flavor Saccharin Sodium Preservative

Grams to 100 ml 10.00 8.00 2.00 1.00 0.05 0.08 0.02 q.s.

Mixing Procedure

Dissolve or disperse all of the Part B ingredients in Part A under aseptic conditions.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 325

29. Antibiotic Suspension (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Ampicillin Trihydrate

Wt. % 5.77

B

AVICEL CL-611 Xanthan Gum Sucrose

2.25 0.20 17.50

C

Potassium Sorbate Sodium Citrate Citric Acid

0.10 0.91 0.09

D

Sucrose FD&C Red #40

17.50 0.01

E

Purified Water

55.67 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Screen Part A through a #50 U.S. Standard sieve. Place Parts A in a Vshaped blender. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and blend 3 minutes after each addition. Blend the Part C ingredients and then mill using a Wiley mill. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and Part C and add them to the V blender. Mix 9 minutes. Mix the Blend of Parts A, B, C & D with Part E to produce a uniform suspension.

326 Rheology Modifier Handbook

30. Antacid Suspension I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 934P NF

C

D

Wt. % 26.67 0.20

Glycerin Sorbitol Magaldrate Simethicone

30.00 30.00 10.80 0.80

Sorbitan Oleate Sodium Citrate Peppermint Oil Total

0.50 1.00 0.03 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix together the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch and mix for 15-20 minutes or until the batch is smooth and uniform. Author’s note; The supplier of this formula appears to have omitted the Neutralizing Agent that is normally required for CARBOPOL Resins.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 327

31. Antacid Suspension II (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Methylparaben Propylparaben

Wt. % 56.49 0.10 0.01

B

AVICEL RC-591 NF

0.90

C

Xanthan Gum

0.10

D

Sorbitol (70%) Aluminum Hydroxide Compressed Gel Magnesium Hydroxide Paste Total

5.00 24.46 12.94 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until the solids dissolve. Slowly add Part B while mixing. Mix until Part B is fully dispersed. Add Part C while mixing. Mix until fully dissolved. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

328 Rheology Modifier Handbook

32. Alumina + Magnesia Antacid (Monsanto-Kelco Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Sorbitol (70%)

B

KELTROL

0.15

C

Saccharin Sodium Potassium Citrate Methylparaben

0.20 0.10 0.15

D

Aluminum Hydroxide Gel Magnesium Hydroxide

E

Flavor

Wt. % 48.40 15.00

25.00 11.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 2 minutes and add Part B. Mix for 5 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B and mix for 5 minutes. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each for 2 minutes before adding the next one. Add Part E and mix 10 minutes.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 329

33. Antacid Suspension III (R. T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A B

C

D

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 40.10 0.50 0.20

VEEGUM HS Xanthan Gum Sorbitol (70%) Aluminum Hydroxide Gel Magnesium Hydroxide

20.00 36.00 3.20

Preservative Flavor Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part D ingredients. Mix until smooth and uniform.

330 Rheology Modifier Handbook

34. Kaolin- Pectin Suspens ion I (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

GELWHITE GP Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MF)

C

Kaolin USP

D

Pectin Saccharin Sodium Glycerin

E

Wt. % 75.60 1.00 0.20

20.12 1.00 0.08 2.00

Flavor Preservative Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend Part B and slowly add it to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part C and mix until smooth and uniform. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part E ingredients and mix until smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 331

35. Kaolin- Pectin Suspension II (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 72.85

B

AVICEL RC-591 NF

0.90

C

Xanthan Gum

0.10

D

Kaolin USP Pectin USP

0.40 0.40

E

Kaolin USP

18.60

F

Glycerin

G

Purified Water Sodium Benzoate Potassium Sorbate

2.00

Total

4.65 0.05 0.05 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A and mix until Part B is fully dispersed. Slowly add Part C and mix until Part C is fully dissolved. Heat the batch to 70-80 0C. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until the pectin is fully dissolved. Remove the heat and add Part E and F in that order, mixing each until uniform. Separately mix the Part G ingredients until the solids dissolve and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform.

332 Rheology Modifier Handbook

36. Antidiarrheal Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 934P NF

C

Sorbitol Kaolin Pectin

20.00 20.00 0.50

Ethanol Atrophine Sulfate Citric Acid Methylparaben

3.80 <0.01 1.00 0.20

D

E

Wt. % 51.20 0.30

Sodium Hydroxide (18%) Total

3.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix together the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 333

37. Antidiarrheal Oral Suspension R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. Formulation

A B

C

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 96.25

VEEGUM K Xanthan Gum

1.20 0.40

Bismuth Subsalicylate, Powder Methylparaben Propylparaben Saccharin Sodium Salicylic Acid Total

1.75 0.20 0.10 0.10 1.75 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniformly dispersed or dissolved.

334 Rheology Modifier Handbook

38. Antiflatulent Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 971 NF

C

Glycerin Propylene Glycol Simethicone

D

Wt. % 58.94 0.20 20.00 20.00 0.80

Sodium Hydroxide (18%) Color Total

0.06 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix together the Part C ingredients. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 335

39. Calamine and Zinc Oxide Astringent Suspension (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 80.99

B

AVICEL RC-591

0.80

C

Methylparaben NF Propylparaben NF

0.10 0.01

D

Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MF)

0.10

E

Glycerin USP

2.00

F

Calamine USP

8.00

G

Zinc Oxide USP Total

8.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A and mix until Part B is fully dispersed. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until dissolved. Add Part D and mix until dissolved. Slowly add Parts E, F and G in the order shown, mixing each until fully dispersed before adding the next one. Pass the batch through a colloid mill with 0.01 inch clearance for 5 minutes.

336 Rheology Modifier Handbook

40. Anesthetic Tooth Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 974P NF

C

Benzocaine

D

Trolamine

Wt. % 72.70 3.00 20.00

Total

4.30 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Slowly add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 337

41. Analgesic Oral Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 974P NF

C

Wt. % 76.44 0.30

Sorbitol Glycerin Acetaminophen Ethanol Polysorbate 80 Saccharin Sodium

D

FD&C Blue #2 Peppermint Oil

E

Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

15.00 0.20 3.00 5.00 0.05 0.01 q.s. q.s.

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the color in Part D to a small amount of water and add it to the batch followed by the flavor. Mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.

338 Rheology Modifier Handbook

E. Other Pharmaceutical Formulations 42. Antipruritic Spray (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 941 NF

C

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride Ethanol Glycerin

D

Aminomethyl Propanol

Wt. %

0.50 2.00 60.00 10.00

Total

0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B, in the order shown, with good mixing. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.

Pharmaceutical Formulations 339

43. Antimicrobial Liquid Hand Soap (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2020

C

Wt. % 67.85 0.15

Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (30%) Cocamidopropyl Betaine (Incronam 30) Cocamide DEA (Standamid  KD) Sodium Lauroyl Sarcosinate (Hamposyl L-30)

D

1,2 Propanediol Triclosan

E

Perfume

20.00 3.50 2.00 5.00

0.50 0.50

Total

0.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 50-600C. Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800 rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 30 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B, in the order shown, with moderate agitation. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Cool to 30-400C and mix for 2 hours. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous.

340 Rheology Modifier Handbook

3. Personal Care Formulations A. Antiperspirants 1. Suspension Roll-On (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient BENTONE GEL VS-5 Cyclomethicone (DC 344) Cyclomethicone (DC 245) Dimethicone (DC 200, 50 cstk.)

B

Aluminum Zirconium Tetrachlorohydrex GLY (Reach AZP 908)

C

Fragrance

Wt. % 15.00 44.95 17.50 2.50 20.00

Total

0.05 100.00

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly mix the Part A ingredients using high shear mixing, i.e., a homogenizer. Transfer the batch to a paddle stirrer and slowly add Part B. Mix until uniform. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous.

Personal Care Formulations 341

2. Roll-On Antiperspirant (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water GELWHITE GP

Wt. % 26.00 2.00

Isopropyl Myristate PPG-15 Stearyl Ether (ArlamolE) Sorbitan Oleate Polysorbate 80 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate Mineral Oil(and)Lanolin Alcohol

15.00 5.00 2.00 2.00 3.00 5.00

C

Aluminum Chlorohydrate (50%)

40.00

D

Preservative

B

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth. Heat Part A to 65-700C. Combine the Part B ingredients and heat them to 65-700C. Add Part B to Part A slowly and mix until uniform. Add Part C to Parts A + B with slow speed mixing. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add Part D and mix until uniform.

342 Rheology Modifier Handbook

3. Roll-On Antiperspirant Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water VEEGUM  HV

B

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose

0.40

Ethanol SD40 PPG-15 Stearyl Ether (ArlamolE) Cyclomethicone Oleth-10

8.00 1.00 3.00 1.00

C

D

Aluminum Chlorohydrate (50%)

E

Preservative

Wt. % 49.60 1.00

36.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part B slowly and mix until dissolved. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Add Parts D and E in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 343

B. Color Cosmetics 4. Creamy Blusher (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Stearic Acid Propylene Glycol Stearate SE (Lexemul P) Glyceryl Stearate (Lexemul 515) Candellia Wax Ozakorite Beeswax Dimethicone (DC 200) Mineral Oil Myristyl Myristate Propylparaben Deionized Water Titanium Dioxide Yellow Iron Oxide Red Iron Oxide Deionized Water Triethanolamine Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) Simethicone (Antifoam AF)

(Formulation continued on the following page)

Wt. % 3.00 2.00 1.50 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.50 6.00 2.00 0.10 63.35 5.00 2.00 1.50 2.00 1.50 0.10 0.05

344 Rheology Modifier Handbook

4. Creamy Blusher, continued

D

Ingredient Propylene Glycol METHOCEL40-202 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum) Phenoxyethanol Methylparaben Total

Wt. % 5.00 0.20 0.50 0.50 0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Weigh the Part A ingredients into a suitable vessel equipped with a mixer. Heat the mixture to 820C and mix until uniform. Separately add the Part B powders to the water and grind until uniformly dispersed. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until smooth and uniform. Add Part D to Part B and mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients to the batch and mix while heating the water phase to 800C. Add the heated Part A to heated Parts B + C + D and mix until a homogeneous emulsion is formed.

Personal Care Formulations 345

5. Water-Resistant Sport Tint (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 70.40

B

VEEGUM Ultra Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel)

1.60 0.40

C

Propylene Glycol

5.00

Iron Oxides Manganese Violet Talc Titanium Dioxide

0.67 0.10 4.27 6.96

Isocetyl Alcohol Octyl Methoxycinnamate Mineral Oil(and)Lanolin Alcohol (Ritacol) Oleth-3-Phosphate (Crodafos  N-3 Neutral)

3.00 3.00 2.00 2.20

D

E

F

Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-90) Preservative, Fragrance Total

1.40 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with a propeller stirrer at 1700 rpm. Mix for 25 minutes. Slow the mixer to 850 rpm and add Part C. Dry blend the Part D ingredients until uniform and grind, if necessary. Slowly add Part D to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Separately mix the Part E ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.

346 Rheology Modifier Handbook

6. Non-streaking Makeup with Sunscreen (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation Ingredient A Deionized Water B

C

D

E

F

Wt. % 50.30

LAPONITE XLG Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F)

0.20 0.30

Tetrasodium EDTA Triethanolamine (99%) Propylene Glycol Polyglycerylmethacrylate(and)Propylene Glycol

0.10 0.50 3.00 5.00

Titanium Dioxide Kaolin Brown Iron Oxide Yellow Iron Oxide Red Iron Oxide Talc

6.50 2.70 0.03 0.55 0.25 3.57

Octyl Methoxycinnamate Menthyl Anthranilate Trioctanoin Glycol Stearate Stearic Acid XXX PEG-40 Stearate

7.50 3.50 10.00 2.00 2.50 0.50

Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben Total

1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A. Add the Part C ingredients with mixing and slowly heat to 750C. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch. Mix and heat the Part E ingredients to 750C. Add Part E to the batch. Cool to 450C and add Part F. Homogenize until smooth and uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 347

7. Water-Resistant Mascara (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water Simethicone (Antifoam AF)

Wt. % 15.70 0.05

B

Black Iron Oxide

C

Propylene Glycol METHOCEL 40-202 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum)

10.00 4.00 0.20 0.50

D

Deionized Water Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone

E

Deionized Water Triethanolamine

2.00 1.50

F

Silicone Fluid

6.00

Propylene Glycol Phenoxyethanol Ethylparaben Methylparaben

1.00 0.50 0.10 0.20

Carnuba Wax Beeswax Stearic Acid Oleic Acid Propylene Glycol Stearate SE (Lexemul P) Glyceryl Stearate (Lexemul 515) Propylparaben Indapol

5.50 9.00 2.00 1.00 2.30 2.30 0.10 1.00

G

H

I

30.00 4.00

Deionized Water Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) Total

(Formulation continued on the following page)

1.00 0.05 100.00

348 Rheology Modifier Handbook

7. Water-Resistant Mascara, continued Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients, add Part B and pass the mixture through a colloid mill until the powder is completely and uniformly dispersed. In a separate vessel, mix the Part C ingredients until uniform and add them to Parts A + B. Separately mix the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix for 5 minutes. Mix the Part E ingredients, add them to the batch and begin heating the batch to 800C. When the batch reaches temperature, add Part F and mix 5 minutes. Mix and heat the Part G to 60-800C and then add them to the batch. Separately mix the Part H ingredients and heat to 820C. Slowly add Part H to the batch and mix for 10 minutes. Cool the batch to 40-450C and add the Part I ingredients. Mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 349

8. Cream Eye Shadow (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Ultramarine Blue Titanium Dioxide

Wt. % 34.30 6.00 1.50

B

Propylene Glycol METHOCEL 40-202 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum)

5.00 0.20 0.50

C

Deionized Water Triethanolamine Phenoxyethanol Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) Dimethicone Emulsion (Antifoam AF)

2.00 1.20 0.50 0.10 0.05

D

Deionized Water Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone

30.00 4.00

Stearic Acid Glyceryl Stearate (Lexemul 515) Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 (PromulgenD) Candellia Wax Myristyl Myristate (Ceraphyl424) Dimethicone (DC 200) Propylparaben

1.00 1.00 0.50 0.10

F

Mica(and)Titanium Dioxide (TimcaPearlwhite)

5.00

G

Deionized Water Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200)

E

3.00 2.00 1.00

Total (Formulation continued on the following page)

1.00 0.05 100.00

350 Rheology Modifier Handbook

8. Cream Eye Shadow, continued Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and pass the mixture through a colloid mill until the powders are completely and uniformly dispersed. In a separate vessel, mix the Part B ingredients until uniform and add them to Part A. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch in the order shown. Mix for 5 minutes and begin heating the batch to 800C. Mix the Part E ingredients and heat to 820C. Slowly add Part E to the batch and mix for 10 minutes. Cool the batch to 600C and slowly add Part F. Continue mixing and cooling. Separately mix the Part G ingredients and add them to the batch at 450C. Mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 351

C. Dental Care 9. Clear Gel Toothpaste (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Sorbitol (70%) LAPONITE D Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MXF) Silica Polyethylene Glycol (1500 Mol. Wt.) Glycerin Sodium Fluoride (25%) Sodium Saccharin (10%) Flavor Preservative Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (30%) Total

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended procedure.

Wt. % 3.70 60.00 0.30 0.45 4.00 3.00 10.00 1.00 1.50 1.00 0.05 5.00 100.00

352 Rheology Modifier Handbook

10. Calcium Carbonate Abrasive Toothpaste (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Sorbitol (70%) LAPONITE D Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MXF) Calcium Carbonate (Precipitated) Titanium Dioxide Glycerin Sodium Fluoride (25%) Sodium Saccharin (10%) Flavor Preservative Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (30%) Total

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended procedure

Wt. % 19.45 20.00 0.40 0.60 40.00 1.00 10.00 1.00 1.50 1.00 0.05 5.00 100.00

Personal Care Formulations 353

11. Toothpaste (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

VEEGUM D

1.30

C

Sorbitol (70%)

25.00

D

Glycerin Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel)

10.00 0.70

E

Wt. % 10.10

Dicalciumphosphate Dihydrate Flavor Saccharin Sodium Sodium Benzoate Sodium Lauryl Sulfate Total

50.00 1.00 0.20 0.20 1.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B + C. Mix until the gum is completely dissolved. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Avoid incorporating air during mixing.

354 Rheology Modifier Handbook

12. Fluoride Gel Toothpaste (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

VEEGUM D

1.20

C

Sorbitol (70%)

55.26

D

Glycerin Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel)

10.00 0.40

E

Wt. % 10.00

Hydrated Silica (HSG 751) Hydrated Silica (Sylox 15) Flavor Sodium Fluoride Saccharin Sodium Sodium Benzoate Sodium Lauryl Sulfate Total

10.00 10.00 1.00 0.24 0.20 0.20 1.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B + C. Mix until the gum is completely dissolved. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Avoid incorporating air during mixing.

Personal Care Formulations 355

D. Hair Care 13. Low Cost Clear Shampoo (Cold Process) (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200)

0.10

C

METHOCEL 40-202

1.30

D

Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100)

0.11

E

Wt. % 65.49

Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (28%) Cocamide DEA Citric Acid Ammonium Chloride Total

28.40 4.00 0.20 0.40 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix Parts A and B and add Part C. Add Part D and continue mixing until the solution thickens and becomes clear. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

356 Rheology Modifier Handbook

14. Antidandruff Shampoo with Zinc Pyrithione (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2020

1.00

C

Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

0.10

D

E

F

Wt. % 38.90

Propylene Glycol Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (29%) Sodium Laureth Sulfate (3 mole, 30%) Cocamidopropyl Betaine

5.00 16.00 16.00 4.00

Deionized Water Polyquaternium-10 (Ucare Polymer JR-400) DMDM Hydantoin Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

12.00 0.25 0.30 1.30

Polyquaternium-39 (Merquat 3330) Dimethicone Copolyol (DC 5324) Zinc Pyrithione (48%) Fragrance FD&C Blue #1 (0.1%) Total

1.00 0.20 2.50 0.40 1.05 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A using rapid agitation. Reduce the mixing speed and add Part C. Mix for 20 minutes. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each at slow speed until homogeneous. Mix the Part E ingredients in a separate vessel until homogeneous. Add Part E to the batch and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

Personal Care Formulations 357

15. Antidandruff Shampoo (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

A B

C

D

Ingredient Deionized Water LAPONITE XLG Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F) TEA Lauryl Sulfate Sodium Laureth Sulfate Glycol Stearate Cocamidopropyl Betaine Zinc Pyrithione (Dispersion) Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben Total

Wt. % 46.20 0.32 0.48

15.00 20.00 3.00 10.00 4.00 1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A and mix until homogeneous. Slowly heat Parts A + B to 750C. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each at slow speed until homogeneous. Cool the batch to 450C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix each at slow speed until homogeneous.

358 Rheology Modifier Handbook

16. Conditioning Antidandruff Shampoo (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 35.00

B

JAGUAR C-17

0.50

C

RHODIGEL EZ

0.05

D

Citric Acid to pH 5-7

q.s.

E

Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (RhodaponSB8208S) Cocamide MEA (Alkamide  C-212) Glycol Stearate (Alkamuls EGMS)

45.00 1.80 0.90

F

Zinc Pyrithione (48% Dispersion) Deionized Water

2.00 5.00

G

Citric Acid to pH 5.5-6.5 Fragrance, Color, Preservative

q.s. q.s.

Cocamidopropyl Betaine (Mirataine CBC) Total

6.00-14.00 Note 1 Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as shown in the supplier’s literature. H

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with rapid agitation. Heat the mixture to 40450C. Add Part C and continue heating to 600C. Add Part D while heating to 70-750C. Slow the mixer and add the Part E ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until homogeneous. Mix the Part F ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Cool the batch to 40-450C. Add the Part G ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous. Add Part H incrementally until the viscosity is between 7,000 and 11,000 mPas (Brookfield Model RV at 10rpm).

Personal Care Formulations 359

17. Mild Shampoo (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Decyl Polyglucoside (Plantaren 2000) Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (StandapolEA-21) Cocamide DEA

B

ACULYN  22 Deionized Water

C

Citric Acid to pH 7 Preservative

Wt. % 12.00 24.00 3.00 3.30 57.70

Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients slowly to avoid foaming. Separately mix the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A with slow mixing. Mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

360 Rheology Modifier Handbook

18. Antidandruff Shampoo (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 45.80

B

GELWHITE H NF

1.00

C

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (Methocel F4M)

0.80

D

Zinc Pyrithione (48%)

4.20

E

Cocamide MEA

5.00

F

TEA Lauryl Sulfate Triethanolamine

G

Color, Fragrance, Preservative

40.00 3.20

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Heat to 500C and slowly add Part C. Mix until smooth. Maintain temperature at 500C and slowly add Part D. Mix until smooth and uniform. Separately melt Part E and add it to the batch. Remove the heat and add the Part F ingredients with slow mixing to avoid foaming. Mix until uniform. Continue mixing until the batch cools and add the Part G ingredients. Mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 361

19. Basic Shampoo (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CELLOSIZE  QP-4400H

C

TEA Lauryl Sulfate(40%) Lauramide DEA

D

Citric Acid to pH 7.0-7.4

E

Preservative, Color, Fragrance

Wt. % 46.50 1.5 50.00 2.00 q.s.

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A with rapid mixing. When well dispersed, heat to 700C until a clear solution is obtained. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown while mixing slowly to avoid foaming. Mix until the batch is clear and uniform. Adjust the pH with Part D and cool to room temperature. Add the Part A ingredients and mix until uniform.

362 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Ultra Pearlescent Conditioning Shampoo (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

VEEGUM Ultra

2.00

C

Mica(and) Titanium Dioxide (Timiron MP-1001)

0.50

D

Wt. % 61.25

Sodium Laureth Sulfate Lauramide DEA (Monamide 716) Cocoyl Sarcosine (VansealCS) Preservative, Fragrance Total

25.00 7.50 3.75 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 700 rpm. Increase speed to 15001700 rpm and mix for 30 minutes. Add Part C and mix for 5 minutes. Slow the mixer to 200-500 rpm and add the Part D ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until smooth and uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 363

21. Curling Gel with Conditioner (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation

A

B

C

D

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 65.40

Ammonium Thioglycolate (60%) Ammonium Hydroxide (28%) Triethanolamine (99%) Pentasodium Pentatate Preservative

15.00 2.00 12.00 0.10 q.s.

Propylene Glycol CELLOSIZE  PCG-10 Polyquaternium-10 (UCARE Polymer JR30M)

4.00 1.00 0.50

Fragrance, Color Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add the Part B ingredients in the order listed to Part A and mix each until completely dissolved. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until a uniform, clear gel forms. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until uniform.

364 Rheology Modifier Handbook

22. Cream Relaxer (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 48.40

B

LAPONITE XLG Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F)

0.24 0.36

C

Propylene Glycol Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

2.00 3.50

D

E

Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG 100 Stearate Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth 20 Hydrogenated Polyisobutene Petrolatum Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben Total

7.50 9.00 8.00 20.00 1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and slowly heat the batch to 750C. Separately mix the Part D ingredients and heat to 750C. Add Part D to Parts A + B + C and homogenize until smooth and uniform. Cool to below 400C and add Part E. Mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 365

23. Polymeric, No-Lye Relaxer (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation Part 1: Cream Base

A

Ingredient Cetearyl Alcohol (Crodafos  CES) Cetyl Alcohol NF (Crodacol C-95NF) Steareth 2 (Brij72) Mineral Oil Petrolatum Steareth 10 (Brij 76)

B

Distilled Water Propylene Glycol

C

STRUCTURE 2001

D

Calcium Hydroxide Distilled Water

Wt. % 3.75 0.50 0.25 15.00 2.75 1.25 56.78 3.00 1.72

Total

5.00 10.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure With suitable agitation, combine the Part A ingredients. Combine the Part B ingredients. Heat Parts A + B to 75-800C. Add Part B to Part A with good mixing. Add Part C to the batch and mix well. Add the Part D ingredients, mix thoroughly and cool the batch to 400C. Homogenize for 5 minutes. (continued on the following page)

366 Rheology Modifier Handbook

23. Polymeric, No-Lye Relaxer, continued Formulation Part 2: Activator

A

Ingredient Distilled Water Xanthan Gum

B

Guanidine Carbonate

Wt. % 74.80 0.20

Total

25.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients with good mixing. Heat to 75-800C. Cool to 450C.Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 367

24. Clear Curl Activator Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 78.77

B

CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

C

Glycerin

10.00

D

Propylene Glycol Methylpapaben Propylparaben

10.00 0.20 0.03

E

Triethanolamine (99%)

0.50

Total

0.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle Part B onto the surface of Part A until Part B is completely wetted. Begin mixing. Add Part C with moderate agitation. Separately blend the Part D ingredients and heat until clear. Cool Part D to 450C and add it to the batch with moderate agitation. Add Part E and mix with sweeping agitation until a clear, uniform gel is obtained.

368 Rheology Modifier Handbook

25. Clarifying and Volumizing Hair Mask (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

VEEGUM F

C

Wt. % 47.80 7.00

Glycerin Kaolin (Vanclay) Talc Cocoyl Sarcosine (VansealCS)

D

Preservative, Fragrance

E

Triethanolamine Citric Acid to pH 5.5-6.5

5.00 30.00 5.00 5.00 q.s.

Total

0.20 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B into Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add the Part D ingredients and mix each until uniform. Adjust the pH to the indicated range with the Part E ingredients.

Personal Care Formulations 369

26. Semi-permanent Hair Dye Gel (Dark Brown) (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient HC Blue No. 2 Disperse Violet No. 1 HC Yellow No. 4 HC Red No. 3 Disperse Blue No. 3 Disperse Blue No. 7 HC Yellow No. 5 Propylene Glycol Distilled Water

B

Oleic Acid Ethanolamine Linoleamide DEA (Incromide  LA)

C

STRUCTURE 2001 Distilled Water

D

Ethanolamine

E

Citric Acid (10%)

Wt. % 0.36 0.56 0.24 0.11 0.20 0.17 0.02 4.00 18.34 0.82 0.18 2.00 3.39 62.11 2.50

Total

5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure With moderate agitation, mix and heat the Part A ingredients to 50-600C until the dyes are fully dispersed. Cool to 400C or less and add the Part B ingredients to Part A in the order shown. Mix each until uniform. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until uniform. Add Parts D and E to the batch in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

370 Rheology Modifier Handbook

27. Hydrophilic Oxidative Hair Dye with Lotion Developer (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation Part 1: Dye Base

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Dyes Sodium Sulfite Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (StepanolAM-V) Propylene Glycol Isopropanol Ammonium Hydroxide (28%) Total

Wt. % 81.90 q.s. 0.10 2.00 3.00 3.00 10.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat the Part A water to 800C. Add the remaining Part A ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform. Cool while mixing. Formulation Part 2: Lotion Developer

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Disodium EDTA (Versene  NA2)

Wt. % 60.95 0.05

B

Nonoxynol-4 (Igepal CO-430) Nonoxynol-9 (Igepal CO-630) Hydrogen Peroxide (50%) STRUCTURE 2001 Phosphoric Acid

10.00 10.00 12.00 6.90 0.10 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 371

28. Clear, Oil-Free Hair Conditioner Gel (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 86.60

Babassamidopropyl Dimethylbenzyl Ammonium Chloride (IncroquatBA-85) Cocodimonium Hydrolyzed Protein (Croquat M) Acetamide MEA(and)Lactamide MEA (IncromectantLAMEA) Glycerin Quaternium-15 (Dowicil200)

1.50

C

METHOCEL 40-202

2.00

D

Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene  100) Dimethicone Copolyol

0.10 2.00

E

Citric Acid to pH 4-5

B

Total

3.00 2.50 2.00 0.10

0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse and dissolve the Part B ingredients in Part A. Add Part C and mix until Part C is wetted. Add a few drops of 20% Sodium Hydroxide solution to promote thickening. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add Part E and mix until uniform.

372 Rheology Modifier Handbook

29. Hair Conditioner/Rinse (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 80.50

B

JAGUAR C-13S

0.30

C

Citric Acid to pH 4-5

q.s.

D

Glycol Stearate (Alkamuls  EGMS) Stearamphoacetate (MiranolDM) Cetyl Alcohol NF

E

Fragrance, Dye, Preservative

2.5 15.00 2.00

Total

q.s. Note 1

Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as presented in the supplier’s literature.

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with good mixing. Add Part C and heat batch to 70-750C. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Cool the batch to 40-450C and add the Part E ingredients. Mix each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 373

30. Creme Rinse (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 93.50

B

CELOSIZE QP-52000H

1.00

C

Stearalkonium Chloride Polysorbate 80

1.50 0.50

D

Cetyl Alcohol Glyceryl Monostearate

3.00 0.50

E

Preservative, Fragrance Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A with good mixing. When hydration of Part B is complete, heat to 70-750C. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Separately mix the Part D ingredients and heat them to 70-750C. Add Part D to Parts A+ B+C with vigorous stirring. Remove from the heat and continue stirring until the temperature reaches 30-350C. Add the Part E ingredients and mix until uniform.

374 Rheology Modifier Handbook

31. Super Hold Hair Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

0.50

C

Triethanolamine (99%)

0.35

D

Ethanol SDA-40 PVP/VA Copolymer (Luviskol VA64) Panthenol

E

F

Wt. % 67.30

20.00 8.50 0.10

Oleth-20 (Brij 98) Fragrance Dimethicone Copolyol PEG-45 Palm Kernel Glycerides (Crovol PK-70)

0.40 0.10 0.05 0.02

Benzophenone-4 (Uvinul MS-40) D&C Green No. 5 Propylene Glycol(and)Methylparaben(and) Propylparaben Triethanolamine (99%)

0.01 1.77 0.80

Total

0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B onto the surface of Part A. After Part B is completely wetted, mix at low speed. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until uniform. Add Part D to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Separately mix and heat the Part E ingredients until clear and uniform. Add Part E to the batch with moderate mixing. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 375

32. Crystal Clear Hair Fixative Gel (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-90) Sodium Hydroxide (10%) Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) Distilled Water

B

STRUCTURE 2001

Wt. % 3.00 2.00 0.10 90.90

Total

4.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until uniform. Add Part B with moderate mixing and continue mixing until the batch is clear and uniform.

376 Rheology Modifier Handbook

33. Antistat Hair Pump Gel (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

LAPONITE XLG

2.00

C

Propylene Glycol Tetrasodium EDTA

2.00 0.10

D

Wt. % 85.45

Ethanol SD39C FD&C Blue No. 1 (0.1%) DMDM Hydantoin Total

10.00 0.25 0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with good mixing. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Heat slowly to 750C and mix for 30 minutes. Cool to 250C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 377

34. Hair Defining Complex (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient BENTONE GEL MIO Behenyltrimonium Methosulftate(and) Cetearyl Alcohol (Incroquat Behenyl TMS)

Wt. % 1.00 4.00

Deionized Water Glycerin Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone Vinyl Acetate Copolymer (PVP/VA W-735)

78.80 4.00 2.00

C

Cyclomethicone(and)Dimethiconol

10.00

D

Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol (Merguard1190) Sodium Hydroxide to pH 5.5 Total

B

0.20 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat to 75-800C. Mix the Part B ingredients separately and heat to 75-800C. Mix Part A with Part B using high shear stirring. Add Part C to the batch and mix until uniform. Begin cooling and transfer to a propeller stirrer at 500C. Continue cooling while stirring. At 300C, add the Part D ingredients and mix until uniform.

378 Rheology Modifier Handbook

35. Hair Setting Gel (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

ACRITAMER 505E

C

Wt. % 61.00 0.70

Deionized Water Glycerin Propylene Glycol PEG-75 Lanolin (Laneto-50) dl-Panthenol (RitapanDL) Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-90) DMDM Hydantoin Triethanolamine (50%) Total

29.00 2.00 2.50 0.50 0.70 2.00 0.20 1.40 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly disperse Part B in Part A. Agitate until Part B is fully hydrated. Separately mix the Part C ingredients until uniform. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 379

E. Skin Care

36. Night Cream (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100)

B

Carbomer 941

0.20

C

Glycerin

3.00

D

Propylene Glycol Methylparaben Ethylparaben

4.00 0.20 0.15

Squalane Isopropyl Palmitate Isopropyl Myristate Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 Stearic Acid Glyceryl Stearate Cetyl Alcohol Sesame Oil Mineral Oil Mineral Oil(and)Lanolin Alcohol Laureth-23 Dimethicone BHA METHOCEL 40-100

2.00 4.00 3.00 1.50 3.50 3.50 1.00 2.00 1.00 1.00 0.50 0.50 0.05 0.10

E

(formulation continued on following page)

Wt. % 66.20 0.10

380 Rheology Modifier Handbook

36. Night Cream, continued

F

Ingredient Deionized Water Triethanolamine

G

Color

H

Deionized Water Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) Fragrance

Wt. % 1.00 0.25 q.s.

Total

1.00 0.10 0.15 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until the powder is fully dissolved. Add Part B to Part A and mix until Part B is fully wetted and dispersed. Begin heating Parts A + B to 800C and add Part C while heating. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until the powders are dissolved. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Separately mix the Part E ingredients and heat to 800C. When the main batch reaches 800C, add Part E and mix for 5 minutes. Separately mix the Part F ingredie nts and then add them to the batch. Begin cooling and add Part G before the temperature reaches 600C. Separately mix the first two ingredients in Part H and add them to the batch when it reaches 450C. Add the remaining Part H ingredient and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 381

37. Sunflower Facial Revitalizing Cream (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation Ingredient Deionized Water A PEMULEN TR-1 CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

Wt. % 60.00 0.30 0.50

B

Deionized Water Panthenol (Pro-Vitamin B5) Allantoin Glycerin Disodium EDTA

22.55 0.50 0.20 2.50 0.05

C

Sunflower Oil Mineral Oil Isostearyl Benzoate (Finsolv SB) Cetyl Phosphate (Crodafos MCA) Methyl Gluceth-20 (GlucamE-20)

3.50 3.50 3.00 0.30 1.00

D

Triethanolamine (99%)

0.80

E

Fragrance Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben Total

0.50 0.80 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the second ingredient in Part A in the Part A water. Mix until a clear solution is obtained. Sprinkle the third Part A ingredient on the surface of the solution. After it is wetted, mix at slow speed. Mix the Part B ingredients until homogeneous and add them to Part A. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to the batch while mixing at 1,000rpm. Add Parts D and E in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.

382 Rheology Modifier Handbook

38. Cream for Oily Skin (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

A B

C

D

Ingredient Deionized Water LAPONITE XLG Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F) Tetrasodium EDTA Cyclomethicone Dimethicone Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG 100 Stearate Emulsifying Wax NF Vitamin E Acetate Cetyl Octanoate Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben Total

Wt. % 70.65 0.20 0.30 0.10 10.00 3.00 4.00 3.00 0.25 7.50 1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the first two Part B ingredients in Part A. Mix until homogeneous. Add the remaining Part B ingredient and begin heating to 750C. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and heat to 750C. When both parts reach temperature, add Part C to Parts A + B with rapid mixing. Cool to 450C and add Part D. Mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 383

39. Hand and Nail Cream (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

A

B

C

D

Ingredient Silk Protein Hydrolyzate Sodium Chloride Glycerin Disodium EDTA Deionized Water

Wt. % 1.00 2.00 5.00 0.10 68.65

BENTONE GEL VS-5 Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 344 Fluid)

4.00 7.00

Laurylmethicone Copolyol (Dow Corning Q2-5200) Isopropyl Palmitate Caprylic/Capryl Triglyceride (Crodamol GTCC) Sweet Almond Oil

2.00 2.00 6.00 2.00

Fragrance Preservative Total

0.15 0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Separately mix the Part B ingredients. Separately mix the Part C ingredients. Add Part B to Part C and blend thoroughly. Using high shear mixing, slowly add approximately 1% of Part A to Parts B + C and homogenize for several minutes. Very slowly add the remainder of Part A, a little at a time, while continuing to homogenize the batch. After all of Part A has been added, continue to homogenize for several minutes more.

384 Rheology Modifier Handbook

40. Anti-Aging Cream (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient BENTONE GEL TN Jojoba Oil Sunflower Seed Oil C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate (Finsolv TN)

B

Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG 100 Stearate Cetearyl Alcohol Tocopheryl Acetate (Copherol1250)

C

Deionized Water Glycerin BENTONE LT (3% Dispersion) Hydrolyzed Sweet Almond Protein (Gluadin Almond)

D

MultifruitBSC Fragrance Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol (Merguard1190) Total

Wt. % 3.00 4.00 3.00 5.00 6.00 2.00 2.00 50.70 4.00 13.40 2.50

4.00 0.20 0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly mix the Part A ingredients while warming to 400C. Stir until uniform. Add the Part B ingredients and heat the batch to 75-800C. Mix and heat the Part C ingredients to 75-800C. Using a homogenizer, mix Part A + B with Part C. Continue homogenization while cooling to 450C. Transfer the batch to a propeller mixer and continue cooling. At 300C, add the Part D ingredients and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 385

41. Night Cream Moisturizer (R.I.T.A Corp.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 61.65

B

ACRITAMER 940

0.40

C

Disodiumoleamido PEG-2 Sulfosuccinate Propylene Glycol Aloe Vera Gel (Ritaloe 1X)

2.00 2.00 0.20

D

Hydrogenated Polyisobutene Dimethicone Glyceryl Stearate)and)PEG 100 Stearate Mineral Oil Isopropyl Palmitate (RITA IPP) Tocopheryl Acetate Tocopheryl Linoleate Isopropyl Myristate (RITA IPM) Cetearyl Alcohol (RITA Cetearyl Alcohol 70/30)

5.00 2.00 5.00 4.00 6.00 0.25 0.10 0.50 1.50

E

Triethanolamine (99%)

0.40

F

Corn Starch Hydrolyzed Soy Flour (Raffermine ) Oat Protein (Reductine ) Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00 3.00 4.00 1.00 Total

(formulation continued on the following page)

100.00

386 Rheology Modifier Handbook

41. Night Cream Moisturizer, continued Mixing Procedure Slowly disperse Part B in Part A. Mix until fully wetted and dispersed. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Heat the batch to 750C. Combine the Part D ingredients separately, heat to 750C and add them to the batch with good mixing. Add Part E and mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 400C and add the Part F ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until uniform.

42. Hand Cream (Rohm and Haas Company)) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water ACULYN  22 Glycerin Triethanolamine

Wt. % 74.00 1.00 12.00 0.50

B

Mineral Oil Cetyl Alcohol PEG-15 Cocamine (Ethomeen C/25)

2.00 10.00 0.50 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients with moderate subsurface agitation. Combine the Part B ingredients with moderate subsurface agitation. Heat Part A and Part B separately to 700C. Add Part B to Part A with high shear agitation. Mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 300C quickly.

Personal Care Formulations 387

43. Moisturizing Cream (Water-in-Silicone) (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 345) Dimethicone (DC 200, 100 cstk.) TIXOGEL FTN Cetyl Dimethicone Copolyol (Abil EM-90)

Wt. % 18.00 5.00 10.00 1.20

Deionized Water Sodium Chloride

65.30 0.50 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 780C. Mix the Part B ingredients separately and heat them to 780C. Add Part B to Part A and homogenize until uniform. Transfer to a sweep action mixer while cooling to room temperature.

388 Rheology Modifier Handbook

44. Ultra Moisturizing Skin Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 81.10

B

VEEGUM Ultra Carbomer 934 (Carbopol 934)

0.50 0.50

C

Glycerin Butylene Glycol

3.00 2.00

Cetyl Alcohol Glyceryl Stearate SE Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Neobee M-5) C12-15 Octanoate (Finester EH-25) Dimethicone (DC 200, 350 cstk.) Steareth-2 (Brij 72) Steareth-21 (Brij 721)

1.00 3.00 5.00 1.00 1.00 0.83 0.83

E

Fragrance, Preservative

q.s.

F

Triethanolamine Citric Acid to pH 5.3-5.9

D

Total

0.24 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and sift the mixture into Part A while mixing with a propeller mixer at 1000 rpm. Mix for 45 minutes and begin heating to 70-750C. Add the Part C ingredients to the batch. Mix the Part D ingredients and heat them to 70-750C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Begin cooling with continuous mixing. At 450C, add the Part E ingredients to the batch. At 350C, add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.

Personal Care Formulations 389

45. Luxuriant Lotion (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation Ingredient A Deionized Water

Wt. % 71.00

B

METHOCEL 40-202 Triethanolamine

C

Carbomer 934 (2% Aqueous Solution)

D

Propylene Glycol Methylparaben Propylparaben

2.00 0.20 0.10

Mineral Oil Glyceryl Stearate SE Stearic Acid Dimethicone

7.0 3.00 3.50 0.50

F

Deionized Water Triethanolamine

1.00 0.75

G

Color Fragrance

q.s. 0.10

H

Deionized Water Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200)

E

0.20 0.50 10.00

Total

0.50 0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle the first Part B ingredient into Part A and mix for 5 minutes. Add the remaining Part B ingredient and mix until a clear solution is obtained. Begin heating to 800C. Add the previously prepared Part C. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them when the batch temperature is above 600C. Separately combine the Part E ingredients, heat them to 800C. and add them to the batch. Mix for 10 minutes. Mix the Part F ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Begin cooling and add Parts G and H when temperature is below 500C. Mix until homogeneous.

390 Rheology Modifier Handbook

46. Cleansing Lotion (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

METHOCEL 40-202

0.20

C

Deionized Water Triethanolamine

1.00 0.75

D

Propylene Glycol Methylparaben

3.00 0.20

Mineral Oil Petrolatum Stearic Acid Glyceryl Stearate SE Dimethicone

8.00 3.00 2.00 3.00 0.50

F

Color Fragrance

q.s. 0.10

G

Deionized Water Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200)

E

Wt. % 77.05

Total

1.00 0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle Part B into Part A and mix for 5 minutes. Add the previously prepared Part C solution. Begin heating to 800C. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them when the batch temperature is above 600C. Separately combine the Part E ingredients, heat them to 800C. and add them to the batch. Mix for 10 minutes. Begin cooling and add Parts F and G in the order shown when the temperature is below 45-500C. Mix until homogeneous.

Personal Care Formulations 391

47. Sparkling Skin Moisturizing Fluid with Microcapsules (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 83.35

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2050

0.25

C

Glycerin Sorbitol (70%) Methylparaben

2.50 2.50 0.10

D

Deionized Water Sodium Hydroxymethylglycinate (Suttocide A) Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-30) Disodium EDTA Benzophenone-4

E

Mineral Oil in Gelatin Capsules (LipoPearls ) Total

10.00 0.30 0.10 0.05 0.05 0.80 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with rapid agitation. Slow the mixer and mix until homogeneous. Combine the Part C ingredients using shear and add them to Parts A + B. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until homogeneous. Add part D to the batch with paddle -type agitation until a clear solution is obtained. Add Part E with paddle -type agitation until the microcapsules are well dispersed.

392 Rheology Modifier Handbook

48. Liposome Emulsion (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Mineral Oil PEMULEN TR-1 CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 Octyl Stearate

Wt. % 10.00 0.25 0.20 8.00

B

Deionized Water Glycerin

75.55 2.00

C

Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

0.50

D

Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and) Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben Lecithin(and)Evening Primrose Oil (Brooksome EPO) Total

0.50 3.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix well to disperse the polymers. Mix the Part B ingredients until uniform. Slowly add 3/4 of Part B to Part A with vigorous mixing. Mix about 15 minutes. When the emulsion is smooth and white, add a portion of Part C and mix until uniform. Slowly add the remainder of Part B and Part C with moderate mixing. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 393

49. After-Sport Massage Lotion (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient BENTONE GEL EUG

Wt. % 3.00

Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Crodamol CTCC) Octyldodecanol (Eutanol G) Isopropyl Myristate(and)Soy Bean Oil(and) Arnica Extract

5.00 4.00 2.00

C

Acrylic Acid/Vinyl Acetate Copolymer

0.30

D

Demineralized Water Propylene Glycol Triethanolamine (99%)

B

E

Fragrance Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol (Merguard 1190) Total

82.15 3.00 0.15 0.20 0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part B ingredients and thoroughly disperse Part A in Part B. Add Part C and heat the mixture to 450C. Combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 450C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Continue to stir the batch while cooling. When the temperature is below 300C, add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

394 Rheology Modifier Handbook

50. Alpha Hydroxy Acid Lotion (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Stearic Acid Hydrogenated Soy Glyceride (Myverol18-06) Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Polysorbate 60 Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride C12-15 Alkylbenzoate (Finsolv TN) Propylparaben Deionized Water ACRITAMER 940 Methylparaben Methyl Gluceth-20 Propylene Glycol Triethanolamine (50%)

Wt. % 3.00 3.00 1.00 2.50 1.50 0.05 61.55 0.15 0.15 3.00 3.00 0.50

Deionized Water Lactic Acid Sodium Hydroxide (20%) Total

10.00 5.60 5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients thoroughly and heat them to 70-750C. Separately mix the Part B ingredients and heat them to 70-750C. Add Part A to Part B with good mixing. Mix until uniform. Continue stirring while cooling. When the batch temperature reaches 450C, add the previously mixed Part C ingredients. Continue mixing until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 395

51. Lanolin Hand Lotion (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Propylene Glycol ACULYN 22 Triethanolamine (99%)

B

Lanolin Cetyl Alcohol PEG-15 Cocoate (Ethomeen C/25)

C

Preservative

Wt. % 91.00 3.00 1.00 0.50 2.00 2.00 0.50

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients using high shear agitation. Heat Part A to 700C. Combine the Part B ingredients using high shear agitation. Heat Part B to 700C. Mix Part A and Part B using shear agitation. Cool quickly to 300C and add Part C. Mix until uniform.

396 Rheology Modifier Handbook

52. Alpha Hydroxy Acid Lotion (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Deionized Water OPTIGEL GWX-1285 Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and) Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben

Wt. % 69.15 15.00 0.60

Lecinol S-10 Stearic Acid Dimethicone (DC200, 200 cstk.) Octyldodecanol (EutanolG) Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 (Lipowax D) Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate Mixed Fruit Acids BA Complex Triethanolamine (99%) to pH 4.0-4.2 Total

1.00 1.50 5.00 5.00 1.50 1.25 5.00 q.s. Note 1

Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as presented in the supplier’s literature.

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 760C. Separately mix the Part B ingredients and heat them to 780C. Add Part B to Part A using a homogenizer to mix the batch until uniform. Transfer to a propeller mixer and cool the batch to below 300C. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 397

53. Ultra-AHA Moisturizing Skin Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation Ingredient A Deionized Water

Wt. % 70.64

B

VEEGUM Ultra Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel)

1.00 0.50

C

Glycerin Butylene Glycol

3.00 2.00

D

Cetyl Alcohol Glyceryl Stearate SE Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Neobee M-5) C12-15 Octanoate (Finester EH-25) Dimethicone (DC 200, 350 cstk.) Steareth-2 (Brij 72) Steareth-21 (Brij 721)

1.00 3.00 5.00 1.00 1.00 0.83 0.83

E

Glycolic Acid

7.00

F

Fragrance, Preservative

q.s.

G

Triethanolamine Citric Acid to pH 3.6-4.0 Total

3.20 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with a propeller mixer at 1000rpm. Continue mixing for 45 minutes. Begin heating Parts A + B to 750C. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 750C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Begin cooling. At 450C, add Parts E and F in the order shown. Mix each until uniform. At 350C add Part G and mix until uniform.

398 Rheology Modifier Handbook

54. Clear Aloe Vera Gel (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Aloe Barbadensis Gel (Activera 1-1FS) Glycereth-26 (Liponic EG-1) Allantoin STRUCTURE 2001 Distilled Water Tetrasodium EDTA

D

Triethanolamine (99%)

Wt. % 90.00 0.50 0.40 3.45 4.39 0.26

Total

1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform. Add Part B and continue mixing until the batch thickens and becomes clear.

Personal Care Formulations 399

55. Anti-Wrinkle Gel (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 87.40

B

ACRITAMER 940

0.50

C

Xanthan Gum

0.10

D

1,3 Butylene Glycol Dimethicone Copolyol (Ritasil 190) Shea Butter

5.00 0.10 1.00

E

Triethanolamine (99%)

0.40

F

Collagen (Promois ECP) DMDM Hydantoin Fragrance Wheat Protein Total

0.20 0.20 0.10 5.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C and mix until dissolved. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform. Add Part E and mix until the batch thickens. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.

400 Rheology Modifier Handbook

56. Mineral Oil Gel (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation Ingredient Mineral Oil Cetyl Alcohol Oleth-3 (Ritoleth-3)

Wt. % 61.55 18.00 4.5

B

ACRITAMER 940

1.75

C

Cocamine Color, Fragrance, Preservative

5.30 q.s.

D

Ethanol SD40

A

Total

8.90 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients. Disperse Part B in Part A and mix until the solution is clear. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add Part D and mix slowly until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 401

57. Aloe Gel (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Methylparaben Aloe Barbadensis Gel Glyceryl Polymethacrylate(and)Propylene Glycol Butylene Glycol PEG-8 (Carbowax PEG 400)

Wt. % 44.95 0.25 10.00 35.00 2.50 2.00

B

PURE-GEL HH

3.50

C

Deionized Water Imidazolidinyl Urea

1.00 0.30

D

Water(and)Hyaluronic Acid (Hylucare1%) Total

0.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 780C. Add Part B to Part A and homogenize until uniform. Transfer to a propeller mixer and cool the batch to 350C. Mix the Part C ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Add Part D and mix until uniform.

402 Rheology Modifier Handbook

58. Vitamin A Eye Gel (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation Ingredient A Deionized Water Aloe Vera

Wt. % 63.65 1.00

B

METHOCEL 40-101 Triethanolamine

0.10 0.01

C

Glycerin Dimethicone Copolyol (Dow Corning 193)

2.00 2.00

D

Polysorbate 20 Retinol

0.50 0.05

E

Propylene Glycol Methylparaben

3.00 0.18

F

Deionized Water Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100)

1.00 0.10 0.01

G

Carbomer 940 (2% Solution)

H

Deionized Water Triethanolamine

25.00

Total

1.00 0.40 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Sprinkle the first Part B ingredient into Part A and mix 5 minutes. Add the second Part B ingredient and mix until clear. Separately combine the Part C, Part D, Part E and Part F ingredients and add each Part to Parts A + B in the order shown. Mix each until uniform. Add the previously prepared Part G solution and mix 15 minutes. Separately mix the Part H ingredients and add them to the batch. Continue mixing until the batch gels and is crystal clear.

Personal Care Formulations 403

F. Shaving 59. Shaving Cream (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Glycerin

B

METHOCEL 40-100

0.10

C

Triethanolamine

0.85

D

Stearic Acid Stearyl Alcohol Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol Petrolatum Glyceryl Stearate SE

E

Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) Deionized Water

F

Fragrance

Wt. % 78.20 5.00

10.00 0.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 0.20 0.50

Total

0.15 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and then add Part B to Part A with good mixing. Once Part B is fully dispersed add Part C and mix for about 15 minutes. Begin heating the batch to 75-800C. Combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 75-800C.Add Part D to the batch with rapid mixing. When the batch is homogeneous, begin cooling. When the temperature reaches less than 450C, add the previously mixed Part E. Mix until uniform. Add Part F and mix until uniform.

404 Rheology Modifier Handbook

60. After-Shave Gel with Peppermint and Tea Tree Oil (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

0.20

C

Propylene Glycol Sorbitol (70%) PEG 600 (Carbowax 600)

1.50 0.50 2.00

D

Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

0.20

E

Polyquaternium-39 (Merquat Plus 3330)

0.25

F

Oleth-10 (Brij 97) Peppermint Oil Tea Tree Oil

0.80 0.08 0.12

G

Wt. % 84.23

Ethanol SD40 Sodium Hydroxide (18%) Total

10.00 0.12 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle Part B onto the surface of Part A and begin stirring when Part B is wetted. Add the Part C ingredients and mix for 20 minutes. Add Part D and continue mixing as the gel thickens. Mix until smooth. With slow mixing, add Part E. Mix until uniform. Combine the Part F ingredients (pre-melt the first ingredient) and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Add the Part G ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 405

61. Shaving Gel (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CELLOSIZE PCG-10

1.25

C

POLYOX WSR-205NF Deionized Water

0.10 3.23

Palmitic Acid Triethanolamine (99%) Oleth-20 (Ameroxol OE-20) Glycerin

6.00 5.00 2.00 2.00

E

Preservative, Color, Fragrance

q.s.

F

Isopentane

D

Wt. % 74.42

Total

6.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A with rapid stirring. When well dispersed heat the mixture to 750C. Separately mix the Part C ingredients with gentle stirring. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until uniform. When a clear gel has formed and the batch temperature is 750C, add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Cool the batch to room temperature and add Part E and mix until uniform. Separately cool the batch and add Part F at 150C or below. Mix them with gentle stirring until uniform. Package in sepro-type aerosol cans using A-40 propellant.

406 Rheology Modifier Handbook

G. Soaps 62. Facial Wash (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient BENTONE LT (3.0% Aqueous Dispersion) Cocoamphopolycarboxylate (Ampholak7CX/C) Propylene Glycol PEG-18 Glyceryl Glycol Dileococoate Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol (Merguard1190) Disodium EDTA Fragrance Citric Acid to pH 5.5 Color Demineralized Water Total

Wt. % 74.00 15.00 5.00 1.50 0.10 0.20 0.40 q.s. 0.30 3.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Prepare the Part A dispersion using a high shear mixer, i.e. homogenizer. Mix for 15-20 minutes. Let the dispersion stand until any entrapped air has escaped. Using a propeller mixer, add the Part B ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

Personal Care Formulations 407

63. Shower and Bath Gel (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

JAGUAR C-162

C

Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (RhodapexES-2)

D

Citric Acid to pH 5.0-5.5

E

Cocamidopropyl Betaine (Mirataine BD-R) Cocamide DEA (Alkamide  DC-212/s)

F

Preservative, Fragrance

Wt. % 50.80 0.20 35.00 q.s. 12.00 2.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C with slow agitation to avoid foaming. Mix until uniform. Adjust the pH with Part D and heat the batch to 40-550C while continuing to mix. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Cool the batch to 350C and add Part F. Readjust the pH to 5.0-5.5, if necessary.

408 Rheology Modifier Handbook

64. Pearlescent Liquid Hand Soap (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Caprylyl/Capryl Glucoside (Triton CG-110) Sodium Isostearyl Lactylate (Pationic ISL) Lauramide MEA (Monamide LM-MA) Deionized Water

B

Triethanolamine (99%)

C

Deionized Water ACULYN 22

D

Methylchloroisothiazolinone(and) Methylisothiazolinone (KathonCG)

E

Color

Wt. % 20.00 1.00 4.00 10.00 1.70 59.94 3.30 0.06

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 700C. Mix until clear and add Part B. Mix and heat the Part C ingredients to 500C. Slowly add Part A to Part B with good agitation. Avoid air entrapment. Add part D at 40450C and mix until uniform. Add Part E and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 409

65. Economy Shower Gel (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water CARBOPOL ETD 2020

B

Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

0.120

Deionized Water Guar Hydroxypropyltrimonium Chloride (Hi-Care1000) Disodium EDTA

8.000 0.100

Sodium Laureth Sulfate (Standapol ES-250) Cocoamphoacetate (Miranol Ultra)

18.000 5.000

C

D

E

F

Wt. % 65.016 0.900

0.050

Dimethicone (DC200, 5000 cstk.) Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and) Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben Fragrance Colors Sodium Hydroxide (18%) Total

0.700 0.500 0.500 0.064 1.050 100.000

Mixing Procedure Warm the Part A water slightly and disperse the polymer. Reduce the mixing speed and mix for 20 minutes. Add Part B and mix for 30 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients. When the polymer swells, add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until uniform. Slow the mixer and add the Part D ingredients in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Adjust the pH to 6.16.5 using Part F. Mix until uniform.

410 Rheology Modifier Handbook

66. Liquid Hand Soap. (R• I• T• A. Corp.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Sodium C14-16Olefin Sulfonate Cocamide DEA (Ritamide C) Sodium Lauroyl Lactylate Sodium Isostearyl Lactylate Glycol Distearate PEG-100 Distearate PEG-75 Lanolin

Wt. % 20.00 3.50 2.00 2.00 0.35 0.25 2.00

B

R• I• T• A PEO-2 Deionized Water

0.25 69.35

C

Fragrance DMDM Hydantoin

0.10 0.20

D

Sodium Chloride (25%) Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part B ingredients with low shear stirring. When the solution is complete, heat Part B to 750C. Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 750C. Add Part B to Part A with good mixing. Mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 500C and add the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Adjust to the desired viscosity with Part D.

Personal Care Formulations 411

H. Sunscreens 67. Waterproof Sunscreen Cream, SPF 30 (FMC Corp.) Formulation Ingredient A AVICEL CL611 (3% Aqueous Dispersion) VISCARIN GP309 (2% Aqueous Solution) B

C

D

Wt. % 40.00 10.00

Deionized Water Propylene Glycol

4.50 1.00

Glyceryl Stearate (CerasyntSD) Octylmethoxy Cinnamate Octocrylene Benzophenone-3 Myreth-3 Octanoate Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 Zinc Oxide (Z-Cote ) Titanium Dioxide Tricontanyl PVP

2.50 7.50 8.00 6.00 5.00 2.50 3.00 3.00 2.00 4.00

Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00 Total

100.00

Mixing Procedure Separately prepare the two components of Part A following the manufactures recommended procedures. Combine the Part A ingredients, add the Part B ingredients and heat the mixture to 750C while stirring slowly. In a separate vessel, combine the Part C ingredients and heat them to 900C while stirring slowly. Add Part C to Parts A+B with moderate stirring. Cool the batch to 450C and add Part D with moderate stirring. Mix until uniform.

412 Rheology Modifier Handbook

68. Waterproof Sunscreen Lotion (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 62.60

B

CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

C

Deionized Water Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (Methocel E4M)

D

Polymethoxy Bicyclicoxazolidine (NuoseptC) Disodium EDTA

0.20 0.05

E

Octyl Methoxycinnamate (Neo HeliopanType AV) Octyl Salicylate (Neo HeliopanType OS) Benzophenone-3 (Uvinul M-40) C12-15 Alkylbenzoate

7.00 3.00 2.00 4.00

F

PEMULEN TR-1

0.25

G

Aminomethyl Propanol PEG-20 Almond Glycerides Fragrance

0.20

Total

20.00

0.25 0.20 0.15 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A water at 40-500C. Mix the Part C ingredients separately. When uniform, add the Part D to Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Add Parts C + D to Parts A + B and mix well. Combine the Part E ingredients separately and heat until the solids are dissolved. Cool Part E to 450C and add Part F to it. Mix until the polymer is well dispersed. With Vigorous agitation, add Parts E + F to the batch. Mix for 20 minutes. Add the Part G ingredients in the order shown and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 413

69. Sunscreen Cream (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation A B

C

D

E

Ingredient BENTONE GEL TN Titanium Dioxide(and)C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate (TioveilFIN) Sorbitan Stearate Cetearyl Alcohol C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate Polysorbate 60 Propylene Glycol Disodium EDTA Demineralized Water Fragrance Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol (Merguard1190) Total

Wt. % 5.00 12.50

2.20 3.00 8.00 3.30 8.00 0.15 57.45 0.20 0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly disperse Part B in Part A. Add the Part C ingredients, mix and begin heating to 75-800C. Combine the Part D ingredients separately and heat them 75-800C.Using a high shear mixer combine Parts A + B +C and Part D. Homogenize until uniform. Transfer the batch to a propeller stirrer and begin cooling. At 300C or below, add the Part E ingredients and mix until uniform.

414 Rheology Modifier Handbook

70. Sun Block Lotion (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation A

B

Ingredient Deionized Water Glycerin

Wt. % 70.40 4.65

Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum F) RHODIGEL EZ

1.50 0.15

Cetyl Alcohol NF Isopropyl Myristate Dimethicone Glyceryl Stearate SE (DermalcareGMS/SE)

3.10 3.25 2.95 3.00

D

Octyl Dimethyl PABA Benzophenone-3 (Syntase62)

7.00 3.00

E

Fragrance, Color, Preservative

C

Total

q.s. Note 1

Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as presented in the supplier’s literature.

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Dry blend the Part B ingredients, slowly add them to Part A and mix with good agitation until the batch is smooth and uniform. Begin heating Parts A + B to 700C. Combine the Part C ingredients separately and heat them to 70-750C. Mix until all the ingredients have melted. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Mix 15 minutes. Begin cooling with moderate agitation. Combine the Part D ingredients separately, heating gently, if necessary, to obtain a clear solution. When the batch temperature cools to 550C, add Part D with good mixing. When the batch cools to 400C, add the Part E ingredient and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 415

71. Waterproof Sunscreen (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Deionized Water ACULYN 33 ACULYN 22 Propylene Glycol

Wt. % 65.45 2.00 2.00 1.00

Isopropyl Myristate Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 344) Cetearyl Alcohol DEA Cetyl Phosphate (Amphisol) Benzophenone-3 Octyl Methoxycinnamate Macadamia Nut Oil Tocopheryl Acetate

5.00 1.00 1.00 4.00 6.00 7.50 5.00 0.05

Preservative Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and heat them to 750C. Combine the Part B ingredients in a separate vessel and heat them to 750C. Add Part B to Part A with good agitation. Cool the batch and add Part C. Mix until uniform

416 Rheology Modifier Handbook

72. Waterproof Sunscreen (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation

A

B

C

D

Ingredient Deionized Water PURE GEL HH

Wt. % 51.07 2.50

Sodium Chloride Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and) Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben

0.50 0.60

Polyglyceryl-4-Isostearte(and)Cetyl Dimethicone(and) Hexyl Laurate Isononyl Isononanoate Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 344) Cetyl Dimethicone Methyl Glucose Sesquistearate Dioctyl Malate

5.00

6.00 7.50 3.00 0.50 2.00

Micronized Titanium Dioxide(and)Isononyl Isononanoate(and)Stearic Acid(and) Aluminum Hydroxide

21.33 Total

100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients using a propeller mixer and mix until uniform. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A. Combine the Part C ingredients in a separate vessel, heat them to 750C, then cool to 650C. Using an homogenizer, add Part D to Part C and homogenize until uniform. Transfer Parts C + D to a propeller mixer and add Parts A + B. Mix until uniform

Personal Care Formulations 417

73. Sunscreen Cream (Southern Clay Products) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

GELWHITE GP

2.00

C

Propylene Glycol Triethanolamine

3.00 1.00

Mineral Oil Isopropyl Myristate Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol Stearic Acid Cetyl Alcohol Octyl Methoxycinnamate (ParsolMCX)

5.00 5.00 5.00 3.00 2.00 7.00

D

E

Wt. % 67.00

Preservative Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Heat the batch to 750C. In a separate vessel, combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 750C. Add Part D to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Continue mixing and begin cooling the batch. At 500C or below, add Part E and mix until uniform.

418 Rheology Modifier Handbook

I. Other Personal Care Formulations 74. Non-Alcoholic Splash Toner (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation A B

C

D

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 91.35

Propylene Glycol Methylparaben

2.00 0.15

Ginseng Extract Horse Chestnut Extract METHOCEL 40-202 Sodium PCA PPG-5-Ceteth-20 (ProcetylAWS) Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200)

2.00 2.00 0.20 1.00 0.10 0.10

Polysorbate 20 Perfume Oil Total

1.00 0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part B ingredients, warming if necessary, until the solid dissolves. Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown, mixing each well between additions. Combine the Part D ingredients in a separate vessel and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 419

75. Alcohol-Free Cologne (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water DMDM Hydantoin Oleth-10 (Brij 97)

Wt. % 91.53 0.30 0.30

Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 245) Fragrance Isostearyl Benzoate PEMULEN TR-2

4.00 2.00 0.50 0.15

C

Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00

D

Triethanolamine

0.12

E

Disodium EDTA

B

Total

0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix until uniform. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients. Mix until the fourth ingredient is completely dispersed. With moderate agitation, add Part B to Part A. Mix for 10-20 minutes. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Add Part D and mix vigorously to produce a smooth emulsion. Add Part E and mix until uniform.

420 Rheology Modifier Handbook

76. Self-Tanning Emulsion, SPF10 (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation Ingredient A Deionized Water

Wt. % 54.00

B

LAPONITE XLG Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F)

0.40 0.60

C

Propylene Glycol Disodium EDTA

2.00 0.10

Octyl Methoxycinnamate Benzophenone-3 Hydrogenated Polyisobutene Octyl Palmitate Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 Dimethicone Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate

7.50 6.00 2.00 5.00 3.00 1.00 2.00

Deionized Water Copper Acetyl Tyrosanate Methylsilanol Sodium Metabisulfite Dihydroxyacetone Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

8.00 2.00 0.30 5.00 1.00

D

E

F

Lactic Acid (8.8%) to pH 4.5-5.0 Total

0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A. Heat the mixture slowly to 750C. In a separate vessel, combine the Part C ingredients and heat to 750C. Add Part C to Part A + B and mix until uniform. Combine the Part D ingredients in a separate vessel and heat them to 750C. Add Part D to the batch and mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 450C and add the Part E and Part F ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 421

77. Depilatory (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

A

Ingredient Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 Cetyl Alcohol PEG-40 Stearate Mineral Oil Kukui Nut Oil Octyldodecanol

B

Deionized Water

C

LAPONITE XLG Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F)

0.36 0.56

D

Quaternium-15 Tetrasodium EDTA

0.10 0.25

E

Wt. % 4.50 11.00 1.50 2.00 0.25 3.00 45.08

Deionized Water Thioglycolic Acid (80%) Calcium Hydroxide Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

18.20 4.50 5.40 3.30 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix while heating to 750C. Disperse the Part C ingredients in Part B, mix until uniform and heat the mixture to 750C. Add Parts B + C to Part A and mix until homogeneous. Combine the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Begin cooling the batch. In a separate vessel, combine the Part E ingredients. When the batch cools to 450C, add Part E to the batch and mix until uniform.

422 Rheology Modifier Handbook

78. Gel Depilatory (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Distilled Water STRUCTURE 2001 Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100)

Wt. % 37.60 6.90 0.13

Distilled Water Sodium Hydroxide Calcium Hydroxide Potassium Hydroxide

40.00 3.63 0.27 0.70

Thioglycolic Acid Glycerin Total

4.37 6.40 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients with good agitation. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients and mix until dispersion is complete. Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 423

79. Peppermint Foot Balm (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 Cetyl Alcohol Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Crodamol GTCC)

Wt. % 5.00 3.00 8.00

B

BENTONE GEL LIO

2.00

C

Methyl Pyrrolidone Carboxylate (Questice)

0.80

D

E

F

Demineralized Water Aloe Vera Gel (10:1) Glycerin Methyl Gluceth-10 Propylene Usnate )

Glycol(and)Lichen

73.20 1.50 5.00 0.20 Extract

(Deo-

0.20

Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol (Merguard1190) Color Fragrance Total

0.20 0.60 0.30 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients. Thoroughly disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous. Heat Parts A + B +C to 75800C. Combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 75-800C. Using high shear mixing, mix Part D with Parts A + B + C. Homogenize until uniform. Transfer the batch to a propeller mixer and begin cooling it. At 400C, add Part E and mix until uniform. At 300C, add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

424 Rheology Modifier Handbook

80. AHA Clarifying Face Mask (R. T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 35.75

B

VEEGUM HS

C

Glycerin Butylene Glycol Kaolin (Vanclay) Talc Cocoyl Sarcosine (VansealCS)

D

Preservative

q.s.

E

Glycolic Acid

7.00

F

Fragrance

q.s.

G

Triethanolamine Citric Acid to pH 3.5-3.9

7.00 4.00 3.00 30.00 5.00 5.00

Total

3.25 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B into Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix for approximately 30 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add Parts D, E and F in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Adjust the pH of the batch with the Part G ingredients.

Household/Institutional Formulations 425

4. Household/Institutional Formulations A. Air Fresheners 1. Air Freshener Gel (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 96.80

B

LAPONITE RD Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4)

C

Polyethylene Glycol DMDM Hydantoin Fragrance Total

1.40 0.60

1.00 0.20 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A with good agitation. Mix for 30 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.

426 Rheology Modifier Handbook

2. Water-Based Air Freshener (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

PEMULEN 1622 CARBOPOL EZ-2

C

Fragrance

D

Triethanolamine (99%)

Wt. % 57.60 0.40 2.00 40.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B ingredients into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous. Add Part D and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 427

3. Air Deodorant (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 89.22

B

PEMULEN 1622

0.20

C

Meelium (Prentiss) Mineral Spirits

4.00 6.00

D

Polysorbate 80

0.25

E

Triethanolamine (99%)

0.20

F

Polyacrylic Acid (Good-Rite  K-752) Total

0.13 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Premix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B with good mixing. With slow agitation, add Part D to the batch. Neutralize with Part E and mix until homogeneous. With slow agitation, add Part F to the batch and mix until homogeneous.

428 Rheology Modifier Handbook

B. Dish, Cutlery and Utensil Detergents 4. Non-Chlorinated Warewash Detergent (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient ACUSOL 810 (18%) ACUSOL 445N Potassium Hydroxide (45%) Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate Potassium Silicate (29%) Alkyl Amine Ethoxylate (Triton CF-32) Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

Wt. % 11.00 4.00 43.00 10.00 29.00 3.00 100.00

Household/Institutional Formulations 429

5. Hand Dishwashing Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 38.11

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2623

0.70

C

Polyacrylic Acid (Good-Rite K-7058))

4.00

D

Alphasulfomethylester (Alphastep® ML-40)

E

Triethanolamine (99%) Sodium Laureth Sulfate (28%) Cocamide DEA (Ninol® 11-CM) Total

27.03 5.50 17.86 2.00 Note 1

Note 1: These amounts do not total 100% but are presented as published in the technical literature of the supplier.

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 40-50 0C. Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. With slow agitation to avoid foam generation, add Part D to the batch. Neutralize with Part E and mix until homogeneous. Add the remaining Part E ingredients to the batch and continue mixing until homogeneous.

430 Rheology Modifier Handbook

6. Hand Dishwashing Paste (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 41.50

B

CARBOPOL 672

C

Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft® S-100)

D

Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Sodium Silicate (52%)

5.00 7.50

E

Sodium Tripolyphosphate

15.00

F

Sodium Carbonate Sodium Olefinsulfonate (Bioterge ® AS-40)

G

Fragrance Color

1.00

Total

17.00

5.00 8.00 q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix until completely dissolved. Heating will speed the process. Add the Part F and ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Cool the batch and add the Part G ingredients. Mix until uniform.

Household/Institutional Formulations 431

7. Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent - Gel Type (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate

B

LAPONITE RDS

C

Wt. % 39.40 15.00 2.00

Potassium Carbonate Sodium Silicate Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Sodium N-Decyl Diphenoxidedisulfonate (Dowfax® 3B2) Sodium Hypochlorite (15%)

2.00 30.00 2.60 0.50

Total

8.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for one hour. Add Part B and mix for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

432 Rheology Modifier Handbook

8. Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent - Gel Type II (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RDS

Wt. % 40.20 1.00

B

Stearic Acid Aluminum Stearate

0.40 0.40

C

Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

2.60

D

Sodium Silicate Sodium Hypochlorite (5.25%)

7.50 22.00

E

Sodium Carbonate Sodium Tripolyphosphate

7.60 17.50

F

Sodium N-Decyl Diphenoxidedisulfonate (Dowfax 3B2)

A

0.80 Total

100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients and mix while heating to 650 C. Add Part C and mix for 15 minutes. Cool to 300 C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix for 10 minutes and add the Part E ingredients. Mix for 40 minutes and add Part F. Mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 433

9. Automatic Dishwashing Gel With Chlorine Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 44.75

B

CARBOPOL 672

C

Potassium Hydroxide (45%) Potassium Silicate (39%)

5.00 15.00

D

Potassium Carbonate Sodium Tripolyphosphate

5.00 20.00

E

Sodium Hypochlorite (12.5%) Sodium N-Decyl Diphenoxidedisulfonate (Dowfax 3B2)

F

Fragrance Color

1.25

8.00 1.00

Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until completely dissolved. Heating will speed the process. Add the Part E ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part F ingredients and mix until homogeneous.

434 Rheology Modifier Handbook

10. Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 53.00

B

VAN GEL ES

C

Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate Sodium Tripolyphosphate

10.00 20.00

D

Sodium Metasilicate, Anhydrous Sodium Hypochlorite (12.5%)

2.00 8.00

E

Sodium Xylenesulfonate Deceth-4-Phosphate

4.00

Total

2.25 0.75 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 55-600C. Slowly add Part B while mixing with an homogenizer at high speed. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until the solids are dissolved. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Slow the homogenizer to avoid foaming and add the Part E ingredients. Mix until homogeneous. Avoid air entrapment.

Household/Institutional Formulations 435

C. Fabric Detergents 11. Alkaline Laundry Detergent - Emulsion Type (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 ACUSOL 810 ACUSOL 445 Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 9-10 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Wt. % 42.00 2.00 4.00 2.00 10.00 40.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown using subsurface agitation. Avoid high speed mixing to avoid air entrapment.

436 Rheology Modifier Handbook

12. Alkaline Laundry Detergent - Slurry Type (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 ACUSOL 810 Sodium Tripolyphosphate (STPP) ACUSOL 445 Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 9-10 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Wt. % 32.00 2.00 4.00 10.00 2.00 10.00 40.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown using subsurface agitation. Allow sufficient time for dissolution of STPP before adding Sodium Hydroxide.

Household/Institutional Formulations 437

13. Industrial and Institutional Laundry Detergent - I (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820

Wt. % 82.50 2.5

Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 10 Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

5.00 10.00 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous

14. Industrial and Institutional Laundry Detergent - II (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820

Wt. % 76.70 3.3

Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 10 Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

10.00 10.00 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous

438 Rheology Modifier Handbook

15. Industrial and Institutional Laundry Detergent - III (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820

Wt. % 66.70 3.3

Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 10 Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

10.00 20.00 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous

Household/Institutional Formulations 439

16. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 9 ACUSOL 810 ACUSOL 445N

Wt. % 23.60 5.00 5.00 3.00

Sodium Silicate (38%) Sodium Hydroxide

8.40 55.00 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients and mix until homogeneous.

440 Rheology Modifier Handbook

17. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent - Emulsion I (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 ACUSOL 810 ACUSOL 445N Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 9 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Wt. % 42.00 2.00 4.00 2.00 10.00 40.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous.

18. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent – Emulsion II (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 ACUSOL 810 ACUSOL 445N Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 9 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Wt. % 42.00 2.00 4.00 2.00 10.00 40.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 441

19. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent - Slurry (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 ACUSOL 810 ACUSOL 445N

Wt. % 32.00 2.00 4.00 2.00

Nonylphenol Ethoxylate 9 Sodium Tripolyphosphate Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

10.00 10.00 40.00 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous. Heat the mixture to 300C, add the Part B ingredients and mix until they are dispersed/dissolved and the batch is homogeneous.

442 Rheology Modifier Handbook

20. Industrial Heavy Duty Laundry Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 49.00

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2691

C

C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol® 25-7) Sodium Alkylbenzenesulfonate (Biosoft D-62)

D

Potassium Hydroxide (45%) Sodium Metasilicate (Anhydrous)

E

Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate

F

Fragrance Color

0.50 18.00 5.50 2.00 5.00 20.00

Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. With slow mixing, add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. With slow mixing, add the Part D, E and F ingredients, in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

Household/Institutional Formulations 443

21. Thickened Heavy Duty Laundry Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2691

C

Wt. % 8.00 0.20

Deionized Water Monoethanolamine 1,2-Propanediol C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 23-6.5) Citric Acid (50%) Alkylbenzenesulfonate (Biosoft S-100)

D

Potassium Hydroxide (45%)

E

Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

11.58 2.50 5.00 18.61 24.11 2.50

Total

15.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Separately combine the Part C ingredients. With slow mixing, add Part D to Part C and mix until homogeneous. Add Parts A + B to Parts C + D and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix for 5 minutes until homogeneous.

444 Rheology Modifier Handbook

22. Laundry Pre-spotter Sprayable Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2623

C

C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 25-3) C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 25-6.5)

D

Wt. % 84.30 0.05 10.00 5.00

Tetrasodium EDTA Sodium Hydroxide (18%) Fragrance Color Total

0.50 0.15 q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

Household/Institutional Formulations 445

23. Carpet Shampoo (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RD

B

Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate

5.00

Tetrasodium EDTA (40%) Sodium Carbonate Disodium Caproamphodipropionate(and) Capryloamphodipropionate

5.00 5.00 5.00

C

Wt. % 78.00 2.00

Total

100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add Part B and mix for 10 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

446 Rheology Modifier Handbook

24. Rug Shampoo Concentrate (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient VEEGUM  T Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23)

Wt. % 0.70 0.30

B

Purified Water

C

Purified Water SMA 2625 Resin Ammonium Hydroxide (28%)

4.85 0.90 0.25

D

Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (29%) Sodium Lauroyl Sarcosinate (Vanseal® NALS-30)

20.00 15.00

E

Preservative

58.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients and add them to Part B while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Separately mix the Part C ingredients until clear and uniform. Check the pH and adjust to 9.7, if necessary. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, with slow mixing to avoid foaming. Avoid incorporating air. Mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous. Directions for use: Dilute one parts of the concentrate with nine parts water and apply to carpet. Vacuum up foam when dry.

Household/Institutional Formulations 447

D. Hard Surface Cleaners and Polishes Basin, Tub and Tile Cleaners 25. Acid Bowl Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A B

C

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 75.40

VEEGUM Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23)

0.90 0.45

Tetrasodium EDTA (40%) Oleyl Hydroxyethyl Imidazoline (Monazoline O) Hydrochloric Acid (37%) Benzalkonium Chloride (BarquatMB-80) Total

1.00 1.00 20.00 1.25 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

448 Rheology Modifier Handbook

26. Toilet Bowl Cleaner with Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 60.75

B

CARBOPOL 676

1.25

C

Potassium Hydroxide (45%) Potassium Silicate (39%)

5.00 5.00

D

Potassium Carbonate Sodium Hypochlorite (12.5%)

5.00 8.00

E

Amine Oxide (Barlox12)

F

Fragrance Color

10.00

Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D, E and F ingredients, in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

Household/Institutional Formulations 449

27. Acidic Toilet Bowl Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Citric Acid (50%)

Wt. % 43.00 50.00

B

CARBOPOL 674

2.00

C

Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft S-100) Sodium Dodecyldiphenyloxide Disulfonate (45%)

2.00 3.00

D

Fragrance Color Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous before adding the next one.

450 Rheology Modifier Handbook

28. Hard Surface Liquid Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 43.40

B

VAN GEL ES Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23)

C

Calcium Carbonate (-100 Mesh)

50.00

D

Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonate (CalsoftL-40)

5.00

E

Preservative

1.20 0.40

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C, D and E in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 451

29. Bathroom Cleaner with Disinfectant (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A B

C

D

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 86.65

VAN GEL B Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23)

1.00 0.35

Diatomaceous Earth (Superfloss) Tetrasodium EDTA (40%) Sodium o-phenylphenate

5.00 2.75 0.25

Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonate (CalsoftL-40) Butyl Cellosolve

3.00

Total

1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.

452 Rheology Modifier Handbook

30. Liquid Cleanser with Bleach (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

VAN GEL B

C

Wt. % 62.25 2.25

Dicalite Sodium Carbonate Sodium Hypochlorite (5.25%) (SiponLSB) Total

10.00 4.50 20.00 1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

Household/Institutional Formulations 453

31. Liquid Tile Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 76.50

B

VAN GEL B

1.50

C

Sodium Polymethacrylate (Darvan No.7) Octoxynol 13 (Triton X-102) (Sulfamin 85) Pine Oil

2.00 5.00 5.00 5.00

D

Kaolin (Kaopolite )

5.00

E

Preservative Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one. Slowly add Part D to the batch and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous.

454 Rheology Modifier Handbook

32. Abrasive Cleaner Without Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water Ethanol

B

CARBOPOL 674

C

Deionized Water Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Sodium Bicarbonate

10.00 1.00 1.20

Calcium Carbonate (Georgia Marble White #8) C12-15 Linear Alcohol (3 moles EO) Cocamide DEA (Ninol11-CM)

30.00

D

E

Wt. % 52.10 2.00 0.60

Fragrance Total

2.50 0.60 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 455

33. Calcium Carbonate Abrasive Cleaner Without Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 62.10

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2623

0.25

C

Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

0.20

D

C12-15 Linear Alcohol (3 moles EO) Sodium Alkylbenzenesulfonate (Nacconol 90G)

1.50 0.50

E

Calcium Carbonate (Georgia Marble White #8)

30.00

F

Fragrance

q.s. Total Note 1 Note 1: These amounts do not total 100%. but are presented as published in the technical literature of the supplier. Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D and E ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous. Add Part F, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.

456 Rheology Modifier Handbook

34. Phosphate-Free Soft Scrub (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water LAPONITE RD

Wt. % 28.25 2.00

B

Sodium Carbonate (25% Solution)

1.30

C

Sodium Hydroxide (50% Solution) Sodium Hypochlorite (15% Solution)

1.50 8.00

D

Calcium Carbonate

25.00

E

Carbomer 695 (1.5% Solution)

32.75

F

Sodium N-Decyldiphenoxide Disulfonate (Dowfax 3B2)

1.20 Total

100.00

Mixing Procedure Separately prepare Part E solution according to the manufacturers instructions. Mix the Part A ingredients for 15 minutes and add Part B. Mix for 5 minutes and add the Part C ingredients. Mix for 5 minutes and add Part D. Mix for 5 minutes and add Part E. Stir slowly for 5 minutes and add Part F. Mix for 3 minutes.

Household/Institutional Formulations 457

35. Tub and Tile Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company)

Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RDS

B

Sodium Silicate

C

Sodium Hydroxide (50% Solution) Sodium Hypochlorite (5.25% Solution)

D

Sodium Carbonate

E

Sodium Tripolyphosphate

F

Sodium N-Decyldiphenoxide Disulfonate (Dowfax 3B2)

Wt. % 42.50 2.00 5.00 2.60 22.00 7.60 17.50 0.80 Total

100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredie nts for 20 minutes and add Part B. Mix for 5 minutes and add the Part C ingredients. Mix for 5 minutes and add Part D. Mix for 10 minutes and add Part E. Stir for 10 minutes and add Part F. Mix for 3 minutes.

458 Rheology Modifier Handbook

36. Liquid Abrasive Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Silica (U.S. Silica Co. Sil-Co Sil 53) ACUSOL 820 Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate Nonoxynol 9 Sodium Hydroxide (10%) Total

Wt. % 44.40 50.00 1.50 3.00 0.25 0.85 100.00

Total

Wt. % 51.50 42.00 5.00 1.00 0.50 q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

37. Abrasive Calcium Carbonate Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Calcium Carbonate (Ducal40) C12-14 Alcohol Ethoxylate (7 moles EO) ACUSOL 820 Bentonite (Laviothix  P1) Diethanolamine to pH 9.7

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

Household/Institutional Formulations 459

Flooring Cleaners 38. Floor Tile Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 810 ACUSOL 505N Nonoxynol 9 Sodium Silicate (Starso) Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

Wt. % 66.80 0.50 5.70 3.40 23.60 100.00

460 Rheology Modifier Handbook

39. Low-Foam, Machine Floor Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 810 Potassium Hydroxide Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate Trisodium Phosphate (anhydrous) Potassium Silicate (Kasil #6) TritonDF-12

Wt. % 53.27 8.33 3.40 22.00 5.00 5.00 3.00 Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown. Use Instructions: Dilute to 0.2 - 0.5% in water

Household/Institutional Formulations 461

Glass Cleaners 41. Clear, Thickened Glass/Multi-Surface Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RD

Wt. % 87.50 1.00

Isopropyl Alcohol Butyl Cellosolve Ammonium Hydroxide (27%) Ammonium Laureth Sulfate (SterolCS330) Total

5.00 5.00 1.00 0.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

462 Rheology Modifier Handbook

41a. Glass/Window Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 92.45

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2623

0.10

C

Isopropyl Alcohol Ammonium Hydroxide

5.00 0.20

D

Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft S-100) Propylene Glycol Methyl Ether (Dowanol PM)

0.25 2.00

E

Fragrance Color Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B. Mix each until homogeneous. With minimal agitation, add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 463

Metal Cleaners and Polishes 42. Liquid Silver Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 77.20

B

VEEGUM Carboxyme thylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MT)

2.00 0.30

C

Diatomaceous Earth (Snowfloss)

D

Octoxynol 13 (Triton X-102)

5.00

E

(Vanchem NATD)

0.50

F

Preservative

15.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part C slowly and mix until homogeneous. With slow agitation, add Part D to the batch and mix until homogeneous. Add Parts E and F in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

464 Rheology Modifier Handbook

43. Silver and Metal Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Dimethicone (SF96, 350cstk.) DC “20” Release Coating Stoddard Solvent Lauric Acid

Wt. % 1.00 2.00 20.00 2.00

B

Deionized Water Morpholine

43.48 0.86

C

Deionized Water CARBOPOL EZ-2

16.00 0.35

D

Ammonium Hydroxide

E

Kaolin (Kaopolite)

0.31

Total

14.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using a high shear mixer. Add the Part B ingredients while continuing to mix. Separately mix the Part C ingredients. When the resin is completely wetted out add Part C to Parts A + B with good agitation. Add Parts D and E in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 465

44. Stainless Steel Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RD

Wt. % 68.90 2.00

B

Calcium Carbonate (ECC Micro-White  100) Cyclomethicone (SF 1202)

C

Octoxynol 13

D

Ammonium Hydroxide (28%) Preservative

20.00 2.00 5.00

Total

2.00 0.10 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Heat Part A to 650C and add the Part B ingredients. Mix for 10 minutes and add Part C with slow mixing. Cool the batch to 250C and add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.

466 Rheology Modifier Handbook

45. Copper and Brass Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 43.00

B

VAN GEL B

C

Diatomaceous Earth (Superfloss) Ammonium Hydroxide

15.00 1.00

D

Mineral Spirits Oleic Acid Oleamide DEA (Witcamide 511C)

30.00 8.00 1.50

E

Preservative

1.50

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients slowly and mix until homogeneous. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and mix until clear and homogeneous. Add Part D to the batch and mix until a homogeneous emulsion is formed. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 467

47. Chrome Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

B

C

Ingredient Deionized Water Morpholine

Wt. % 39.25 1.39

Pumice Diatomaceous Earth (Snow Floss)

14.00 9.25

Dimethicone (SF96, 350 cstk.) Pine Oil Oleic Acid Mineral Spirits

1.85 0.46 1.85 24.50

D

TEA Lauryl Sulfate Cocamide DEA (Standamid PD)

E

Deionized Water CARBOPOL EZ-2

2.30 0.50

Total

4.46 0.19 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Add the Part B Ingredients with rapid agitation. Mix the Part C ingredients in a separate vessel and slowly add the mixture to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, mix the Part E ingredients until the resin is completely wetted out. Add this dispersion to the batch and mix thoroughly.

468 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Other Hard-Surface Cleaners and Polishes 47. Porcelain Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RD

Wt. % 75.20 2.00

B

Octoxynol 9 (Triton X-100) Octoxynol 13 (Triton X-102)

4.50 4.50

C

Carnauba Wax Mineral Oil

1.90 2.70

D

Deodorized Mineral Spirits Preservative Total

9.00 0.20 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients and mix for 10 minutes. Heat the batch to 850C. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and heat them to 850C. Mix Part C with Parts A + B for 10 minutes. Cool to 250C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix until uniform.

Household/Institutional Formulations 469

48. Marble Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 74.80

B

CARBOPOL EZ-2

0.20

C

Nonoxynol 9 (Igepal CO-630)

3.70

D

Mineral Spirits Diatomaceous Earth Triethanolamine Total

15.00 6.00 0.30 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A by simply dumping the resin in the water and mixing until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C and mix with moderate agitation. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

470 Rheology Modifier Handbook

49. Detergent Resistant Auto Polish (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

VEEGUM

C

Kaolin (Kaopolite SF)

10.00

Mineral Spirits Dow Corning 536 Fluid Dow Corning 531 Fluid Oleamide DEA (Witcamide 511)

35.60 0.70 4.20 4.00

E

Carnauba Wax Emulsion (C-340)

10.00

F

Preservative

D

Wt. % 34.50 1.00

Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part C slowly and mix until homogeneous. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and mix until clear and homogeneous. Add Part E to Part D and mix until homogeneous. Add Parts A + B +C to Parts D + E and mix until homogeneous. Add Part F and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 471

50. Liquid Car Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

B

C

D

E

Ingredient Deionized Water Triethanolamine Wax Emulsion Morpholine

Wt. % 37.80 0.20 2.50 2.00

Dimethicone (SF96, 350 cstk.) Oleic Acid Kerosene Mineral Spirits

1.50 2.50 10.00 6.00

Deionized Water CARBOPOL EZ-2

19.70 0.30

Isopropyl Alcohol Mineral Spirits Silicone Polymer (SF 1706) Silicone Polymer (SF 1705)

0.40 5.00 1.50 2.10

Kaolin (Kaopolite) Total

8.50 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. In a separate vessel, mix the Part B ingredients. Add Part B to Part A with vigorous agitation. In a separate vessel, mix the Part C ingredients until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, mix the Part D ingredients until homogeneous and add them to the batch. Slowly add Part E and mix until homogeneous.

472 Rheology Modifier Handbook

51. Boat Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized water

B

CARBOPOL EZ-2

0.20

C

Morpholine

2.50

D

Dimethicone (SF96, 350 cstk.) Silicone Fluid (Viscasil, 10,000 cstk.) Oleic Acid Mineral Spirits Glycol/Butylene Glycol Montanate (Hoechst Wax E)

E

Mineral Spirits Silicone Polymer (SF 1706)

F

Kaolin (Kaopolite)

Wt. % 37.80

2.00 1.50 2.50 10.00 6.00

5.00 1.50

8.50 Total Note 1 Note 1: These amounts do not total 100% but are presented as published in the technical literature of the supplier. Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A by simply dumping the resin in the water and mixing until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good agitation and heat to 80-850C. In a separate vessel, mix the Part D ingredients and heat them to 90-950C and mix until the wax melts and the mixture is homogeneous Add Part D to the batch with good mixing Cool to 60-650C. Combine the Part E ingredients in a separate vessel and add them to the batch with high shear mixing. Slowly add Part F and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 473

52. Furniture Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL EZ-2

0.20

C

Triethanolamine

0.20

Oxidized Polyethylene(and)Oxidized Microcrystalline Wax ( Cardis  36) Montan Acid Wax (Hoechst Wax S) Oleic Acid Morpholine Deionized Water

0.25

D

E

Wt. % 91.10

0.25 0.08 0.10

Silicone Emulsion (SM2133) Silicone Emulsion (SM2135) Total

4.00 2.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A by simply dumping the resin in the water and mixing until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, mix the first three ingredients of Part D. With mild stirring heat these ingredients to 96-1000C. When melted add the remaining Part D ingredients in the order shown (the water should be added at 950C). Continue mixing while cooling to 450C. Add Part D to Parts A + B + C with good mixing. Add the Part E ingredients with slow agitation and mix until homogeneous.

474 Rheology Modifier Handbook

53. Solvent Degreaser (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2623

C

d-Limonene

Wt. % 81.18 0.32 10.00

Propylene Glycol Methyl Ether (Dowanol PM)

D

Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft S-100) C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 25-6.5)

2.00 2.00 1.50

E

Isopropyl Alcohol

2.50

F

Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

0.50

G

Color Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. With minimal agitation, add the Part D ingredients and mix each until homogeneous. Add Parts E, F and G (if desired) in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 475

54. Emulsion Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 Deodorized Kerosene Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

Wt. % 88.10 1.70 10.00 0.20 100.00

476 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Mildew Cleaners 55. Mold and Mildew Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

Wt. % 84.50

B

CARBOPOL 672

1.00

C

Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Sodium Metasilicate, Pentahydrate

2.00 0.50

D

Sodium Caprylyl Sulfonate (BioTerge ® PAS8S)

5.00

E

Sodium Hypochlorite (15%)

7.00

F

Color Fragrance Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B. Mix each until homogeneous. With minimal agitation, add Part D and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E with slow agitation and mix until homogeneous. Add Part F, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 477

56. Mildew Remover with Bleach (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 85.00

LAPONITE RDS

2.00

B

Sodium Silicate

2.00

C

Sodium Hypochlorite (15%) Sodium N-Decyl Diphenyloxide Disulfonate (Dowfax 3B2) Total

10.00 1.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add Part B and mix for 5 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.

478 Rheology Modifier Handbook

E. Oven and Grill Cleaners 57. Alkaline Grill Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water Caprylyl/Capryl Glucoside (Oramix  CG-110) ACUSOL 820 Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

Wt. % 80.80 2.00

Total

1.20 16.00 100.00

Total

Wt. % 75.30 4.20 0.50 20.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

58. Oven, Grill and Drain Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 Nonoxynol 9 Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

Household/Institutional Formulations 479

59. High Caustic Oven Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

CARBOPOL 674

C

Potassium Hydroxide (45%)

D

Propylene Glycol Methyl Ether (Dowanol PM)

E

C8-16 Alkyl Polyglucoside (Glucopon 425CS) Total

Wt. % 69.78 2.00 22.22 3.00

3.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B. Mix continuously until homogeneous. Add Part D and E in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

480 Rheology Modifier Handbook

60. Gelled Oven Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RDS

Wt. % 92.24 2.00

Potassium Hydroxide (45%) Sodium Silicate

3.36 2.40 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.

61. Thixotropic Oven Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water LAPONITE RD

B

Potassium Hydroxide (45%)

C

Butyl Diglycol

Wt. % 75.50 2.50 16.00

Total

6.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Slowly add Part B and mix for 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix for 5 minutes.

Household/Institutional Formulations 481

62. Caustic/Amine Grill Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 Jorphox KCAO Jorquest 100 Monoethanolamine Sodium Metasilicate Pentahydrate Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

Wt. % 66.50 5.00 3.00 2.00 3.00 0.50 20.00 100.00

482 Rheology Modifier Handbook

63. Heavy Duty Oven and Grill Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 77.00

B

VEEGUM T Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23)

0.75 0.25

C

Sodium Cocoamphoacetate (Monateric  CM-36S)

2.00

D

Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

20.00

E

Propellant Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Parts C and D in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous. If aerosol packaging is to be used, add Part E during packaging.

Household/Institutional Formulations 483

F. Waterless Hand Cleaners 64. Waterless Hand Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

Wt. % 44.00

B

VAN GEL B Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MT)

1.70 0.30

C

Potassium Hydroxide Purified Water

1.00 3.00

D

Oleic Acid Mineral Oil Deodorized Kerosene

10.00 10.00 30.00

E

Preservative Total

q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Mix the Parts C ingredients separately and them to Parts A + B. Mix until uniform Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.

484 Rheology Modifier Handbook

65. Ringing Gel Waterless Hand Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (28%) Deodorized Kerosene Mineral Oil Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order listed.

Wt. % 39.40 1.70 10.70 38.00 10.00 0.20 100.00

Household/Institutional Formulations 485

66. Waterless Hand Cleaner - Thick Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingredient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL ETD 2001

C

d-Limonene

Wt. % 57.50 0.50 25.00

Propylene Glycol Glycerin C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol® 25-7) Diazolidinyl Urea (Germaben II-E)

2.00 3.00 0.50 1.00

E

Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

0.50

F

Pumice

D

Total

10.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Parts A + B to Part C with moderate agitation and continue mixing for 10 minutes. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Add Part E and check to make sure the pH reaches 5-6. Add Part F and mix until homogeneous.

486 Rheology Modifier Handbook

G. Other Household/Institutional Formulations 67. Liquid Drain Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water ACUSOL 820 Octoxynol 9 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) Total

Wt. % 87.40 2.50 0.10 10.00 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.

68. Rust Removing Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

Ingre dient Deionized Water

B

CARBOPOL EZ-2

C

Sodium Hydroxide (50%)

D

Gluconic Acid (50%)

Wt. % 44.64 1.79 35.71

Total

17.86 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C with good agitation. Add Part D and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 487

69. Mosquito Repellant Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

A

Ingredient Purified Water

B

VEEGUM Ultra Carbomer 940 (Carbopol 940)

C

N,N-Diethyl-m-Toluamide Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate

D

Sodium Hydroxide Solution to pH 5.5 Preservative Dye, Fragrance

Wt. % 79.20 0.40 0.40 15.00 5.00

Total

q.s. q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer at 1800 rpm. Mix for 30 minutes. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and heat to 500 C. Heat Parts A + B to 500 C. Add Part C to Parts A + B slowly while mixing at 800 rpm. Continue mixing while cooling to 350 C. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.

488 Rheology Modifier Handbook

70. Clear Gel Insect Repellant (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

A

B

Ingredient Deionized Water Ethyl Alcohol (SD-40) PEG-400 N,N-Diethyl-m-Toluamide Sodium Hydroxide (18%)

Wt. % 47.00 31.60 10.00 10.00 0.40

CARBOPOL Ultrez 10

1.79 100.00

Total

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix until uniform. Disperse Part B in Part A with vigorous agitation. Heat to 500 C and mix at 1000-1500 rpm until a clear gel forms.

Appendix A Suppliers of Viscometers and Other Rheological Instruments Included below is a partial listing of the many worldwide suppliers of viscometers and rheological instruments. Where available, some of the types of viscometric equipment they manufacture or distribute are included as well as the brand names employed and contact information supplied.

ACA Systems Tietotie 4 83700 Polvijarvi, Finland 358-(0)208 33 2 151, FAX: 358-(0)208 33 2 151 E-mail: [email protected] www.aca.fi ACAV Ultra High Shear Rate Viscometer for optimizing coating performance in paper plants and suppliers of coating chemicals. The ACAV A2 uses a piston driven mechanical principle to provide a complete and precise shear rate analysis for coating rheology. Argonne National Laboratory www.et.anl.gov/sinde/labs/UTlab/UTVvsco.html Non-intrusive real time, on-line viscometer. Ultrasonic type. Applications for food industry, plastic and polymer industries, petroleum industry and laboratory benchtop.

489

490 Rheology Modifier Handbook Appendix A, continued Automation Products Inc. 3030 Max Roy Street Houston, Texas 77008-9981, USA (800) 231-2062 or (713) 869-0361 FAX: (713) 869-7332 Dynatrol, on-line, continuous viscometer for coatings, adhesives paints, glues, inks, crude oil, fuel oils, emulsions, polymers, resins, gravies, puddings, gelatins, etc. Berkeley MicroInstruments, Inc. 1305 South 46th Street, Building 164 Richmond, CA 94804, USA (510) 231-5710 or (510) 231-5711 FAX 510-231-5711 www.berkeleymicro.com Microviscometer model BMV105 (Ultrasonic Type). Solid state, continuous real-time measurement.

Bohlin Instruments UK 44(0)12 85 64 44 07 FAX: 44(0)12 85 64 43 14 www.bohlin.co.uk

Bohlin USA (609) 655-4447 FAX: (609) 655-1475

Bohlin Germany 49(0) 70 41 96 490 FAX: 49(0)70 41 96 49 29 Rheogoniometer VOR/VORM for rotational and dynamic testing on fluids, semi-solids and solids. Asphalt/Bitumen testing-DSR/BDR- a complete rheometer system for evaluation of asphalt over a wide range of temperatures and frequencies. Visco-88 viscometer uses standard cup and bob (coaxial cylinder) or cone/plate measuring systems.

Appendix A 491 Appendix A, continued Brinkman Instruments, Inc. www.brinkmann.com/visc_capviscometers.html Capillary viscometers. Ubbelohde and Cannon-Fenske type. micro-Ubbelohde, micro-Ostwald or Ubbelohde dilution viscometers.

Also type

Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc. 11 Commerce Street Middleboro, MA 02346-1031, USA (508) 946-6200 FAX: (508) 946-6262 www.brookfieldengineering.com A very wide and complete product line including standard rotational instruments supplied with “disc-type” or “ASTM” spindles and cylindrical spindles. Special purpose instruments include cone and plate viscometers, high-pressure rheometers, high shear rate (CAP) digital viscometers and the KU-1 (Krebs Unit) Viscometer for paint. Viscometers are supplied as either dial reading or digital. Brookfield offers programmable (DV) type viscometers and the DV-III Series Rheometers with optional Rheocalc  Software for PC control. Cannon Instrument Company P.O. Box 16 2139 High Tech Road State College, PA 16804-0016, USA (814) 353-8000 FAX: (814)353-8007 Email: [email protected] Products include BBR bending beam rheometer, CACV automatic kinematic viscosity capillary viscometer, CAV automatic viscometer for kinematic viscosity, CMRV-2 mini-rotary viscometer and CMRV-3 thermoelectric mini-rotary viscometer.

492 Rheology Modifier Handbook Appendix A, continued CCSi Rebuilt Viscometers Corporate Consulting, Service & Instruments, Inc. 1145 Highbrook Avenue, Suite 500 Akron, Ohio 44301-1356, USA (330) 376-3600 or (800) 742-8535 FAX: (330) 376-8500 www.ccsi-inc.com Rebuilds many of the most popular rheological instruments such as the Mooney Viscometer STI 90. DM Scientific www.dmscientific.com/doehler_accessories.html Glass capillary viscometers including Cannon-Fenske, Cannon-Manning semi-micro, Ubbelohde, Cannon-Ubbelohde, Cannon-Ubbelohde semimicro, Zeitfuchs cross-arm, Cannon-Manning Vacuum and modified Koppers types. Also available is the Fann Series 35 viscometer, a rotating cup type with both six and twelve speed models. Fann Instrument Company P.O. Box 4350 Houston, Texas 77210, USA (800) 347-0450 FAX: (281) 871-4358 www.fann.com Fann Series 35 rotational viscometer. Fisher Scientific 3970 Johns Creek Court, Suite. 500 Suwanee, Georgia 30024, USA (800) 766-7000 Products include: Portable Zahn cups, Ubbelohde tubes, Cannon-Fenske Type kinematic viscometers, Cannon-Manning type vacuum viscometer tubes and Kimble Varnish Viscometer tubes.

Appendix A 493 Appendix A, continued Gebr. HAAKE GmbH (Germany) Dieselstr. 4 D-76227 Karlsruhe, Germany 0721-4094-0 FAX: 0721-4094-300 Geneq www.geneq.com Rotational viscometer for asphalt plant field lab. ICI Cone and Plate digital viscometer. Gilmont Instruments www.barnant.com Falling ball viscometers HAAKE (USA) 53 W. Century Road Paramus, N.J. 07652, USA (201) 265-7865, FAX: (201) 265-1977 www.haake.de Falling ball or rotational viscometer types. Falling ball viscometer (Newtonian liquids), Viscotester VT01/02 (battery driven, rotational), Viscotester VT5 rotational type, following the Brookfield method, Viscotester VT550, for complete characterization of both Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids including the measurement of yield points or thixotropy. Rotovisco models, coaxial cylinder type, Hydramotion www.hydramotion.com [email protected] Portable Viscolite  700 viscometer.

494 Rheology Modifier Handbook Appendix A, continued ICL Labs www.icllabs.com Cannon-Fenske routine viscometers Kaltec Scientific, Inc. 22425 Heslip Drive Novi, Michigan 48375-4138, USA (248) 349-8100 FAX: (248) 349-8909 E-mail: [email protected] Hercules Hi-Shear Viscometer, Model DV-10 and TS-9. Malcom Instruments Corporation 26200 Industrial Boulevard Hayward, CA 94545, USA (510) 293-0580 FAX: (510) 293-0940 Malcom Company Limited 15-10, Honmachi 4-chone, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151, Japan 03 (3320) 5611 FAX: 03 (3320) 5866 www.malcom.co.jp Spiral viscometers for solder paste. Models PM-2 (hand-held), PC-1TL (tabletop spiral) and PCU-200 digital spiral. Prediction of how solder paste will perform on a screen printer. Utilizes a double cylinder spiral pump method.

Appendix A 495 Appendix A, continued Monumental Viscometers www.monumental.com Sharp Orifice Viscometer for the solid propellant industry. Also good for a wide variety of filled and unfilled polymer compounds at both low and high shear rates. Useful for coal slurries, intaglio inks, rubber, uncured solid propellants, cements and clay slurries. ParrPhysica (800) 688-3569 www.paarphysica.com DSR 4000 High Dynamic Rheometer, Rheolab MC1 rheometer, Rheolab MC100 rheometer, KF20 falling ball viscometer, LS100 low stress rheometer, HVA6 high shear capillary viscometer and MVM magnetoviscometer. P & R Laboratory Group Limited Brindley Road St. Helens, UK WA9 4HY 44 (0)1744 831 800, FAX: 44(0)1744 831 888 www.p-rgroup.co.uk U tube viscometer, suspended level viscometer, Cannon-Fenske Routine viscometer, ASTM Ubbelohde Viscometer and Zeitfuchs Cross Arm Viscometer. Porpoise Viscometers Ltd. Peel House Peel Road Skelmersdale WN8 9PT 01695 50002, FAX: 01695 50329 www.applegate.co.uk www.porpoise.co.uk Specializes in on-line rheology equipment.

496 Rheology Modifier Handbook Appendix A, continued Reologica Instruments AB www.infra.demon.co.uk/5viscoms.htm ViscoTech, rotational type, RheoCheck, programmable and rotational, and BrukCheck, rotational type. SUCK WISsenshaftliche Geräte ENTwicklung www.suck.de/viscometers.htm [email protected] Dip-in viscometer coaxial system, coaxial standard viscometer KSV and PKV plate-cone viscometer. Type S use fixed rotational speed. Type P is a computer-controlled viscometer. TA Instruments 109 Lukens Dr. New Castle, DE 19720 (302) 427-4000 FAX: (302) 427-4001 www.tainst.com Rheolyst  AR1000 viscometers.

and

CSL2 controlled stress/controlled rate

Thermal Technology Centre National Research Council Canada Building M-17, Montreal Road Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, K1A 0R6 www.ttc.nrc.ca/fbvisc_e.htm Falling ball viscometer for prediction of heat transfer and pressure drops in system components.

Appendix A 497 Appendix A, continued Theta Industries, Inc. 26 Valley Road Port Washington, N.Y. 11050, USA (516) 883-4088 FAX: (516) 883-4599 E-mail: [email protected] www.theta-us.com Rheotronic  II, rotational type, Rheotronic III, parallel plate and Rheotronic IV, bending beam type. Viscotek Corporation 15600 W. Hardy Road Houston, Texas 77060, U.S.A. (281) 445-5966 FAX: (281) 931-4336 www.viscotek-usa.com Relative capillary viscometer, model Y501.

Appendix B Trade Name Directory Below is a list of trade names that appear in this text along with the name of the supplier that owns it. Also included is a cross-reference to the tables in Part 2 where further information about the product is presented. The address, telephone and FAX number of the supplier can be found in Appendix C. Trade Name A-C ACRITAMER ACRYSOL ACULYN ACumist ACUSOL ADVITROL AEROSIL ASVITROL Avicel

Supplier AlliedSignal, Inc. R•I•T•A Corp. Rohm and Haas Company Rohm and Haas Company AlliedSignal, Inc. Rohm and Haas Company Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Degussa AG Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G. FMC Corp.

See Table: 2.15 2.2b 2.1d, 2.4b 2.1d, 2.4b 2.15 2.1d, 2.4b 2.14c 2.18b 2.14c 2.6

BENECEL Bentolite BENTONE

Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. Southern Clay Products, Inc. RHEOX, Inc.

2.10a, 2.11a 2.19c 2.14a, 2.19b

CAB-O-SIL Carbopol CELLOSIZE Claytone CULMINAL

Cabot Corp., Cab-O-Sil Div. B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Union Carbide Corp. Southern Clay Products, Inc. Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc.

2.18a 2.2a 2.8b 2.14b 2.10a

DARILOID DRICOID

Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company

498

2.3 2.3, 2.20b

Appendix B 499 Appendix B, continued Trade Name Gelcarin Gelwhite GENUGEL GENULACTA GENUVISCO GFS

FMC Corp. Southern Clay Products, Inc. Copenhagen Pectin A/S Copenhagen Pectin A/S Copenhagen Pectin A/S Monsanto-Kelco Company

Hi-Care Hypan

Rhodia, Inc. LIPO Chemicals, Inc.

2.12b 2.1a

Jaguar

Rhodia, Inc.

2.12b

KELACID KELCOLOID KELCOSOL KELFLO KELGIN KELGUM KELMAR KELNOODLIZE R KELSET KELTEX KELTONE KELTOSE KELTROL KELVIS KELZAN KLUCEL KOLLIDON

Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. BASF Aktiengesellschaft

2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.20b 2.3 2.20b 2.9 2.17a

LACTICOL LAPONITE LUVISCOL

Monsanto-Kelco Company Laporte Absorbents BASF Aktiengesellschaft

2.3 2.19a 2.17a

Supplier

See Table: 2.5b 2.19c 2.5a 2.5a 2.5a 2.20b

2.3 2.3 2.3 2.20b 2.3 2.3, 2.20c 2.3 2.3

500 Rheology Modifier Handbook Appendix B, continued Trade Name MANUCOL MANUGEL MANUTEX MARLOID MAYPRODYN METHOCEL MicroQuick Mineral Colloid

Supplier Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Monsanto-Kelco Company Rhodia, Inc The Dow Chemical Company FMC Corp. Southern Clay Products, Inc.

See Table: 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.13b 2.10b, 2.11b 2.6 2.19c

N-HANCE Natrosol Novagel

Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. FMC Corp.

2.12a 2.8a 2.6

OPTIGEL

Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G.

2.19d

Pemulen PLASDONE POLYOX POVIDERM

B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals International Specialty Products Union Carbide Corp. International Specialty Products

2.2a 2.17b 2.16b 2.17b

RHEOLATE RHODICARE RHODIGEL RHODIGUM RHODOPOL

RHEOX, Inc. Rhodia, Inc. Rhodia, Inc. Rhodia, Inc. Rhodia, Inc.

SeaKem SeaSpen SHERBELIZER SIDENT SIPERNAT STRUCTURE SUPERCOL SUPERLOID

FMC Corp. FMC Corp. Monsanto-Kelco Company Degussa AG Degussa AG National Starch & Chemical Co. Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. Monsanto-Kelco Company

2.1c, 2.4a 2.20c 2.20c 2.20c 2.20c 2.5b 2.5b 2.3 2.18c 2.18c 2.1b 2.12a 2.3

Appendix B 501 Appendix B, continued Trade Name TIXOGEL

Supplier Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G.

See Table: 2.14c

VAN GEL VEEGUM Viscarin

R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. FMC Corp.

2.19e 2.19e 2.5b

Also included in this text are a few product names that are not trade names. These are included in the table below: Name Aqualon CMC J.X.G. KOB Locust Bean Gum Mineral Colloid PEO PVP

Supplier Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. Jungbunzlauer International AG Monsanto-Kelco Company Ashland Chemical Company and Rhodia, Inc. Southern Clay Products Company R•I•T•A Corp. International Specialty Products

See Table: 2.7 2.20a 2.20b 2.13 2.19c 2.16a 2.17b

Appendix C Suppliers of Rheology Modifiers Listed below are the names, addresses, telephone and FAX numbers for the 26 rheology modifier manufacturers represented in this handbook. Also included are their Internet web sites, if available. While most are based in the US, several are European based. The European company’s US office or representative is also listed. Most of the larger companies have offices and warehouse facilities around the world. Others may use local distributors or agents to handle their products. Handbook users can learn the location of the company office or distributor/agent closest to them by contacting the corporate headquarters office listed below. It is also probable that there are other manufacturers of rheology modifiers that the authors were not able to locate. It would therefore be prudent for handbook users outside the US, particularly in Asia and South America, to search in local directories for other manufacturers not listed. 1. AlliedSignal, Inc. P.O. Box 1039, 100 Colombia Rd. Morristown, NJ 07692, USA (800) 222-0094 FAX (201) 455-6154

3. Ashland Chemical Company Fine Ingredients Div. P.O. Box 2219 Columbus, OH, USA (614) 790-3083 FAX (614) 790-6126 www.ashchem.com

2. Aqualon, 1313 North Market St. Wilmington, DE 19894, USA (800) 345-0447 FAX (302) 946-2296 www.herc.com/aqualon

4. BASF Aktiengesellschaft Feinchemie D-67056 Ludwigshafen Germany or 3000 Continental Dr.-North Mount Olive, NJ 07828-1234, (800) 533-8964 FAX (973) 456-5355 www.basf.com 502

Appendix C 503

Appendix C, continued 5. Cabot Corp., Cab-O-Sil Div. P.O.Box 188 Tuscola, IL 61953-0188, USA (800) 222-6745 FAX (217) 253-4334 www.cabot-corp.com/cabosil

9. FMC Corp. 1735 Market St. Philadelphia, PA 19103, USA (800) 526-3649 FAX (215)299-6821 www.avicel.com

6. Copenhagen Pectin A/S Div. of Hercules, Inc. Ved Banen 16 DK-4623 Lille Skensved Denmark +45-56 16 56 16 FAX +45-56 16 94 46 www.herc.com/foodgums

10. B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals 9911 Brecksville Rd. Cleveland, OH 44141, USA (800) 331-1144 FAX (216) 447-5740 www.bfgoodrich.com

7. Degussa AG D-60287 Frankfurt am Main Germany (069) 2 18-01 FAX (069) 2 18-32 18 or 65 Challenger Rd. Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660, USA (201) 641-6100 FAX (201) 641-0297 www.degussa.com

11. Hercules Food Ingredients P.O. Box 8740, 1313 N. Market St. Wilmington, DE 19899, USA (800) 654-6529 www.herc.com/foodgums

8. The Dow Chemical Company Midland, MI 48674, USA (800) 447-4369 www.dow.com

12. International Specialty Products 1361 Alps Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470, USA (800) 622-4423 www.ispcorp.com

504 Rheology Modifier Handbook Appendix C, continued 13. Jungbunzlauer International AG 17. National Starch & Chemical Schwarzenbergplatz 16 10 Finderne Ave. 1011 Vienna Bridgewater, NJ 08807, USA Austria (800) 797-4992 (0222) 50 200-0 FAX (723) 417-5696 FAX (0222) 50 200-8 www.nationalstarch.com or 75 Wells Ave 18. RHEOX, Inc. P.O. Box 700 Newton Centre, MA 02159, Hightstown, NJ 08520, USA USA (800) 866-6800 (617) 969-0900 FAX (609) 443-2422 FAX (617) 964-2921 www.rheox.com www.jungbunzlauer.com 14. Laporte Absorbents P.O. Box 2, Moorfield Rd. Widnes, Cheshire WA8 0JU United Kingdom 0151-495 2222 FAX 0151-420 4088 (also see Southern Clay Products)

15. LIPO Chemicals, Inc. 207 19th Ave. Paterson, NJ 07504, USA (973) 345-8600 FAX (973) 345-8365 www.lipochemicals.com 16. Monsanto-Kelco Company

8355 Aero Dr. San Diego, CA 92123, USA (800) 535-2656 FAX (619) 467-6520 www.nutrasweetkelco.com

19. Rhodia, Inc. 25, quai Paul Doumer F-92404 Courbevoie Cedex France (33-1) 47 68 12 34 FAX (33-1) 47 68 19 11 or CN 7500, Prospect Plains Rd. Cranbury, NJ 08512, USA (800) 750-1660 FAX (609) 860-0075 www.food.us.rhodia.com

20. R.I.T.A. Corp. P.O. Box 1487 Woodstock, IL 60098, USA (800) 426-7759 FAX (815) 337-2522 www.ritacorp.com

Appendix C 505 Appendix C, continued 21. Rohm and Haas Company 100 Independence Mall West Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA (215) 592-3392 www.rohmhaas.com

24. Union Carbide Corp. 39 Old Ridgebury Rd. Danbury, CT 06817-0001 (800) 336-7384 FAX (713) 749-7192 www.unioncarbide.com

22. Southern Clay Products, Inc. 1212 Church St. Gonzales, TX 78629, USA (210) 672-2891 FAX (210) 672-3081 www.scprod.com

25. United Catalysts, Inc. P.O. Box 32370 Louisville, KY 40232, USA (800) 468-7210 FAX (502) 634-7727 (also see Süd-Chemie Rheologicals)

(also see Laporte Absorbents)

23. Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G. Lensbachplatz 6 D-80333, München Germany +49 89 5110-0 FAX +49 89 5110-375 www.sud-chemie.de (also see United Catalysts, Inc.)

26. R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. 30 Winfield St. Norwalk, CT 06856 (203) 853-1400 FAX (203) 853-1452 www.rtvanderbilt.com

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 99

5. Carrageenan Carrageenan is extracted from several species of red seaweed. It is a high molecular weight polysaccharide made up of sulfated and non-sulfated 3,6 anhydrogalactose and galactose units linked by alternating α 1-3 and β 14 glycoside groups. The number and position of the pendant sulfate groups differentiates the three types of Carrageenan as shown in the structural formulas below:

Kappa

Iota

Lambda

Figure 2.2 (From FMC Corp. Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below)

A. Recommended Application Areas 1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical C. Recommended Solvent Systems Water

C. Ionic Charge Anionic

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics 1. K+ and Ca++ essential for effective gelation of Kappa and Iota types, Lambda is non-gelling 2. Elevated temperature and low pH reduces gel strength

100 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Useful References 1

“GENU Carrageenan General Description”, Technical Bulletin B1, Copenhagen Pectin A/S, Lille Skensved, Denmark, 1998

“Marine Colloids Carrageenan General Technology” FMC Corp. Food Ingredients Division Technical Bulletin, Philadelphia, PA, USA, 1997 2

5. Carrageenan Table 2.5a. Copenhagen Pectin A/S Division of Hercules, Inc. Lille Skensved, Denmark Food Grades Carrageenan Type n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Viscosity, mPas1 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5%

pH, 5% Soln. 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0

Appearance White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder

Moisture, % 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 101

Trade Name GENULACTA CP-100 GENULACTA CSM-2 GENULACTA K-100 GENULACTA KM-5 GENULACTA L-100 GENULACTA LK-60 GENULACTA LRA-50 GENULACTA LRC-21 GENULACTA SGI-3F GENULACTA USD-1

Copenhagen Pectin A/S Carrageenan 1. Food Grades Trade Name GENUGEL CHP-2 GENUGEL CHP-200 GENUGEL CJ GENUGEL FB-91 GENUGEL MB-61F GENUGEL MB-73 GENUGEL ME-83 GENUGEL ME-83F GENUVISCO CSW-2 GENUVISCO J GENUVISCO J-DS GENUVISCO MP-11

Carrageenan Type n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Viscosity, mPas1 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5%

pH, 0.5% Soln. 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0

Notes for Copenhagen Pectin Carrageenan data: 1 Measured at 750C with Brookfield Viscometer using appropriate speed and spindle.

Appearance White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder White-Cream Powder

Moisture, % 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

102 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.5a, continued

5. Carrageenan Table 2.5b. FMC Corporation Philadelphia, PA, USA 1. Food Grades Trade Name

240-270 215-245 240-280 240-280 240-270 300-330 220-260 250-280 n/a 260-290 n/a 2 30-60 @ 1.5%

pH (1.5% Soln.) 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 8.0-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5 7.5-10.5

Appearance

Moisture, %

Particle Size, µm

Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder Tan Powder n/a

<12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0 <12.0

95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <250 95%min. <150 95% min. <180

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 103



SeaKem CM-514 SeaKem CM-518 SeaKem CM-611 SeaKem CM-614 SeaKem CM-615 SeaKem GP-317 SeaKem GP-359 SeaKem GP-418 SeaKem IC-611 SeaKem IC614 SeaKem IC912 Viscarin SD-389

1

Milk Viscosity , ppm

FMC Carrageenan 2. Pharmaceutical Grades pH, 1.5% Soln. 7.5-10.5 7.0-10.0 7.5-10.5

Moisture, % 12.0 max. 12.0 max. 12.0 max.

Lambda

35-95 @ 1.5% 220-350 @ 1.5%

n/a 7.5-10.5

12.5 max. <12.5

Viscarin GP-209NF

Lambda

100-130 @ 0.5%

3

7.5-10.5

<12.5

Viscarin GP-328NF

Kappa/Lambda

140-210 @ 1.5%

7.5-10.5

<12.0

Trade Name

Type

Gelcarin GP-379NF Gelcarin GP-812NF Gelcarin GP-911NF

Iota Kappa Kappa

SeaSpen  PF Viscarin GP-109NF

Iota

Viscosity , mPas2 20 min. @ 1.5% 15-25 @ 1.5% 5 min. @ 1.5% 4

Features Hot water soluble Hot water soluble Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble Cold water soluble Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble Hot water soluble

3. Personal Care Grades Viscarin GP-109

Lambda

220-350 @ 1.5%

7.5-10.5

<12

Viscarin GP-209

Lambda

100-130 @ 0.5%

7.5-10.5

<12

Viscarin GP-309

Lambda

80-130 @ 0.5%

7.5-10.5

<12

Viscarin GP-328

Kappa/Lambda

130-210 @ 1.5%

7.5-10.5

<12

Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble Hot water soluble

104 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Table 2.5b, continued

Table 2.5b, continued FMC Carrageenan 4 Industrial Grades Trade Name



SeaSpen IN

Iota Iota Kappa Kappa

Water Gel, Gms. Breakforce5 175-350 70-150 780-920 800-1000

Iota

35-95@ 1.5%

4

pH, 1.5% Soln. 8.0-10.5 8.0-10.5 7.0-10.0 7.0-10.0

Moisture, % <12 <12 <12 <12

n/a

12.0 max.

Features Hot water soluble Hot water soluble Hot water soluble Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble Cold water soluble

Notes for FMC Carrageenan data: 1 Please contact the Supplier for this test method . 2

0

Brookfield Model LV measured at 75 C and 30 rpm using the appropriate spindle. 3 0 Brookfield Model LV measured at 25 C and 30 rpm using appropriate spindle. 0 4 Brookfield Model LV measured at 25 C using appropriate speed , Helipath stand an T-Bar spindle. 5 Please contact the Supplier for this test method .

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 105

Gelcarin 359 Gelcarin 379 Gelcarin 812 Gelcarin 911

Type